Home

GAGEtrak 6 - CyberMetrics

Contents

1. 2 a x TDAP Rea a a y cw tao GOS ag ai Pe spur aaa ev qoi E E Mainermntt _ Ei PageHeader PageHeader GSEs Ci se FHI GroupHeader1 Hd Md e Detbiil ETRE H GroupFooter1 7 ar Ai E tal H PageFooter B gee t RA 3093 7227 Aiar ms Location 299 z nomm ms CalFreq me CalFreni init ympyrE SSE NS P To H He O Es Jv rITxeewex z dnd pec acto I EA Drag and drop fields P LUIS OHCEPZICECHDHEI GREER RG Jj EEE EI fromthe listto your oe jJ n I t eee eee eee StandardiD ooo GroupHeader1 DENM S M BackStyle 0 5 ENESE HIRE cip EPES APE IRESE EE EN EN EE ARAE EEEE CanGrow True CanShrink False eas EA EE E T ColumnLayout False A I Ds Eiald ma codi E E PageFooter CanShrink oe ses emmdleeen cocci a cle cee aeec ton vet bernaese es d ROMP SAE EEVEE HUE e M ND Manca RP EE RUE i gt Ready You can drag as many fields as you can put into your canvas but remember that the canvas working area Is the actual edge to edge size of your printing paper Also the top of the Page Header and the buttom of the Page Footer mark the upper and lower edges of your paper You can move the blue markers on the ruler bar to your desired edge margin this will be ma
2. 185 87 MSA From Calibration ENUY isi iio eren 118 N Navigation B BOLISs iced tai bet cts 40 42 Next Due Date 17 18 22 26 63 64 65 101 NIST NORD eee db hs ed asse eaten cr 55 PNG iil AAEE cet Beco scoec tte tt A teeth te ideo 59 103 Normalized Individuals Chart 124 O JSC USOT ci Asenetandesss tosta uie been bei atten eoe 194 OE E Nem Cee Ty 61 Open Another Database esses 305 Open D ata DAS Ce iecoris 182 192 OIE Lo P 44 50 162 P Part Appraiser Average Control Chart 126 Part Control Method eese 76 c GR ol Ae V eedem RIDE eM FAUNE ORT aPC 75 Part NUMBER meeriset eiii 60 69 75 92 Part Variation PV ieran 118 10 mcm PISTE NT 194 PDA Personal Digital Assistant 62 111 Performance See Maximizing Performance 10 Plus TOLSE ICONE o ad TUE 56 POC SOI acres see eth atte Ne crt Soha 116 Prefill Calibration Standards 59 EE S E R E t MM MEM MEL UMSO EUIS 101 Printing PEIBESSEUD iiia e avrei 43 163 Printing Tables of Records sss 43 POC sio Ug E 61 172 Calibration ENMU uei oeste ossis enero Pn toes 105 CODVIFIO Renner ree a adr ema ne ne emer ap c rcd 78 Inspection Procedure for Parts 75 SN
3. Edits the current SQL Record Source of your report PTEI Field10 z Aj T apy Edit Current SQL Source E E Detail ED a Alignment 2 ddTXCenter me ode ee E You can modify edit the existing query through the text box below a JMN Bar Width 1 er LL IEEE gt SELECT ms_code as BCode FROM tblMaster ORDER BY ms_code pio git EHE DURER HEBR Caption E E PageFooter CaptionPositior 0 ddbcCaptionNor 2 1 mmaaiyyyy nore Direction 0 ddbcLeftToRight N HRS dicate ects Laken oe eee nae Font 3 of 9 Barcode z E ReportFooter ForeColor MI gt Name Sets returns name of control Selected Field10 Barcode Cancel Einish This illustration shows the source code for the currently selected report Use the Set or Build SQL Source for the Report button 7 on the button bar and select the Edit Current SQL Source from the selection list to open the SQL Builder window GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 247 Delete Current SQL Source Now you can directly modify the SQL statement for the source in the edit field as shown below ox Edit Current SQL Source You can modify edit the existing query through the text box below SELECT ms code as BCode FROM tblMaster ORDER BY ms code gi Cancel Finish In the above example after including all the fields from
4. 2 ss 7a 95 af 2s s 27 38 8 7s 94 sf 23 38 1 77 25 asf ep 7a 95 af 2s 3s e1 77 38 af 24 a8 es 78 98 wf 24 ss 7s sz uf 28 p s 7s 55 2p 24f ssf 1 m s Resolution from gage table joo Prefill Calc Charts Print Record I 4 ll 1 gt gt i rx of 2 The Linearity and Trials Tabs contain these fields Field Button Name Description Study Date Enter the date of the study this field defaults to the current date Gage ID Select the gage ID from the drop down list box Gage Desc The name of the gage or measurement device appears in this field Study Type Choose Linearity amp Bias if you have 3to 5 reference values If there is only one reference value chose Bias Only or use parts If you just want to use the Uncertainty Budget choose Uncertainty Only Appraiser Enter the name of the person conducting the study Approve Select if study is approved Comments Use this field to enter any comments about this study Co Part No Enter your internal company part or job number if relevant Part No Select a related part number such as the customer or supplier part number if relevant GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 133 Field Button Name Description Part Desc This field displays the description or name of the part if relevant Characteristic In this field enter the name of the characteristic you measured Use Range Meth
5. Sub Report Link Filter Value Table Optional Operator Sub Report Fields Field m External Criteria Add Remove Clear Ls Remove Been CUM After selecting the source you will be able to view the SQL statement that opens the data source of the report You must now create the link filter to connect the subreport to the main report To do so follow these steps 1 Selecta sub report field from the sub report to link to the main report 2 If more than one table in the data source contains this field you must specify the table name in the Table field 3 Select the operator to use in comparing the fields 4 You have 3 choices to filter on based on the value selected nput a specified fixed value i e Gage ID 1234 Click on the checkbox to link on the list of fields found on the designer canvas of the master report External Criteria is used to directly compare a criterion derived from the main report to a sub report field The field must be common to the main and sub report meaning they must both exist in the main and sub report for it to work because the Advanced Filter only displays field criteria that exist in the SQL of the main report 5 Add the criteria to the list 6 Ifyou need more than one criterion repeat the first five steps using a statement connector the default is AND If you wish to use OR click on the OR button
6. Follow the installation instructions on your screen Running GAGEtrak 1 Click the Start button Select Programs B windows Update FE New Office Document f Open Office Document Search For Files fo Programs C3 Documents E Settings EX Search amp Help Ti Bun amp Log Off Cyberuser5 mp Shut Down 31 Chapter 1 Starting GAGEtrak 3 Select the Programs group and then choose the GAGEtrak 6 option under the GAGEtrak 6 program and the main menu will appear or double click the GAGEtrak 6 icon that was placed on the desktop during the installation process Logon GAGEtrak requires users to login if you have installed the standard application and activated security through Settings Security or if you have chosen to install the 21 CFR Compliant Application in which case security is automatically activated The Logon window shown below will appear Enter your user ID and password in the appropriate fields then click OK to login Note The 21 CFR Part 11 Compliant version of GAGEtrak automatically activates security Therefore when GAGEtrak is launched for the first time you must login Since your users and groups have not been set up a logon User ID Defaultis provided so you can login Once you have logged in set up your users and groups first then delete the user ID Default Also the User ID is case insensitive where as the password is case sensitive User ID Default Pas
7. 4 1 b gt i gt gt of 29 Calibrated By Signature Signature Name Administrator 11 25 2003 11 41 52 AM Signed Signature Date Signature Time Signature Mode GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 105 To unsign a calibration select the signature in the signature listing The Sign button is replaced with the Unsign button as seen below Click on the Unsign button GAGEtrak will show that the record has been unsigned and stamp the record with the current date and time Bl Calibration Entry d Calibration Measurements Procedures Labels Signature Attachments User Defined Calibration Scans Gage ID c 002 Calibrated By Signature Signature Name Signature Date Signature Time Signature Mode D Administrator 11 25 2003 11 41 52 4M Signed Di fe le IEEE gj Record I 4 a gt gt i rx of 1 uin Approved By Signature nagn Signature Name Signature Date Signature Time Signature Mode Record I 4 1 gt DIZIGE Record I 4 1 b bl rx of 29 Calibrated By Signature Signature Name Signature Date Signature Time Signature Mode gt Administrator 11 25 2003 11 45 14 AM Unsigned All signatures are recorded with the name of the signer the date and time of the signature and the signature mode whether the calibration was signed or unsigned To use electronic signatures security must be enabled To do this close the Calibra
8. Accuracy data if able to measure accuracy Causes for out of calbration conditions Repair time and calibration time Review this information periodically to see if you should reduce checks on stable equipment increase checks on unstable equipment or redesign replace the measurement equipment References The following books and publications discuss gage calibration and control GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 171 JURAN J M Juran s Quality Control Handbook Fourth Ed 1988 JURAN J M Quality Planning and Analysis Second Ed 1980 FARAGO Francis T Handbook of Dimensional Measurement Second Ed 1982 National Conference of Standards Laboratories NCSL Establishment and Adjustment of Calibration Intervals RP 1 Second Ed 1989 U S Dept of Defense MIL STD 45662A Calibration System Requirements 1988 Resources for Books Publications and Reference Materials American Society for Quality Control ASQC Phone numbers 800 248 1946 North America only or 414 272 8575 National Conference of Standards Laboratories NCSL Phone number 303 440 3339 National Institute of Standards and Technology NIST Phone 301 975 NIST 6478 American National Standards Institute ANSI Phone 212 642 4900 American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM Phone 610 832 9585 The Naval Publications and Forms Center 5801 Tabor Ave Philadelphia PA 19120 GAGEtrak 6
9. Man Records Calibrations Staff Entry Personnel Reports Setup Archive Un Archive Audit Log Backup Restore Merge Utility x Compact be Repair Export Impart Data Tools the X Utilities Madilty License Lalibration Entry Export to PDA inert from Standard Group Calibration Calendar Formula Entry Listings and Reports Calculate All Due Dates Edit All lables Remove Spaces from Gage ID s Reset Gage Issue Status L Set Format of Standards Set Status of bages GRR Linearity Bias and Uncertainty Stability Attribute Risk Analysis Attribute Analytic Method View MSA ve Studies Settings Report Control ID Entry Security Auto Email Header Setup LA Service Request Status ID Entry Custom Reports bage Events Multiple Choice Entry 190 Chapter 3 Running GAGEtrak If the program can t find your database file then the Open Database window will appear If this happens you ll need to tell GAGEtrak where to find the database file GTDATA60 MDB The Open Database window looks like the one shown here B Open Database Database CXGTWeiGTSamp60 mdb Use ODBC IV Use DSN v Required Fields Use File DSN J Schema Owner Database GageMg60 DSN MSSQL GageMge0 r File DSN as Browse User ID GageMg60 EI Password fet D EE ET Server Dp Service Name a Database Attribute Application Attributes i Prefetch Count _ SEY
10. Ohms or mA This field is a list box in which more choices will be available as you add them for other gage records Notes Use this field to store any comments about the gage Description Enter a brief but informative description of the gage Storage Location Enter the gage s storage or usual location for example Tool Crib Bin 12 Current Location This field contains the gage s current location such as Assembly Dept Service Date Enter the date on which you first started using the gage Retirement Date In this field enter the expected or actual date on which you stop using the gage Usually this date is at the end of the gage s useful service life typically 5 10 years or at the expected date of major overhaul or maintenance Supplier Code This field contains the supplier code or name of the gage supplier If you plan to use GAGEtrak s supplier records enter the supplier ID code in this field not the supplier name The drop down list box for this field contains information that you entered in Supplier Entry for more information see page 87 Cost Enter the actual purchase price or build cost of the gage Purchase Date In this field enter the date on which you purchased or first used the gage User Defined This field stores any other data you need to track Manufacturer Select or enter the manufacturer of the gage this field creates its own list as you enter different manufacturers so you can later just sele
11. Ruler Units Inches Centimeters Cancel By default the Show Grid checkbox is checked Uncheck this box to hide the grid Check the Align Controls to Grid checkbox if you want the elements on the designer canvas to snap to the grid Note Sometimes you may want to uncheck this option to position elements closer together than your grid will allow Do not forget to recheck this option if you want the elements on the designer canvas to snap to the grid Grid settings can be changed to suit your requirements Use the Grid columns and Grid rows fields to specify how many dots per ruler unit are desired use the Ruler Units radio buttons to specify the unit of measurement in inches or centimeters Note If you change your grid unit to centimeters you may want to reduce the number of dots per ruler unit to 10 or even 5 to keep your canvas from being overcrowded with grid dots Styles This feature gives you a quick way to style the type in your reports appropriately and uniformly Four basic styles are included for your convenience Normal Heading 1 Heading 2 and Heading 3 Each of these styles has different attributes according to how they might be used in a document for instance the heading styles are all bold for emphasis while the style Normal is plain rather than bold and of a suitable size for body text on a page You might want to style the most important elements in a report Heading 1 less important headings Heading 2 the le
12. Send Use File Send to e mail the report if you have MAPI compliant e mail Last Gages Lists the last 10 gages that a user accessed Note Gages are added to the list when the user edits a gage record uses Find to access a gage record or clicks any button on the Gage from When the list exceeds ten 10 records the first record will be eliminated and if the user selects a gage record from the list of ten records the form will automatically find and display that record gage Exit To quit GAGEtrak choose File Exit Edit Menu Command Description Undo CTRL Z Choose this command to remove editing in fields and records Cut CTRL X Select Edit Cut to remove the selected text from a field or a selected record a copy is placed in the Clipboard Copy CTRL C To copy the selected text or record into the Clipboard choose Edit Copy Paste CTRL V This command is active only when you cut or copy something use it to paste the cut or copied text at the location of your cursor Delete Choose Edit Delete to either delete the selected text from a field or to delete a record select the record first Select Record Use this command to place the current record in a selected state for copying deleting or printing Select All Records To select a records for copying deleting or printing select Edit Select ALL Records Find Select this command to search for a record based on the current field GAGEtrak Calibration Managem
13. be separated by Item1 Item2 etc Close Cancel T Select the drilldown button to the right of the Field Attribute field so that the application updates the field based on the Data 7ypeselection Text that goes in the function field The text that will appear on the form if no modifications were made to the label The weight appearance of the font To exit this screen without saving your changes click the Cance button If you want to save your changes click Close to return to the main menu GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 201 Settings Forms Captions Form captions allows for customizing what appears on the top left corner of a form when it becomes active B3 Settings Kia ko User Info General Cal Options Calendar Security Automatic Numbering Interface Custom Labels Gage Custom Calibration Custom Form Captions Form Tabs Main Menu Menu Bar Messages Form Name Form Caption PjBbuBo bot Jpmenere ftchive iter OO faudiloa Advance fut udlonBai fut BunPesm futhorze Persons 00000 B Auto Email Header Auto Emailer N Auto Email List Auto Email List Entry BackUp and Restore Data Backup P E ookmarks Bookmarks CA Request Filter Corrective Action Request Filter Record I 4 1 gt DEI of 103 Cancel Close The table below describes the fields on this form Field Button Name D
14. option either a return of the price paid or b repair or replacement of the SOFTWARE or hardware that does not meet CyberMetrics Limited Warranty and which is returned to CyberMetrics with a copy of your invoice or receipt This Limited Warranty is void if failure of the SOFTWARE or hardware has resulted from accident abuse or misapplication Any replacement SOFTWARE will be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period or 30 days whichever is longer NO OTHER WARRANTIES CyberMetrics DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE THE ACCOMPANYING WRITTEN MATERIALS and ANY ACCOMPANYING HARDWARE THIS LIMITED WARRANT Y GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS YOU MAY HAVE OTHERS WHICH VARY FROM STATE TO STATE NO LIABILITY FROM CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES In no event shall CyberMetrics its distributors its representatives or its suppliers be liable for any damages whatsoever including without limitation damages for the loss of business profits business interruption loss of business information or other pecuniary loss arising out of the use or inability to use this CyberMetrics product even if CyberMetrics has been advised of the possibility of such damages Because some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of liability for consequential or incidental damages the above limitation
15. previously selected tables Selected Tables Calibration Measurement v Available Fields Selected Fields Calibration Header Gage ID Calibration Header Calibration Calibration Measurement CM _ Calibration Measurement CM _ Gage Standard ID m Minimum Nominal el gt gt Maximum Uncert s CM Calibration ID LimitUse x Esa Cancel lt lt Back Finish 252 Chapter 8 Customizing Reports The Label Wizard automatically generates your data source SQL statement and arranges all the labels and fields on the Details section of the designer canvas Note Sometimes the height of the Detail section is greater than the label height set for your label printer Remember that the height value is in twips and 1 inch is equal to 1440 twips Therefore a 6mm label about would be approximately 340 twips Ex Report Designer New Report B inix File Edit View Insert Format Tools Help Dc Haa en cx88E 4a SES N co 9 E AL a Design Preview T e 8s ie n B A MainReport HS PageHeader WER ES r3 Detal CS IRR Rn RR Mn RRRRRH en PageFooter Property ToolBox eet eeeeeeeeeetee eeeeeeeepeeeeeepge ActiveReport ecccccseccseecce osceccccsiccc csceccecccee clgecccicccccccDisscss4 Zap e 4 LI HI iti ecs pH AllowSplitters True i documentName ActiveReports Docum MaxPages 0 Print Width 9360 Rulervisible True ScriptDebuggei False ScriptLanguage VBScript
16. Events Gage ID fc 002 Initial Times Used 0 Calibrator In House Last Calibrated By Default User X Calib Freq 90 Days Description cau PER DIAL 12 INCH M Projected Calibration Schedule 03 31 2005 06 29 2005 09 27 2005 Gage Frequency Adjusting Interval None Minimum Frequency Maximum Frequency Skip Direction Skip Forward Calibration Hours 2 Est Calibration Cost Next Calib Last Cal Date 10 02 2004 NexDueDate 1273172004 Record I 4 1 gt rl gt gt of 1 Filtered Field Button Name Initial Times Used Calibrator Last Calibrated By Description To track gage usage go to this field and enter the gage s current number of uses as a starting point As you issue the gage out and enter usage information GAGEtrak automatically counts the number of usage records and displays it in the Issue Tracking Entry screen This field is a list box from which you choose the code of the calibration service supplier see the Supplier Entrysection in the User s Manualfor more information If you calibrate the gage within your own facility you could enter In House a specific department or a technician s name You can later use your Cal bratorfield entries to print a group of gages due for calibration by a particular calibrator If you will be using a PDA you will download calibrations to the PDA by calibrator so you will want to enter the calibrator informa
17. Jan to Dec The table below describes the fields on this form Field Button Name Format Last Number Issued Test File Path Numbering Schemes Enable Automatic Gage Numbering Cancel Close Description The format that will be used to create numbers for new records Use for incremented letters for incremented digits enter text in all capitals Leave field blank to use the default This field contains the last number issued You can modify this number but be sure you enter the values correctly or there may be duplicates Select this button to view next formatted number of the sequence Select the drill down button to the right of the file path field to access the Browse For Folderdialog box to select location for stored files Allows for custom numbering conventions for Number Fieldsand Request Types If the numbering format does not fall within the numbering convention in Numbering Schemesit will default to the format defined in Settings Automatic Numbering The Number Fieldsand the Calibration Type dropdown lists contain predefined lists of fields that can be affected by the defined criteria in the Numbering Schemes section If this checkbox were checked then the automatic numbering of new gage records would proceed exactly as it does in the current build If the checkbox were unchecked then all automatic numbering of new gages would be disabled This would include gage numbering by the gage type and th
18. Next R amp R Button Click this button to calculate the Next R amp A Dateand three future R amp R dates You can use this button to calculate the Next R amp R Date even if you don t enter an R amp R study record for the gage Projected R amp R To the right of the Gage R amp Afields you can see the next three projected R amp R dates Schedule GAGEtrak calculates these dates when you click the Next R amp R button then updates them when you add a new R amp R record for the gage GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 65 Gage Entry User Defined gt Information Specifications History Standards Parts Procedures Calibration Schedule R amp A Schedule User Defined Auth Persons Attachments Events Gage ID C 002 Description CALIPER DIAL 12 INCH z User 1 User 11 User 2 I1 1 j User 12 eT User 3 fo User 13 l User 4 1 O User 14 Il User 5 NENNEN User 15 NENNEN User 5 User 16 I 1 User 7 I1 User 17 User 8 User 18 iY User 9 Po User 19 C User 10 NENNEN User 20 1 Record 14 4 T 1 gt gt I gt gt of 46 The table below describes the field in this area Field Button Name User Defined Description These fields can be used to store additional information and can be customized the label names changed and the Data Types altered in Setup Settings Interface Gage Custom Gage Entry Authorized Persons This form can be used to record
19. Normal 1 GRR Studies are not ordinarily used for this but they can be The Probability Distribution is Normal 1 for an updated study otherwise use Normal with a Divisor of 5 15 Linearity amp Bias studies can be designed to use multiple gages from a gage family in which case the result will be GRR rather than Repeatability Both Linearity amp Bias and Bias Only can be designed to use more than one appraiser For example by having two appraisers do six trials each Hysteresis Use the maximum difference between upscale and downscale readings on the same artifacts This test should cover the full range of the gage For example gently add weights to a scale one at a time until you get to the full range then gently remove the weights one at a time Record readings at each step The weights don t have to be known values The Probability Distribution is Rectangular Stability of the Include this item if the reference standard is a variable gage and if a Stability 140 Chapter 12 MSA Entry Uncertainty Contributor reference standard Consistency of the reference standard Details study shows instability of the X bar chart See the next table for instructions The Probability Distribution is Rectangular Include this item if the reference standard is a variable gage and if a Stability study shows instability of the s chart See the next table for instructions The Probability Distribution is Normal 1 Uncertainty
20. Operator B Operator A Reproducibility Appraiser x Part Interaction When reproducibility error varies from part to part that is called Appraiser x Part Interaction Stability When using a measurement system to evaluate the same characteristic on a master or part over an extended period of time the maximum change in bias is known as stability uncertainty lor drift Observed Averages Time 2 Time 1 Gage Stability Consistency When using a measurement system to evaluate the same characteristic on a master or part over an extended period of time the maximum change in repeatability is known as consistency uncertainty or drift Variation Components Equipment Variation EV Equipment Variation is an alternate term for repeatability used primarily when we want to refer to repeatability by initials EV Appraiser Variation AM Appraiser Variation is an alternate term for reproducibility used primarily when we want to refer to reproducibility by initials AV Although appraiser usually refers to an operator or technician it can also mean different instruments or different plant locations etc or all of the above Interaction INT Interaction is short for Appraiser x Part Interaction used when we want to refer to it by initials INT 116 Chapter 12 MSA Entry Gage Repeatability and Reproducibility GRR Gage Repeatability and Reproducibility is the RSS root sum square sum of the
21. Ready LA On some systems the Detail section height will expand to allow most of the labels and fields to be viewed Remember that the Label Wizard automatically puts all available labels and fields on the designer canvas one set label and field at a time If you think that there may be more fields than can be viewed because the section height is not large enough just adjust the height value to a large enough value to view all of your fields for starters try a height of 7000 Note Make note of the height value in the Details section because you will have to revert to it after the label design is complete Once all the labels and fields are visible you can drag them anywhere on the canvas you wish Click the Preview tab to view your label to make sure all your data fits within the label area Be sure to change the height of the label back to the value it had before you extended the height of the label GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 253 Jr Gl X Bs wx o am z ZH Ewo i gt i hill lil E H MainReport B Detail DataControli 4 Field Labeli Field2 Label Fields Property ToolBox Detail Be 5 ColumnSpacinc 0 height 720 KeepTogether True MewColumn 0 None Design Preview E E amp is e r1 rx FPA ee ee L Appendix A Data Transfer Utility The Data Transfer Utility Wizard has t
22. ResultCode Factor Certificate of Calibration Statement It is hereby certified that the above described instrument conforms to the original manufacturer s specifications and has been calibrated using standards whose accuracies are traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology within the limitations of the Institute Calibration Services or have been derived from accepted values of natural physical constants or have been derived by the ratio type of self calibration techniques Our calibration system satisfies ISO 43 Adjusting Calibration Frequency Setting Reliability Target 80 95 Significance Threshold 0 3 Print Issue Label When Issuing Gage Ask To Print E Failure Notice Statement It is hereby stated that the above described instrument does not conform to the original manufacturer s specifications and has been failed based on accuracies that are traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology and are within the limitations of the Institute Calibration Services or have been derived from accepted values of natural physical constants or have been derived by the ratio type of self calibration techniques 9000 05 9000 and the ANSI 2 540 requirements Cancel Close In Gage Entry on the Calibration Schedule tab you may specify a Maximum Interval or Minimum Interval or both Methods A3 or A1 will notify you in the event that a recommended change is being overridden
23. Storage Location Gages will be selected based on specific Storage Location criteria Current Location Gages will be selected based on specific Current Locationcriteria Exclude Gages With No Do you want to export gages that contain no record information in Gage Entry Calibration or Study Schedule and or if no study has been created for this gage Schedule If in the event a gage cannot be issued in a kit you will be prompted with the following message None of the gages in this Kit could be issued at this time Do you want to see a list of the gages that could not be issued as part of this kit If you select Yes the following screen appears Gage Type Gages Not Issued x Kit Required Gage Type Not Issued Kit Required Gages Not Issued No available gage based on the following gage type Gage Type Reason Bore Gage Past Due Record 14 4 1 E gt of 1 What this screen represents is that there are no Bore Gage gage types that are currently available for issuance GAGEtrak will disallow the issuance of a specific kit when gages that comprise it are not complete or the gage belonging to the kit is presently issued to somebody else Returning a Kit A kit must have been issued before you can check it in Kit Return lel ES Return Kit ID Kit 007 Issue Date 10 11 2004 Issue Time 1226PM Type fe ad Issued To fAdamAaron o a Issued Dept De a Promised Date umm Received Date 12 15
24. Text Field user 1 User 1 Text Text Field fuser 2 User 2 Big Text Text Field fuser 3 User 3 re gt Text Field fuser 4 User 4 e Text v Text Field user 5 User 5 Text v Text Field user B User 6 Eig Text z f Test Field zd user 7 User 7 a ret z Text Field zs user 8 User 8 G o9 Text Text Field User E User g O Label Font Weight Normal Bold e C e e e ig e e Label Text Default Label Text eeeeere ef Record I 4 1 gt bt gt gt or 20 Cancel Close The table below describes the fields on this form Field Button Name Tab Caption Item Data Type Field Attribute Label Text Default Label Text Normal or Bold Cancel Close Description In Gage Entry the tab currently titled User Defined can be edited to reflect a client specific title for example Characteristics Item number that corresponds with the User 1 20 label The default Data Type for Gage Customlabels is 7ext Additionally the field information for the fields can be changed to accept a date value or can be changed to a list box generated From Table or Custom Listinput The following form will appear when Z stis selected from Data Type g3 Build List for User Define field E x Choose What Type of List to build From Table C Custom List Select a Table T Select a Field T Add Items to list Note Each added item should xam
25. Uncertainty Tab Uncertainty refers to the potential variation of gage error that accumulates in the chain of calibrations from NIST through various intermediate calibration labs to the final calibration of a working gage and it s use ina production environment At each intermediate stage of calibration the uncertainty increases because the input uncertainty will be combined with new uncertainty contributors to create an output uncertainty that is always larger Each uncertainty along the way is communicated to the next link in the chain by a calibration certificate or test report Each certificate maintains traceability to the original NIST calibration by citing the NIST number This system of traceability is important because without it uncertainty would inevitably grow to the point where customers and suppliers could not trust each other s measurements To quote from ISO17025 Reasonable estimation of uncertainty shall be based on knowledge of the performance of the method and on the scope and shall make use of for example previous experience and validation data Sources contributing to the uncertainty include but are not necessarily limited to the reference standards and reference materials used methods and equipment used environmental conditions properties and condition of the item being tested or calibrated and the operator 136 Chapter 12 MSA Entry The uncertainty contributors to be included are selected on the basis of jud
26. a measurements designate the size an object will be KeepTogether True 1 when printed Actual physical distances on the i screen vary according to the monitor size CanShrink False ColumnLayout False DataField ms_Code To resize row height click and drag on button A horrizontal E i line will appear You can also f directly modify height by entering value for height in the Property ToolBox A third way of resizing the row height is by putting the cursor on the bottom of the row you wish to resize The cursor appearance will change to this symbol and can then be dragged up or down depending on the section size requirement gl E PageHeader Je Report Settings Report Settings lets you set margins printer settings grid settings and styles used in building reports From the main icon bar select the Report Setup button to open the Report Settings window 4 amp NPE A oga Hr D Report Setup x Top Margin fi 440 Preview Bottom Margin a0 Converting from Inches or elt Meng 1440 Centimeter to Twips lal Right Margin 1440 INCHES Margin 1440 x n ii Gutter Mirror Margins CENTIMETERS Margin 567 xn Where nis your desired margin in inches or centimeters Cancel Page Setup The margin is the nonprinting area outside the main body of your report by default margins in the repor
27. lt lt Back Next gt gt GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 233 Fields that you will use to link your tables need not be included in the Selected Fields list We do suggest that you link fields coming from the table where all the records are to be included in the report For example you have a table of gage calibration records which does not include details of each gage and another table listing the details for all the gages For a certain period of time not all gages are to be included in the filtered table If you want a report that will include all the filtered gages with its corresponding gage descriptions you will need to link to both tables for instance link to the Gage ID In this case not all descriptions will be used Establishing Table Links After selecting your report fields from different tables you should now establish the link or links between the tables so as to keep information on a specific record together Define these links by specifying the tables and the fields that will be linked and the type of link to use Define Table Links You link two tables at a time through their Define relationships or links between selected tables common field it is n ot neces sary tha t the ra Tablet Linked Table2 Table2LinkedFied Al fields have the same name it is necessary BM Calibration MU Goo iage Event age ID I that they be of the same type e g GagelD and Calibration Header Ga
28. sss 230 Residual Plot by Size 4 o p CGPREAS 126 PRE SON Ores fittest ech t Spese IUUD tees 220 PENIS FUG NNI 223 MIS IRIS E RO TERRI 221 Retirement Dale ttt Eoo Dette te beoe utet tueeih 55 ROW din site a BORN 44 Run Chart and Average Chart sss 123 S oavirig IeCOLEISacocctsai tiit reb qe e orci qu E 49 teles si nd 8 ENS 125 Schedule Calibration Schedule 63 69 172 Gage R amp R Schedule 65 66 67 68 SEFOU B SE Suerte lotdte ti teste a tati t re ch 40 43 SECY ae orae SD LUIS LA ae PME 189 206 311 BENADIE sra Mm 198 MESSAC CS oeri un DD RUDI MS 198 TE D o NONEM M M 44 162 10 Serial Number ssssnesnessseessnesssenssessseesseesssresseesssresseessse 189 Services eee ERT EE MEM DEAN UL MEIN Ud Ld 55 SENICE CO UCSL ERN ER NS 81 211 Del Status Of Dag8s csasmeeiio pete e petit 230 Settings 100 163 193 97 193 97 193 97 193 97 193 97 193 97 193 97 307 Short Meth coat trono ene See Range Method Show AU RECORAS itte t rtt eti to te ect 49 312 Index Skp DIES cucinare ecards 63 197 226 Stability PEERS 115 117 146 Stability Control Charts esses 147 IESU e DIR E E 215 Standard ID coit tit tr E E E EM ou hec ucciscss 58 103 Status CASK OD oues tout Histo teet e tomo Ete bottom 101 Service Request oce me oo Fes 82 Satis Me s terres ISE PEL Macaca 230 Gage EMY EET NER oa N
29. 224 BIDS eRe ER ECR UE PERS Eee DU de d 72 ANOVA Components of Variance esee 132 Correction isset OD EEE E UAM ODE cce 131 TESI PRIUS ONT 128 sample Study kieras N dite ie sa ed Etpa 129 Appraiser Variation AV cccsccssecessesessesesseseeseseeseseens 117 Archive UrisAFCIIVO sso toii rhe Uv oie tabe e tee g eoe 219 As Foma Conditio coded eco E 101 Asset NUMBER a dits E ei teer ed 55 AGa DE eerereee rere E obo t Ead optat 199 Automatic Adjustment of Calibration Frequency 196 Automatic Calibration Due Report 194 Average and Range Method ss 119 B cfe qu oe rd E E 220 PUTO Egi I C E E 220 223 MR Fa NR TES 220 Backup fSe tol 6 onys arms ATI 220 Bar RECO SeleGtOE x sette rn a eee UC 40 SCROULE al em uncestestn ate eottest LAUDE I DELE EE 40 Batch Batch Calibration Label Printing 165 Batch Issue and Return eese 91 TO ANNO usar ayaceneeyaeeneanetneasenaeetneet 72 Buttons All Records Selection Button 42 Column Field Selector Buttons 42 List BOX BUON S A ao RE E AE dec trn 40 Maximize Minimize Buttons eren 43 Navigation Buttons cotes ord esae eiie oiend 40 C Calculate All Due Dates 229 Calendar SUING cO MEE 197 Calibrat
30. 50 Bookmarks Memo 0 LastGages Memo 0 Table Name CalFormula Links Description Links gages with specific Calibration data Field List Data Type Length Gage ID Text 50 Calibration Date Date Time Calibration Time Date Time 8 Gage Standard ID Text 50 Before Formula Double 8 After Formula Double 8 Table Name CalFormula Values Description Stores customized calibration formulas and value of variables Associated Form R amp R Studies Field List Data Type Length Gage ID Text key 50 Calibration_Date Date Time key 8 Calibration_Time Date Time key Gage Standard ID Text key 50 Col Name Text key 50 GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 267 Field List Data Type Length Formula_Var Text key 50 Formula ID Double key 8 Var Value Double 8 Table Name CalFreqTrack Values Description Logs history of Calibration Frequency entries Field List Data Type Length Gage ID Text key 50 Calibration Date Date Time key 8 Calibration Time Date Time key 8 Old Frequency Double 8 New Frequency Double 8 UserName Text 50 DateChange Date Time 8 TimeChange Date Time 8 Table Name Calib Attachments Description List path of document attached to a particular calibration record Associated Form CalibAttachmentsForm Calibration Entry Attachment tab Field List Data Type Length ID Long Integer key 4 Gage ID Text 50 Calibration Date Date Time 8 Calibration Time Date Time 8 AttachPath
31. 50 CM Before Double 8 CM After Double 8 Minimum Double 8 Nominal Double 8 Maximum Double 8 Uncert Double 8 CM Calibration ID Text 50 LimitUse Long Integer 4 Units Text 50 CM Type Text 50 GM Type Text 50 Comments Memo 0 GT Format Text 50 StdDueDate Date Time 8 StdLastDate Date Time Table Name Customer Adjustment Factors Description Not Used Associated From Not Used Field List Data Type Length Adjust ID Long Integer key 4 Cust ID Text 50 Description Text 50 Adj Factors Double 8 Table Name Degrees Of Freedom Description Not Used Associated From Not Used Field List Data Type Length Degrees of Freedom Text key 50 df Factor Double 8 GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 273 Table Name Dist Factor Description Records Distribution Factor data used in calculating Uncertainty in Linearity Studies Associated From Linearity Field List Data Type Length Distribution Type Text key 50 Distribution Factor Double 8 Table Name Events Description List of events for a specific gage Associated From Events Field List Data Type Length Event ID Long Integer key 4 Event Text 50 Description Memo 0 EAction Text 50 ETrigger Text 50 Table Name ezs SearchCriteria Description Stored search criteria Associated From Edit Search Criteria ezs zCriteria Field List Data Type Length SearchName Text 50 Source Text 50 CriteriaNumber Long Integer key 4 CriteriaText Te
32. A window similar to the one shown below will appear When you first open this screen GAGEtrak displays the most recent calibration record If you filtered for a group of gages the most recent record for the first gage in the group will appear Calibration Entry P Calibration Measurements Procedures Labels Signature Attachments User Defined Calibration Scans Gage ID E 002 M Accounting Description CALIPER DIALT2INCH o Est Costs Gage S N SNISBO34EF Costs 000 Calib Freq 6 Months Next Due 02713 2004 Hours O Start Calibration Date 10 10 2004 Time TEAM Account No 1 1 Department jac By Defaut User Certificate No ae Calibration Type Calibration ij As Found Condition In Results 1 Pass Calibration Status Action Required EE Interval Adjustment Method None Findings Uncertainty acum Coverage Factor amp Deg of Freedom Temperature Pressure Humidity Other Status fi M Active MSA Graph Certificate Gage Entry Record I 4 1 gt gt i gt gt of 5 Filtered To create a new calibration record click on the New Record button gt I and then select the desired gage record from the Gage ID drop down menu near the top of the window After you save the record by entering information into this screen such as your department GAGEtrak automatically retrieves any standards you set up for the gage Since currently schedu
33. ActiveReport AllowSplitters True documentName ActiveReports Docum MaxPages Print Width RulerVisible 0 9360 True ScriptDebuggel False ScriptLangquage VBScript GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 229 User Interface The editor window is divided into four parts Explorer or Objects Fields Property Toolbox and the Designer Canvas Frame Title Description Explorer This Explorer window shows you a tree diagram of the different parts of your report designer canvas Click on any item to display its properties in the Property Toolbox Explorer x E A MainReport PageHeader Detail PageFooter Fields If you have established a database connection all available fields will appear in this frame You can then select any field and it to the designer canvas on the right x Property Toolbox Lists the properties of the control when selected in the Explorer frame or on the designer canvas The properties displayed vary depending on the object selected Property ToolBox X ActiveReport X galg AllowSplitters True documentName ActiveReports Docum MaxPages 0 Print Width 9360 Rulervisible True ScriptDebuggel False ScriptLanquage YBScript Designer Canvas The canvas can be divided in different parts The example shows a page header the details section and page footer After building your format you can preview the outcome by selecting th
34. File MP estet eet oet e eee ae bei e ieu o 50 Filter Archive Un Archive eere 219 REDON S em cuvcnee O E 161 Lt gal licis RR 48 Fr POT SO cersventut cttoteetoseptud setius e esu iot late etse iM eie 43 mM EORR DER 45 Find and Rep Ban eremi Or ROTE ED ERIS 45 FOMA BOE iuiesiiit A 39 FOREN VIeM a eb o bb ad 38 39 43 45 48 49 51 F rmat MON Us eee eese erdt etx er dvo eo eo ra padova emo Ei 51 Freeze CoU e sioi I EA ME A E EU 44 G Gage ID AEGDIMIDO Dy auia rerecrr ererertrertrerr errrer rer ene 219 Automatic Calibration Due Report 194 COUTE OEIO EPI sessar nes eae dita NE 100 Calibration Labels bte is 165 EMOTO ce deis un A et b d Us ARR etu iU ee 55 Error Messa cute rero ei as ar aed cents 308 Te Ei al ation at Tea Tent LANE NONE TT SUPE RENE LESSE LEO 54 SLOTY oenar dea oun A 57 sSue CI AC KING eiei 91 Procedure LSN ander Eripe tions 166 erui su IA E DL ADEL TEE 93 Gage Records Biferg nro 7 IDE RITE aoo os eos nie renee Sorensen ee UL 54 Searching using Wildcards 36 Gage Requirements nasi hiat ebore epa Hsec Hed 75 Gage Serial Number esses pets ob e eds 55 100 DOM ts E M EL Mf 48 firj e 72 102 SECIS E tive e REDI e ep e uen etes 44 BIDAPAODJVIDB aiii no REPE ERES 192 220 221 305 308 H mage NN 39 gizisdu ize e 52 Hidden Collis sac eot Ee eene a Ce Do Pech TO bled 43 HOUT aaa RM 64 102 164
35. Formula Var Text 255 Var Value Double 8 Table Name Gage Attachments Description Contains path and descriptions of attachments for a specific gage entry Associated From GageAttachmentsForm Gage Entry Attachments tab Field List Data Type Length ID Long Integer key 4 Gage ID Text 50 AttachPath Text 255 Description Memo 0 Table Name Gage Events Description Lists events and associated application for a particular gage emtry Associated From Gage Events SubForm Gage Entry Events tab Field List Data Type Length Gage ID Text key 50 Event ID Long Integer key 4 App Path Text 255 App Params Text 255 Filter Text 255 Table Name Gage Master Description Lists attributes non key fields of every gage entry Associated From Gage Master Entry Staff Master Gage Issued subKitGAGE Calibration Cost Graph Calibration Entry Calibration Hours Graph Current Cost Status by Type Edit Gage Master Edit Gage Procedure Links Find New Measurement PDA Records frmGage Frequency Adjusting Interval Gage Calibration Certificate Entry Gage Master Print Form Gage Master SubForm IDREFForm Kit Gages History Part Master SubForm TodaysEventSub TodaysEventSub2 Field List Data Type Length Gage ID Text key 50 Gage_SN Text 50 276 Appendix B Table Definitions Field List Data Type Length Asset_No Text 50 Model_No Text 50 Manufacturer Text 50 GM_Owner Text 50 Description Text 50 GM_Type Text 50 Unit_of_Meas Text
36. Graph Calibration Attach Standards Attach Procedures Record I 4 1b gt i gt gt of 47 To enter a new gage record click the New Record button on your toolbar and then fill in the gage record with your data Below are brief descriptions of the major fields in this screen for comprehensive explanations for Gage Entry functionality refer to the section Gage Entry beginning on page 53 of the User s Manual Field Button Name Gage ID Status Ref Standard NIST No Description Enter a uniquealphanumeric gage identification code you must enter this ID in order to store the record If you don t have a gage ID numbering system you can take this opportunity to create one Tip Avoid using the characters and in your gage IDs or other fields as these are considered wildcard characters in GAGEtrak For more information about wildcards please see the Program Conventions section of the User s Manual In addition do not use or when filtering features are used as the application may error Use the list box to pick from available choices such as Active or n Active This field is also required Tip If the Status field is not set to Active the Calibration Due reports will skip over the gage Check this box to indicate that this record is for a calibration reference standard not a gage use it to identify gage blocks or reference weights If this record is for a reference standard enter i
37. Remote Port check with your System Administrator for an acceptable port number User Authentication is the process of identifying an individual usually based on a User Name and Password Test Email performs validity of information entered in email setup In the data entry screens you can click the floating toolbar to resize or move it If you don t want the toolbar to be visible un check the Open Automatically checkbox within the Floating Toolbar Frame Please see the Program Conventions section of the User s Manualfor more information on the toolbar Floating Toolbar Cancel Click the Cancel button to discard any changes and exit this window Close To save your changes and return to the main menu click the Close button Settings Cal Options Settings Al Adjusting Calibration Frequency Setting Frequency Adjustment Factors ResultCode Factor Ffin 1 1 Ou 0 45 New 1 Certificate of Calibration Statement It is hereby certified that the above described instrument conforms to the original manufacturer s specifications and has been calibrated using standards whose accuracies are traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology within the limitations of the Institute Calibration Services or have been derived from accepted values of natural physical constants or have been derived by the ratio type of self calibration techniques Our calibration system satisfies ISO 9000 05 9000 and t
38. Therefore you must treat the SOFTWARE like any other copyrighted material e g a book or musical recording except that you may a make copies of the SOFTWARE solely for backup or archival purposes and b transfer the software to hard disks provided that only one copy of the SOFTWARE is used at any time You MAY NOT COPY the written materials accompanying the SOFTWARE 3 OTHER RESTRICTIONS You may not rent or lease the SOFTWARE but you may transfer the SOFTWARE and accompanying written materials on a permanent basis provided you retain no copies and the recipient agrees to the terms of this Agreement LIMITED WARRANTY CyberMetrics warrants that a you may return the SOFTWARE and all accompanying written materials for any reason for a full refund for a period of 30 days from the date of receipt and b the SOFTWARE will perform substantially in accordance with the accompanying written materials for a period of 90 days from the date of receipt and c any hardware accompanying the SOFTWARE will be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of one year from the date of receipt Any implied warranties on the software and hardware are limited to 90 days and one 1 year respectively Some states do not allow limitations on duration of an implied warranty so the above limitation may not apply to you CUSTOMER REMEDIES Cyber Metrics entire liability and your exclusive remedy shall be at CyberMetrics
39. adam am Issued Dept jac SJ PatNo iBZzi o Storage Location N12 Current Location adam mon7QC Received Date 10 9 2003 Received Time 3104M Received From adam aon sw Cycles jf Notes Clear Form Nest Gage Close The Return Gages fields are as follows Field Button Name Description Gage ID Select the gage ID to return The list is limited to issued gages only Received Date These fields show the date and time at which you received the gage they re prefilled and Received Time with the current date and time Received From In this field enter or select the name of the person that returned the gage Cycles Enter the number of cycles used or parts measured by the gage GAGEtrak adds this value to any previous cycles for the gage and then uses that value to calculate the Next Due Datefor gages that you calibrate according to cycles Notes Document any important comments such as damages or malfunctions Clear Form This button clears all fields in the form Next Gage If you have other gages to return click Next Gageto process the record Close When you re finished click the Close button to return to the main menu GAGEtrak uses the following rules to manage Issue Return Tracking records 1 After you enter the Received Date and Time and save the record GAGEtrak changes the gage s Current Location field to its Storage Location Calibration Status Cal
40. amp s Charts X amp MR Charts ya Xx WX ns X X R Max X Min X Y MR This X Previous X R ZR a i 8 MR gt MR D UClg RxD i LCl Rx D UCL MR x3 267 T s558 LCL MR x0 X MR UCL X A xR _ kan LCl X Az xR UCL X 2 65868x MR Bias X X for m 1 LCL X 2 65868 x MR Bias X X for m 1 note subgroup size for MR is 2 for any m d df from table PUMP RN i a d f i Confidence Bounds d g x m d SE ae Bias faa SE SUE uiuat y8 x m i Confidence Bounds x df from 2 table aden A Confidence Bounds 148 Chapter 12 MSA Entry Bias SE X t 9 995 X SE X ty 0 025 d Table g 1 rowis of g 2 rowis d nacsplala axi ia1E x sof 2o 29 se a s5 es mf 77 12 r4uar 9mss 220867 24er4 2653 282981 29628 307794 3179905 al s asf s 75 s2 w5 v3 nef isa a 28 sz sa mij se woj waf 205 26 al a 75 naf wr al ma aaaf raf aoa s se sa o wal 26 256 sa mof ars 52 mmos 170857 209601 225761 256263 272 27h 2992 309808 amp ss maf w zo zo m8 saj 408 mo e 2 we z a ol aj s saf sn o eaf owe m9 29 44 4 ses ena era 207953 234370 271858 3 08896 Bal a a65 mg 9 606 ers 48 tera 20776 254856 285898 30878 34 ETT E 2 nas 2o7s77 234048 254728 28577 3 08688 a af w zal er me e oma mo 97 22 vise ameo zonas summ 29717 e e a e wal waf e
41. cance Field Button Name Script Pathand Browse Data File Name Log File Name MS SQL only Administrator User ID and Password Server MS SQL only Service Name Oracle GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 257 Description This field contains the location of the Scripts file for the current workstation It defaults to the same path that the DTU is in for the current workstation If this path is incorrect a message similar to the message below will appear Microsoft Access x amp Database connection failed Microsoft ODBC SQL Server Driver DBNETLIB ConnectionOpen Connect Select OK and then click on Browseto find the directory where the Scripts file is located Enter the name and server location of the GAGEtrak 6 data file The letter for the drive must be its physical drive letter not a mapped letter For example if your server has a physical drive D that s mapped to as a different letter F enter D followed by the rest of the path Remember to include MDF master database file as the file extension MS SQL users should enter the name and server location of the log file We recommend that you use the same path as for the data file again using the drive letter of the physical drive Remember to include LDF library definition file as the file extension Enter the Administrator User D SA and password of your database administrator M
42. variable measurement plots on horizontal scale in this case V predicted variable measurement b intercept a slope horizontal vertical in this case n sample size Adjustment for Discrete Data Adding or subtracting 0 5 to make the number closer to 10 adjusts each acceptance count to calculate P values that convert well to normal scores For example P 0 0 0 5 20 0 025 A table of the normal distribution will show that the corresponding normal score is 1 96 Table of Counts Probabilities and Normal scores 6 0 325 0 45 xl 0 00 E 0 06 E EF 0 32 F 0 45 0 60 0 76 0 93 1 44 1 96 Note When there are multiple parts with a count of zero or twenty only the one closest to the average will be used in the linear regression The extra parts will be plotted on the charts but will not affect calculations Separate linear regressions are done for upper and lower specification limits The custom for these charts is opposite of the usual practice x or P will plot on the vertical scale and y will plot on the horizontal scale y bt axx 2 2 Xy zx z EE SM x n Yx 158 Chapter 12 MSA Entry b z2 ax 2 n n Bias Specification Limit b GRR y at x 2 576 1 08 y at x 2 576 1 08 5 152 The 1 08 empirical correction factor compensates for the adjustment that was made above to the P values On the probability plot the regression line ends at 2 576 1 08 Other Tech
43. z From Date To Date View Records Archive Un Archive Clear Filter View Cal Meas You can archive your calibration or gage issue records by Gage ID or by Date To archive by Date enter the beginning date in the From Date field and the ending date in the To Date field When all criteria have been entered click the Archive button Tip In Settings Security you have the ability of specifying if Unsigned Unapproved Calibrations can be archived To view the archived records click either the View Records or View Cal Meas button To put archived records back into the current record group set up the criteria in this screen and click the Un Archive button Archived records are stored within the database After you archive records you can decrease the size of your data file by running Compact Data from the Data Tools menu group Data Tools Audit Log You can click this Audit Log button to view the audit trail if you have enabled an Audit Trail in the Security tab of the Settings screen under Setup as discussed on page 191 If the 21 CFR Part 11 compliant version of GAGEtrak was installed during setup all audit trail records are retained permanently With the standard installation of GAGEtrak you have the opportunity to select any type of audit trail tracking If No Audit Trail is selected and the Audit Trail button is selected in Data Tools you will be presented with the following message 215 216 Chapter 6 Da
44. 1 023 1 001 GAGE BLOCK S z amp o00 LLLA nae 1 e8mx aosee 3 Block 2 Inch f ilv z J finch 1 999 2 2 001 GAGE BLOCK S z moo NW E a S N 2345 peas 0 008000 BEEN Record 14 4 1 gt gt I gt gt of 31 You ll use the following fields in the Measurements table Field Button Name Description Standard ID Minimum GAGEtrak copies the calibration standards and their nominal minimum and Nominal and maximum values from Gage Entry Maximum Type and The program automatically pulls this information from Gage Entry If information Unit of Measure entered on this form it becomes part of this calibration record but not part of the gage record Before Enter the actual measurement before you calibrate the gage After Next enter the actual measurement after you calibrate or adjust the gage Acc Bfr This field shows the accuracy based on the before measurement Before Nominal Acc Aft In this field GAGEtrak shows the accuracy based on the after measurement After Nominal 24 Chapter 5 Entering Calibration Records Field Button Name Description Accuracy Flag If the before and after measurements are greater than the maximum or smaller than the minimum GAGEtrak alerts you by placing an X in the red square on the right of the accuracy calculation Limited Use If a gage is out of tolerance you can still pass it depending
45. 110 Chapter 11 Entering Calibration Records All criteria related to developing standards is the same as what is documented for Measurements in Calibration Entry for more information please see page 100 Click on the Gage List tab to see a listing of all gages that use the selected standard group You can use this listing to determine which gages will be affected if you modify the standard group This list is not editable ESECUL ETO KEGI S P standard Group Gage List Standard Group Digital Caliper 06 Group Description a EE Caliper 0 In to 6 In Gage ID Gage_SN Asset_No Model_No Manufacturer Description GM gt GNG 00013 D Gage oM Senet Go NoGo Pin G Attribute lel ES Record 14 4 1 gt rt gt gt of 1 For information on calibration standards see page 58 Calibration Calendar GAGEtrak has included a calibration calendar to view monthly calibration schedules in a single form You can directly choose the month and year and go directly to a specific date and view the calibration schedule for the day Click on any date to get an itemized Calibration and R amp R List B Calendar November E lt November 2003 gt 2003 E Time Until utomatic Refresh 10 Min Refresh Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday ojx 83 Calibration and R amp R List Jobs for 11 10 2003 Calibrations Description Calibration Hours D8 S N 1 2
46. 2004 ia Received Time 211 PM Received From adam aon o a Notes Record I4 4 1 gt bl rx of 3 Filtered Field Button Name Description Received Date Time These fields are prefilled with the current date and time but are editable fields Received From Enter or select a name from the dropdown list box of the person returning the kit Notes Document any important comments such as damages or malfunctions GAGEtrak uses the following rule to manage the return of Kits 1 When a gage is returned GAGEtrak shows it as an open issue record allowing for the received date and time to be entered After you enter the Received Dateand Time and save the record GAGEtrak changes the kit s Current Location field to its Storage Location 2 You will need to enter the number of cycles that the gage s on this kit used if returning a kit that contains gage records that have a calibration frequency of Cycles Use the number of cycles entered by the user to enter into the Issue Return record for every Cycles gage that was returned in the kit GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 85 Usage Used Usage Left and Estimated or Actual Due Date for each gage will be calculated and reflected under Calibration Schedule in Gage Entry Kit Entry History Select the History tab to view all gages that were previously issued returned by a particular kit To view previous kit issue returns first find the appropriate kit BS K
47. 50 Standard_Group Text 50 Drawing_No Text 50 Drawing Date Date Time 8 Change Level Text 50 Change Date Date Time 8 Storage Location Text 50 Current Location Text 50 Service Date Date Time 8 Retirement Date Date Time 8 Calibrator Text 50 Calibration Frequency Double 8 Calibration Frequency UOM Text 50 CyclesPerDay Double 8 Resolution Text 50 Operating_Range Text 50 Plus Tolerance Text 50 Minus Tolerance Text 50 Supplier Code Text 50 GM Cost Double 8 Purchase Date Date Time 8 Calibration Hours Double 8 Est Calibration Cost Double 8 CalibSkipDirection Long Integer 4 Next Due Date Date Time 8 Last Calibration Date Date Time 8 Notes Memo 0 Status Text 50 User Defined Text 50 RefStandard Long Integer 4 GM Format Text 50 Calibrated By Text 50 GM_Usage Double 8 AdjPlanCode Text 50 AdjCalFreq Double 8 MaxAdjCalFreq Double 8 RRFreq Double 8 RRFreqUnits Text 50 RRHours Double 8 RRSkipDirection Long Integer 4 LastRR Date Time 8 NextRR Date Time 8 RRResult Text 50 LabelCode Text 50 Uncert Double PriorCalDate Date Time GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 277 Field List Data Type Length Nist No Text 50 Customerlnfo Text 255 CalLabelSize Text 50 UseLeft Double 8 UseUsed Double 8 Calibration Frequency DOM Text 50 UserDef1 Text 50 UserDef2 Text 50 UserDef3 Text 50 UserDef4 Text 50 UserDef5 Text 50 UserDef6 Text 50 UserDef7 Text 50 UserDef8 Text 50 UserDef9 Text 50 UserDef10 Text 50 UserDef11
48. Current Location BobSmih QC Received Date 10 8 2003 Received Time 8474M Received From Bob Smith Cycles i Notes Clear Form Next Gage Close The Return Gages fields are included on the lower half of the Issue Gages form and are as follows Field Button Name Description Received Date and These fields track the date and time of when the gage is received The current date Received Time and time are automatically prefilled with the current date and time This is an editable field Received From In this field enter or select the name of the person that returned the gage Cycles Enter the number of use cycles performed by the gage usually 1 For gages that you calibrate according to cycles GAGEtrak adds this number of cycles to any previous cycles that the gage performed then it uses that number to calculate the next calibration due date Notes Record any important comments such as damages or malfunctions GAGEtrak uses the following rules for managing Issue Tracking records 1 When you issue a gage the program automatically inserts the current date and time It also changes the gage record s Current Location field to a description that consists of the Issued To field plus the Issued Dept field separated by a slash for example 675 Job 7512 Final Assy The program assumes you want to return a gage complete the Issue Tracking record if the gage has an incomplete current record A
49. Data Type Length InterceptTCRI Text 100 SlopeCOE Text 100 SlopeDF Text 100 SlopeTSTAT Text 100 SlopeTCRI Text 100 Result Text 255 UPL Double 8 LOL Double 8 HH Double 8 HL Double 8 LH Double 8 LL Double 8 StabType Text 50 StabRes Double 8 StabRef Double 8 StabHistXBar Double 8 StabHistSigma Double 8 UseHistoric Double 8 UseRange Double 8 BiasOnly Long Integer 4 LinearityData Memo 0 MSA Ver Double 8 Gage Resolution Single 4 Table Name Issue Tracking Description Contains issue tracking records in relation to a particular gage master record Associated From Issue Tracking Entry Edit Issue Tracking Kit Gages History PopUplssue Field List Data Type Length Gage ID Text key 50 Issue_Date Date Time key 8 Issue_Time Date Time key 8 Issued To Text 50 Issued Dept Text 50 Received Date Date Time 8 Received Time Date Time 8 Received From Text 50 Notes Text 50 Return Cycles Long Integer 4 Part No Text 50 Issue Tracking Type Text 50 PO No Text 50 ExpReturnDate Date Time 8 Kit ID Text 50 Table Name Issue Tracking Archive Description Archived issue tracking records Associated From ClArchiveViewfrm Field List Data Type Length Gage ID Text key 50 Issue_Date Date Time key 8 Issue_Time Date Time key Issued To Text 50 GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 283 Field List Data Type Length Issued Dept Text 50 Received Date Date Time 8 Received Time Date Time 8 Received Fr
50. ETAR o 1E PE E EA E ATEA 101 I PORTING Daal ERN ERR E S 226 Sert ODIGCL iib n Pad io ORE a deitas 194 Inspection EFequebleye eoi ecd eno etse rd er ep 76 loisirs ie Oats RI ENTER ERE 177 84 MS SQL Installation 185 87 Problems MIU outst tush Shui NAAA 308 SSO ALON i A E 69 92 Issue TIME menee ay NN 69 92 Issue Tracking 62 63 69 70 92 93 Issued Depart netsesis 70 92 Issued TO esssssssesssessesssosseessessrosseeseesressressesssesse 69 70 92 K OV Le ke S ia a REI ere ee eee eer 269 Keyboard SDOFEGULS 5 roro tr p iei 49 L I belg cca ene EA Rene ELI UL E 165 Last RAUNG ace iere iere HERE rbi e rude 90 l ast ecelesie ebbe t EPA EDI meas 90 MEAG te Ol rro rE EEE 90 last ROV OW atate ve Eta coU ED te tepore cunas 90 Emed M RR ee Tay ON An 103 AIMS AMY MR ROT 115 116 136 Link Company Logo OE ae mei ro reae 194 350 BOX BUtLOPISo ues sto haie eiat Mae Md tact caceeeecatcnacens 40 Location Current Location eere 55 70 71 92 Storage WOCAU OMe ERE 55 Hose T 189 Select Methiotl u e EHE ERE PED ERES 198 M Main Menton uoce eee dE P ete n e E 190 Maximize Minimize Buttons eeerne 40 43 Maximizing Your Performance esssss 308 Maximo RR TRE 56 59 103 AMISIT ETT 39 41 49 Villa ERIS RET RE 57 59 103 Militis Toeri Ean ier tte Eid ous 57 Model NUPBGE x a i ERE ER LU EE ERE 55 MS SQL Installation
51. ETT tc EAD 211 Statt Entry TE IBIQ aco eei o EE EUH E 212 Sta Entry PHOl0 oce REESE EUR VEN Un UE te Ms tm UM EE mI LOI S e A CIMM OM D Eee Eq ec EE 213 Stall Ent y Authorized Gages novine a oeque Noida ka fear o ERN ie ede ER LE ER ERI o eR ERR LE Rey URN EE sates RE UR tase ea ROM 214 Staff Entiys Issued Gages scidit hoo ente o Denise icu ead Das eL n a ide TRU Wi did etus o ocn dE 214 Chapter 6 Data TOOLS ia n oe v AH QUII Le pGR EO pO pU Plot epe Ev eke E be veil bie bise v DL eee Xv veis veia tesiQus2 219 Data TOOLS AFchiVe UhsAFChIV8 oo i uri cese aede ee oot es acest Sabe ee dota aate oH Deu DUCI ub sut ea mate ee ee enlace cla ales 215 Data Tools Audit Oaa TRUM 215 Data Tools Backup RestOL 6 c tuia E E E sec NE 216 Data Tools Compac Repair Data ein a E a E CEU DRIN ER OFEN one en UR edus 220 Data Tools EXPO VINDO 2e t bun ore eR evt en divae E du RET Pee ture eie nieto Dee t ta dive RN e ci feto Ida UTI beers 220 Data Tools MOolPy LICENSE eare Rea PvE ater ERI EIU AFER EI EE rg ain E ve Pe a AED I E d MEE 223 mini cwBluu mese 229 Calculate ADUS Diosc ic ndo aia osa Penn Deen Pree Mis I TUI CA MI Ae PM Pere Cree Re 225 WII S cia AULT SS wits RC 225 Remove Spaces irony Gage Dese 226 Reset Ga Ge SSS SEatilS do id oom aa Bes corre Beate ic eee Dra AD Da A D aes eure Secale De DR DI cae ede I DN EIE 226 Set Format Of StanGards sciesiicis ientaiccnisiclsmniegnideesri
52. Each of the buttons has an arrow on it that indicates its navigation direction IN First Record 2 Next Record x Create New Record Previous Record gt t Last Record Record Allows you to type in the record number that you want to go to Example If you have 250 records and you want to go to the sixteenth record enter 16 in the Record box and then press ENTER to go to that record Scroll Bars Type 12 Inch T Cal Caliper Analog 12 Inch Vernier Cal 1 Inch Gage Block 2 Inch Gage Block h 3 Inch Gage Block 4 inch Gage Block You might see scroll bars on the right the bottom or both sides of the table Use the vertical up down scroll bars to scroll to different records Use the horizontal left right scroll bars to scroll to portions of the table that you can t see GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 43 Minimize Maximize Restore Close Buttons xl Gl Es Minimize Button Restore Button Bi Maximize Button x Close Button Use these buttons located in the upper right corner of the table to maximize the table s size to the largest size allowed or to minimize it to an icon If you maximize the table the Restore button is visible Click the Restore button to return the table back to original size Saving Table View Changes Any changes made to a datasheet view such as column widths displayed hidden columns column locations gridlines and fonts will be saved when you clo
53. Electronic support is also available 24 hours a day to all registered users contact Technical Support at Email support cybermetrics com Internet www cybermetrics com NOTE TECHNICAL SUPPORT CANNOT BE PROVIDED UNLESS THE USER HAS FULLY COMPLETED AND MAILED IN THE ACCOMPANYING REGISTRATION CARD TRADEMARK ACKNOWLEDGMENTS All CyberMetrics Corporation products are trademarks or registered trademarks of CyberMetrics Corporation All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders SINGLE USER SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT This is a legal agreement between you the end user and CyberMetrics Corporation CyberMetrics BY USING THIS SOFTWARE YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THE AGREEMENT PROMPTLY RETURN THE DISKS AND THE ACCOMPANYING ITEMS including written materials and binders or other containers TO THE PLACE FROM WHICH YOU OBTAINED THEM FOR A FULL REFUND SOFTWARE LICENSE 1 GRANT OF LICENSE CyberMetrics grants to you the right to use one copy of the enclosed software program the SOF TWARE on a single computer If you wish to put the SOFTWARE on a network server you must purchase the same number of copies as computers attached to the network that use the SOFTWARE 2 COPYRIGHT The SOFTWARE is owned by CyberMetrics or its suppliers and is protected by United States copyright laws and international treaty provisions
54. Entry Hi Part Entry Procedure Calibration Entry Entry Main Records Serie Export to PDA Request Entry Import from Kit Entry PDA GRR A Supplier Entry Standard Group Li i itv Bi DEUS Issue Gages Calibration und 2 E allbratioris Return Gages Calendar Uncertainty Status Formula Entry Stability ny bage Attribute Risk m ATHE i neue Analysis AUjusiumern Attribute MS Intervals Analytic Method View MSA vz i Staff Entry Studies Personnel Listings and Fa incl zu Reports epnrt Lontro p ID Entry Reports Security hi Auto Email Archives TEL Un Archive Setup n Audit Lag CA Service LT Request estore 11 E Calculate All Status ID Entry xus Due Dates Custom Compa Edit All Tables Reports pair Gage Events Remove Spaces Epos from Gare INE Multiple Choice Modify License Dezet Gene Entry Issue Status Set Format of Standards Set Status of bages 34 Chapter 1 Starting GAGEtrak Chapter 2 Program Conventions To save time and ensure consistency GAGEtrak uses a set of program conventions which are standard commands and design elements that make the different windows and forms operate in the same way You can use these conventions to navigate through add edit and delete records Other conventions help you retrieve and print records Shortcut keys help you save data entry time and avoid mistakes You should become familiar with these conventions before you begin using GAGEtrak Rather than repeating the same information in
55. GAGEtrak calculates the standard deviation for the sub group only when the sub group size is two or more You can t change this value Xbar X In this field you ll see the average arithmetic mean for the sub group This value is calculated you can t change it MR In this field you ll see the Moving Range between this subgroup average and the previous subgroup average This will be blank for the first subgroup Notes Record any comments in this field Printing the Stability Study To print the study click the Print button and a Print menu will appear as shown here Print Gage R amp R Study Ee xj Select Print Option PRINT This Study Data Sheet VIEW This Study Data Sheet To print the study report click the This Study button that s in the Print section To preview the study report on screen click the This Study button that s in the View section Use the Data Sheet buttons to print or preview a blank data collection sheet you can use to record measurements during the study Viewing Stability Control Charts To view a Stability Control chart click the Chart button and then choose which chart you want Each choice shows a pair Control Charts except for the Histogram The top chart detects changes in bias and the bottom chart detects changes in repeatability For interpretation the program draws control limits and average lines on each chart Printing or Sending Charts Each chart has a button for Print a
56. GRR Results Header Standard Group Header GRR Results Measurements Status Supplier Records Warning When editing data from this utility you are working directly with the tables in your database none of the GAGEtrak features that protect against data entry errors or relational integrity corruption are in place Please be extremely cautious when using this feature 225 226 Chapter 6 Data Tools Remove Spaces from Gage ID Run this utility once after you ve imported data from any other gage management program This utility removes any unnecessary trailing spaces that your old program used and that were in any databases that you imported into GAGEtrak It also rounds your calibration measurements to six decimal places removing any extraneous digits added or transferred during the import process Depending on how many records you have this process can take from one to ten minutes Note This utility is not the same as the GAGEtrak Compact Data utility The Compact utility doesn t remove spaces it removes old deleted records that you no longer need Reset Gage Issue Status This utility goes through each gage in the database and checks to see if the gage has been issued and not returned All of the currently issued gages are flagged as issued Use this utility if any issue tracking records have been deleted Set Format of Standards Use this utility if you have upgraded from any previous version of GAGEtrak It sets the number of
57. Gorana are buc UD RR reote SUR SQUE 166 Procedure ETE S oeste ut rod it ic I eoo Deus 77 Procedure Name eese neeenetnrennenntnnnennin 61 Program Requirements ees 177 Purchase Dale xd eret a ego ENa 55 Purchase Order Number 70 92 GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software Version 6 311 Q QUICK SOM anana ER EU E A dee 47 49 R ROR RR E E 65 66 102 165 CHANTS ne TEE E T E 122 RAR EFEequell6y osondir 65 Range CHSpE oso Sete AN 122 Range IM CU OG eme TOES 119 Received Date sci ut edis 70 93 Received OTt dedic ud used e cu N 70 93 Received Time Sasser R 70 93 Record MO NU cccccccsssssccccecscsssccsccecesssscscccsessssccscceeeees 51 Record Selector Bab deii ei tue 40 42 Record Selector Buttons eese 41 Records Adding TREC ORO S oaae AE 48 Archive Un Archive cccccccccssccsocsescesssssscescecsecees 219 Calibration Records 57 58 64 72 99 100 165 196 219 Deleting ResoFGdSsiseceoresen casstit conor eee remoto eua oboe 49 Gage Recorda aaeidoss caca aded e con dc ua cocoa Ds 102 Reference Standard ecce eere eene 55 Repairing Data Files ees 308 Repeatability P 116 Repeatability Range Control Chart 125 iet PH 45 Report Contre lb oso aun ERE EAR oen 206 FREDROGU CI ofi o ae 117 Reset Gage Issue Status
58. IDs Select numerical format for measurement appearance on reports Note The format does not affect how measurements are shown in forms only in reports Use Standards Prefill Entry to save time when you have multiple calibration standards and their nominal values are evenly spaced for example if you have a group of standards with the values 1 2 3 4 5 and 6 Standards Prefill Entry Gage D BBC Number of Standards B o Start Value PO Increment Value n 11 SY Standard Names Gage Block WeW oo Ref Type GAGE BLOCKS f Gage ID of Standard MSGET O ml Meine o 1 Standard Format io m End Value ERES Field Button Name Description Number of Standards In this field enter the number of standards Start Value Increment Value Enter the smallest nominal value for the similar standards You can enter the difference between the sizes of the nominal values of the standards such as 5 or 005 in this field GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 59 Field Button Name Description Standard Names Enter the part of the names that s the same for all of them For example let s say that you ve entered 6 as your Number of Standards and 1 as the Start Value Also you ve chosen an ncrement Value of 1 with Inch as your Unit of Measure f you enter Gage Blockin this field the resulting names for your standards will be 1 Gage Block 1 Inch and 2 Gage Block 2 Inch Ti
59. Is Not Null Gages with descriptions that aren t null blank Adding New Records Adding Records in Form View To add new records in Form view you can 2m 1 Click the New L1 button in the toolbar or 2 Click the Create New Record P navigation button or 3 Use the keyboard shortcut CTRL Enter the information into the record and then repeat any of the above steps to add another new record Adding Records in Table View To add new records in Table view you can 1 Click on the Last Record LE navigation button and then click on the Next Record LEJ navigation button or 2 Scroll to the bottom row the record selector button will contain an asterisk Enter the information into the record repeat either of these steps to add another new record Go To Command You can use the Go To command from the Records menu to quickly move to different records After you select this option a submenu will appear with the following options to help you navigate through your records Command Description First To move the cursor from a field in the current record to the same field in the first record choose First Last Select this command to move the cursor from a field in the current record to the same field in the last record Next If you want to move the cursor from a field in the current record to the same field in the next record select Next Previous To move the cursor from a field in the current record to the same field in the pr
60. Label 1 4w x 1L Calibration Label 1 4w x 2L Calibration Label 1 4w x 3L Calibration Label 1w x 1L Calibration Label Tw x 2L Calibration Label 1 x 3L Inactive Gage Label 1 2w x 1 1 2L No Calibration Gage Label 1 2w x 1 1 2L View Label Print Label Edit Label Tape Record I 4 1 gt gt I gt gt of 16 Now one of your lab technicians tells you that another department needs to borrow a gage May just give it to them he asks Your reply No we need to provide traceability each time someone uses our gages You ask him for the gage ID and use Issue Gages to loan out the gage so that you have an accurate location for it You might have never found this gage again if it had gone off to the other department unchecked You ve also ensured that you ll have traceability for this gage Issue Gages Piel x Gage ID Erao02 Past Duel Issue Date 10 7 2003 Next Due Date Ref Standard mem TPM Type Calibration o ad IssuedTo BobSmth x1 Issued Dept prO Part No 0272331 m PON s CS Promised Date 10 13 2003 Storage Location COMPOSITES Current Location COMPOSITES i Received Date mE Received Time Received From OO Cycles Notes Clear Form Next Gage Issue Label Close Later in the afternoon you check on the tool crib Some gages used for manufacturing today are being returned An employee with a Bar Code Readeris quickly scanni
61. Linearity amp Bias as well as Bias Only Studies Enter Study Type and Part Reference values on the Linearity tab and then enter data in the Trials tab before coming to the Bias tab IE Linearity Bias and Uncertainty P Linearity Trials Bias Uncertainty Study Date 2052005 Co Part No ERN Gage ID COMPARATOR Pat No fio 221 3 a Gage Desc 14 Kodak Optical Comparator Part Desc Bracket Front 1 2 3 4 5 1pzo0 fao foz foso oso 2 psoo foroo oso fosmo or apao 200 foroo o2v oso 4i psoo pooo foroo oso oro s pzoo o200 poo ozvo os amp p3000 o100 o1 00 o2xwo oso 7 pso o100 ooo ovo oso 8 pso o100 o1 00 oso oso 3 p400 o100 pao ovo o 10 p4xo oooo o3xo oso oso v osoo 100 pooo fomo oro 12 p400 o200 p100 foso oso 95 Confidence Bounds Lower er Avg Bias 00588 caveat boss pr neo Sidenor TOG Acceptable sidDev oa Prefill Calc Charts Print Record I 4 1 gt rl gt gt of 2 The Bias tab calculates the following fields GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 135 Field Button Name 1 12 or 1 60 Individual Bias estimates for each trial in the study For a Linearity and Bias study they are labeled 1 12 in each of 5 columns For a Bias Only Study they are
62. Management Software User s Manual 163 CALIBRATION HISTORY REPORTS Report Description Certificate of Calibration Calibration certificates prove that you ve performed the proper calibrations and that the procedures used meet exceed certain minimum requirements GAGEtrak retrieves the certificate information from Calibration Entry You can update only three fields in the report screen Customer Information Statement and Uncertainty Format f you need to add or edit other information go to Calibration Entry Customer Information Enter what you want to print on the certificate This might include the customer s company name contact name address telephone number or other important information Statement You can edit the calibration statement for each certificate Any changes you make to the calibration statement apply only to that record If you want to change all future calibration statements go to Settings Calibration Options see the System Administrator s Guide Uncertainty Format Use the dropdown list box to select the number format for the sum of uncertainty standards that you used to calibrate the gage You can view or print certificates for the most recent calibration or for all calibrations by using the View Print Currentor View Print All buttons at the bottom of the window The Quick Filter or Advanced Filter can be used to select the certificates to print Calibration Costs and Labor Use this report to track yo
63. NU Total 16 55 Sum Square Total 14 40 128 Chapter 12 MSA Entry Legend AV appraiser variation AV appraiser variation lower control limit AV appraiser variation sum square AV x appraiser variation upper control limit CF correction factor DF dearees of freedom CHI CHI probability distribution CHl4 z inverse of CHI probability distribution DF dearees of freedom DF appraiser x parts dearees of freedom DF appraiser dearees of freedom DF gage error dearees of freedom DF parts dearees of freedom EV equipment variation EV inverse of equipment variation EV eauipment variation lower control limit EV lt equipment variation sum square EV c equipment variation upper control limit Fin inverse of F probabilitv distribution F F probabilitv distribution interaction l interaction lower control limit I c interaction sum square lic interaction upper control limit Study Values k 3 n 10 r 2 Appraiser DF k 1 23 1 2 PartsDF n 1 10 1 App x Parts App DF x PartsDF 22x9 18 k number of appraisers LCL lower control limit MS appraiser x parts mean square MS aaae error mean square MS parts mean square n number of parts PC percent contribution PV part variation PV part variation lower control limit PV part variation sum sauare PV part variation upper control limit r number of trials R am
64. Next Gage Issue Label Close 2b 26 Chapter 6 Issuing and Returning Gages Issue Gages The Issue Gages fields are as follows Field Button Name Description Gage ID This field contains all gages available for issuance ssue Date and These fields track the date and time on which you checked out the gage They re Issue Time prefilled with the current date and time Ref Standard If this box is checked it means that the gage is a standard Type Select the type of issue this field creates its own list from your entries Issued To Enter or select a user from the dropdown list box of the person that has been assigned to this gage User selection may be limited based on the Restrict Issue under Gage Entry Authorized Person Issued Dept Use this field to track the department or job number that will use the gage Part No Enter or select the number of the part the gage will measure PO No Purchase Order number Promised Date Anticipated gage return date Storage Location This field shows where the gage is stored when not in use You cannot edit this field Current Location Shows where the gage is now You cannot edit this field Return Gages When you click Return Gages this screen appears Return Gages Gage ID ran YJ ast Due Issue Date 10 8 2003 Next Due Date Issue Time 8434M Type Ean Issued To Bopsmh Issued Dept fac a Pat No fld2aa Storage Location COMPOSITES oo
65. Pre Approved If there are multiple recommended changes because more than one frequency is in use you will be asked to confirm that GAGEtrak is suggesting the right one When you are asked you will also have the opportunity to manually enter a calibration frequency New Calibration Frequency New Calibration Frequency Dropdown listbox on this Form shows suggested new frequencies You may change the frequency For this gage or select From the list to apply the suggested frequency Ok Cancel Method A3 Formulas a significance at g number in tolerance at n number calibrated at existing interval new interval R reliability at existing interval R reliability target hi7 g n If v EY ave DI R 1 R k If Rawk 2 ire ao pi 1 Ry a will not be allowed to exceed 1 Use the following formulas if a Significance Threshold Extrapolation Formulas J In An Rk foro R 1 2 17 for R 21 L 1 A 2 for R 0 Interpolation formulas Used when a changels has already been made that has proved to be excessively large 96 Chapter 10 Gage Frequency Adjusting Interval L h 42 Each subsequent increment of change is reduced by half Chapter 11 Entering Calibration Records Calibration Entry Calibration To enter calibration records select Calibration Entry from the Calibrations menu you may also select the Calibration button from the Gage Entry Information window
66. Procedure Entry Procedure Attachments seb daro or i via aaeei eoe b deeds evan pd weed Er eaa Ease ear acea Reed 77 Procedure Entry Gage List a isi ei ore Ae oO a pide v t ica ere ule ema eer nadine DK T certc cU RID UP 78 Chapter 6 Entering Service Requests 1 e eere eene eerte eee eee en ea ee sn een ea enesnesnesaesessessesseessess 70 Chapter 7 Kit ENUY RD REL Sud iau M PALO RO DT p 81 Kit Entry Required Gage Types du oeste De nces nace o cedo roe reboot uut pO vv e nessun x CER b S de vU uo o vU PETI Ped Ove adde HE QUEUE NES 82 Kit Entry Required Gage oon bn satire e Doi ete etie ab ed o e sense e ada Fee ob eap i Re oa Aaa bd autem rama Cou udo cs eeu abdo a 82 ISSUING AAC E ROO QE ToU 83 REUNIDO albos iocos sanete Ads DU EAT ML ADM AE M C VHC 84 KICEN Y HISTO i ce ce paa eI E Po I OO dU ead et e iade ivt et ME REM MM ME 85 Kit Entry ReBOLIS oin i Pod dodo a a Dh REEL n A a D T cut oc quas 85 Chapter 8 Entering Supplier Records e00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 87 Supplier EU eroe cusses IeE Dv DE GO YRN Sea cove Cup eo des uie DUREE vUa Dp IN des uve Devan uds A ua uua duet acs us canes due Uude Des auus dus eU EU Done UN Ue UNDE UE E 87 Chapter 9 Gage Issue and Return Batch Mode c cscsssssssssssssesesessssssssesesesessssssesesesesessssssesesesesesecsssesere OD PSS UC GAC SS REPRINT ADR
67. SOS d di REL uir dt icta deo oC ire uf Code uim PL aA De ir ropes viciis pe DIIS 304 Repairing Data Elles 4 ocoet ico onere uta ood eov Dec ou ls Pda ed M LL rod 304 Duplicate Value Error Messatde 1 nio e oca reet i fio osa te Gas te dicat io ov pa race ad ras Rae tue eel eas IR osa DR Eco tate 304 Previewing or Printing Reports Error Message 4 eese eese eese eene tenen ette ette stasera stans tse tas etas s ene tas etse ease sns s ase tn seta ssa sta 305 P Touch Printer Does Not Print Labels iioi e t iti et o aco doe ei dee aluet d t e td beata duces 305 GAGEtrak 6 Chapter 1 Introduction Overview We re proud to welcome you to GAGEtrak Version 6 0 for Windows a database software program that automates your calibration information saving you time and giving you precise control over the tools you use to do your job The program was designed for qualty control professionals who need a convenient easy to use and powerful method for documenting tracking and retrieving calibration information Once you ve mastered its essentials GAGEtrak will become a vital tool for managing your calibration records The Quick Start Guidewill help you install and run GAGEtrak quickly so that you can evaluate its major features The User s Manual gives you detailed information about working with records and reports The System Administrator s Guide provides comprehensive installation instructions including client server inst
68. Text 50 UserDef12 Text 50 UserDef13 Text 50 UserDef14 Text 50 UserDef15 Text 50 UserDef16 Text 50 UserDef17 Text 50 UserDef18 Text 50 UserDef19 Text 50 UserDef20 Text 50 Restrictlssue Long Integer 4 Min CalFreq Double 8 Max CalFreq Double 8 EstNext Due Date Date Time 8 FloatFixed Long Integer 4 FloatFixedRR Long Integer 4 PrintlssueLabel Long Integer 4 Adjustment Method Text 50 Table Name GAGE Master Schedule Description Contains calibration schedule information for a particular gage Associated From Gage Entry Schedule tab Field List Data Type Length Gage ID Text key 50 Schedule ID Text key 50 Calibrator Text 50 Schedule_Frequency Double 8 Schedule Frequency UOM Text 50 Schedule Hours Double 8 ScheduleSkipDirection Long Integer 4 Next Due Date Date Time 8 Last Done Date Date Time 8 Notes Memo 0 AdjPlanCode Text 50 AdjCalFreq Double 8 MaxAdjCalFreq Double 8 278 Appendix B Table Definitions Table Name GAGE Reqs Description Gage part and usage information Associated From Part Master SubForm Gage Entry Parts Field List Data Type Length Part No Text key 50 Gage ID Text key 50 Step_No Text 50 Dimension Text 50 Method Text 50 Freq Text 50 Comments Memo 0 Table Name GAGE Status Rules Description Not Used Associated From Not Used Field List Data Type Length UserlD Text key 150 Status ID Text key 50 Status Text 20 Allowlssue Long Integer 4 AllowView Long Integer 4 Waiting L
69. The label generator in GAGEtrak can generate custom size labels but not all printers can support custom label sizes so it is highly recommended to consult your printer guide prior to proceeding 165 166 Appendix A Calibration Label Kit Printing Labels from Calibration Entry You can print individual calibration labels directly from the Calibration Entry Labels tab Calibration Entry gt Calibration Measurements Procedures Labels Signature Attachments User Defined Calibration Scans Gage ID c 002 M Select Label Design J MEat ani n M P S ReportN ame Calibration Label 1 2 x Calibration Label 1 2 x 2L Calibration Label 1 2 x 3L Calibration Label 1 4w x 1L Calibration Label 1 4w x 2L Calibration Label 1 4w x 3L Calibration Label Tw x 1L Calibration Label 1w x 2L Calibration Label Tw x 3L Inactive Gage Label 1 1 2w x 1 2L No Calibration Gage Label 1 1 2w x 1 2L View Label Print Label Edit Label Tape Record 14 4 1 gt gt i gt gt of 35 To print a label select the title of the desired label from the Select Label Design dropdown list and then click on the Print Label button The Print Label button will automatically send the label to the printer The height shown in the height column of the drop down list must match the height of the tape currently installed in your label printer Note The P Touch Label Printer ejects and cuts off a strip of blank label materia
70. Transaction Option Sac Translation Library Name OK Test Cancel If this window appears click the Browse button and navigate through the available drives and directories until you find the database file Remember that the file name must be GTDATA60 MDB Where Is The Data File 2 x Look in Cu GTWE et Be 2 Newrpts mdb File name GTDatas0 mdb X Files of type Databases My Network P Open as read only Note Users who have their database file Located on the network server must loginto the network operating system before they can open the database file If you re using GAGEtrak on a client server system you must set up the Open Database screen according to your database configuration Please see page 180 for more information Chapter 4 setting Up GAGEtrak Before you begin entering records we recommend that you configure your GAGEtrak program To do so go to the Setup menu and select Settings Main Menu x e Your Company Name Main Flecords Division Name Settings aa a Report Control ID Entry Status ID Entry Security Custom Reports Auto Email Header Gage Events Multiple Choice Entry DaaTods User D No User Name C A GTWE GTSamp60 mdb Settings User Information In the first Settings screen User Info enter your company information Settings Me A General Cal ptions Calendar Security Automatic Num
71. Type Length Item Text key 50 Label Text Text 50 LabelFontWeight Long Integer 4 dftLabel Text Text 50 Field Type Text 50 Field Attrib Text 50 List Source Memo 0 List Table Text 50 List Field Text 50 Table Name Users Description Records information about users Associated From Security Users Field List Data Type Length PIN Text 4 User Name Text key 50 Title Text 50 Location Text 50 Phone Text 50 Gage_Ac Long Integer 4 Gage A Long Integer 4 Gage_M Long Integer 4 Gage_D Long Integer 4 Calib Ac Long Integer 4 Calib A Long Integer 4 Calib M Long Integer 4 Calib D Long Integer 4 GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 299 Field List Data Type Length Proc_Ac Long Integer 4 Proc_A Long Integer 4 Proc_M Long Integer 4 Proc_D Long Integer 4 IT Ac Long Integer 4 ITA Long Integer 4 IT M Long Integer 4 IT D Long Integer 4 Supp Ac Long Integer 4 Supp A Long Integer 4 Supp M Long Integer 4 Supp D Long Integer 4 GRR Ac Long Integer 4 GRR A Long Integer 4 GRR M Long Integer 4 GRR D Long Integer 4 MDR Ac Long Integer 4 MDR A Long Integer 4 MDR M Long Integer 4 MDR D Long Integer 4 REPT M Long Integer 4 UTIL M Long Integer 4 Part Ac Long Integer 4 Part A Long Integer 4 Part M Long Integer 4 Part D Long Integer 4 Appendix C Database Management Create a New GAGEtrak Database You can use multiple databases with GAGEtrak For your convenience the program installs an empty data fil
72. Type Length Letter Type Text key 50 Date Authored Date Time 8 Authored by Text 50 Letter Body Memo 0 Table Name Man Sequences Description Internal program use Associated From None Field List Data Type Length Key Field Long Integer key 4 GRR Results ID Long Integer 4 MDR No Long Integer 4 ezs SearchCriteria Long Integer 4 ezy AuditLog Long Integer 4 tblFilters Long Integer 4 tblCriteria Long Integer 4 Authorized Persons Long Integer 4 Bookmark ID Long Integer 4 Event ID Long Integer 4 Stability ID Long Integer 4 Table Name MDR Description Contains related information of a particular service request Associated From MDR Entry Service Request Entry Edit Service Request MDR Gages Field List Data Type Length MDR No Text key 50 MDR_Date Date Time 8 Requester Text 50 Gage ID Text 50 Ins Amt Double 8 Letter Type Text 50 Service Supplier Text 50 Status Text 50 Completion Date Date Time 8 Comments Text 250 Table Name MDR Archive Description Archived Service Request Field List Data Type Length MDR No Text key 50 286 Appendix B Table Definitions Field List Data Type Length MDR_Date Date Time 8 Requester Text 50 Gage ID Text 50 Ins Amt Double 8 Letter Type Text 50 Service Supplier Text 50 Status Text 50 Completion Date Date Time 8 Comments Text 250 Table Name MDR Gages Description Contains related information for a service request of a particular gage Associated From Service Request E
73. Uncertainty Contributor Type Plus or Minus Probability Distribution Based On DF Include Linearity Linearity amp Bias corrected A as Rectangular Maximum Residual 20 077 Yes v Only Bias corrected A oss Rectangular Maximum Residual 20 077 No Uncorrected A 354 Rectangular Maximum Residual 20 3077 No v Bias corrected or not A 0 05736525 Normal 1 Std Err of Avg Bias s Yes v Resolution o Rectangular From Gage T able infinite Yes v Repeatability or GRR A 0238837 Normal Pooled Std Dev ss ves z Select the items you want to be copied to the uncertainty budget Of the first three items only one can be selected Add any additional type or B items to the uncertainty budget Update Budget Prefill Cale Charts Print Record I 4 1 gt gt i gt gt of 2 The columns are explained in the table below Column Description Uncertainty The type of measurement error variation to be considered as a contributor Contributor Type Everything on this sub tab is Type A meaning it was determined from observation and statistics Plus or Minus The amount of plus or minus variation that was observed expressed as a maximum deviation or a standard deviation Probability The assumed pattern of variation for each type of error See Background on Distribution Probability Distributions Based on The information or calculation that was used to determine the Plus o
74. Version 6 0 System Administrator s Guide Chapter 1 Installation You can use GAGEtrak 6 on a single workstation on a network or in a client server environment installation will vary slightly for each of these options This chapter gives you general installation instructions for all options Chapter 2 beginning on page 183 deals specifically with setting up an MS SQL client server system Program Requirements GAGEtrak 6 Workstation Requirements Microsoft Windows 98 2000 or XP Hard disk with 200 MB of free space for program files plus 100 MB for a typical database 512 MB or higher RAM Pentium 1 4 MHz CPU required Pentium 2 4GHz or current technology recommended SVGA monitor at 800 x 600 resolution or higher Microsoft Internet Explorer Version 6 x Mouse or compatible pointing device Default Windows printer for printing reports GAGEtrak 6 Network Requirements Installation Files Optional This section will only apply if the data file will be shared over the network or will be part of a regular network backup Network folder with full rights for each GAGEtrak user 100 MB LAN The root directory of the CD contains all the files required to run GAGEtrak Installation Options You can use GAGEtrak 6 as a client server program with one centralized dedicated computer hosting the database and one or more user workstations accessing the database from that server You can also choose to install and use GAGEtrak on
75. X X Y Plot of Averages by Size sss 124 Z ZIDIFM Gin ERRORES HAERES DIOE TL 221 222
76. ace dn be och aii bus I ALIA sve detente ened eel erect LETT de coco R 49 Undo Changes to Fields and Recor s a c oe aicut o po teria eia TEA eo bua Sect au ota cu E liue eo reU dte uela Pv doce etd eps bu ou ode eiu oe Pac co 49 Saving ROC ORS PNE RE Tem 49 Editing and Shorteut Keys caocooe oc Da a o Pi eie to Ho cu on eor eco ud Dd add adt suom eM Oi A 49 Keyboard Shortcuts Dbeneral a ui e eom v S Fo RE E rEEES ENTER TEE EE RREH ERANT VE D vend ev HEU LN UIT DUTIES NE OASTE 49 Field Editing and Selection Keys ancor ce ate Er A ERO Led aa bacio ie he Ea RE d tod dole e ca RH ond abdo apo as Cel ud eT d 49 Datasheet Table Keyboard Shortcuts cssssscscscscscsssssssssssssssssssssssesssssssssssssesssesesescsesesessssssssssssscecscscscscssssesesesesesescecsessssssssssssecscscsssosssssseees 50 Menus antd Cormrhards aa M RM M 50 File Menitbsectan tei condam qnt Hamer eod siehts b N ivt tutos ET AI elm p EE 50 Edit MOI NR ER RN 50 VIEW MENU essem abe fpa dab n s p abe bive pan asd 51 Format Mebladus a e E Enc cu MU E V EVE EE 51 Record Menlbzb ete io dii e o vo a ST Tre E E I TR re M NE UE A ED e EE 51 BOOKINGS MCI E E EEEE AEE EAE TARS 51 Hel Me ee e PH AUS 51 Chapter 3 Entering Gage Records 4 4 4 e eren eene eere eren oen en eene re ene se ene enero sae sesseseeseseesesses D3 badge ENUY cee coe eo neo ato E cL D Loo EL ELLE Caan cece aut nca Mie
77. an attribute gage To plot this chart for attribute gages we need parts that are made near and on both sides of a specification limit The study can be done at either specification limit or at both limits We need variable measurements in addition to attribute data for each part used in the study Only eight parts are needed for the study but since we need to find parts that meet certain criteria we often have to check more than eight parts The attribute data consists of checking each part twenty times and recording how many times the part is accepted We do this until we have found at least one part that is accepted zero times at least one part that is accepted twenty times and at least six parts with acceptance counts that can be anywhere from one to nineteen In case there are extra parts GAGEtrak will allow up to three entries for each acceptance count In case there are more than three parts for a certain acceptance count there are instructions on how to choose which three to include When you click the Calc button GAGEtrak adjusts the percent accepted for each part and converts it to a normal score which makes the S curves plot as diagonal straight lines GAGEtrak then uses linear regression to calculate repeatability and bias GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 155 Information Tab Gage RR Attribute Analytic Method P Information Lower Specification Upper Specification Study Date 11 01 2002
78. before creating another criterion 7 When you are done click OK To discard click Cancel The fields of the Sub Report Custom Properties window are described in the following table Field Name Description Report Source This is a list box of all available reports Select the subreport you will use from the list Note Any new reports are generally found toward the bottom of the listbox SQL The SQL statement used in opening the data source of your subreport This is a non editable field and is provided here so you can immediately see the tables and fields that are used in your subreport This is particularly helpful in finding out if the field you need to use for the link is contained in one or more tables Refresh Button Refreshes the SQL screen 246 Chapter 8 Customizing Reports Field Name Description Table optional If your link field is contained in more than one table in your source you must specify the table to use for your field If only one source table uses this field you may leave the 7able field blank Sub Report Fields The name of the link field from your sub report Operator The operator for comparing the link field to a value Value You have three choices for filter value Fixed your report will be limited to only the value entered Field this list box is taken from all the available fields of your master report Lxternal fields in the main report SQL statement Add Remove and C
79. bias The repeatability and bias are not necessarily the same at both specification limits 100 00096 en e e 50 000 Probability of Accepting 25 000 e e v oO 6 d o oc o o o 85 0 00600000 0 00200000 o 00000000 0 00200000 0 00400000 0 00600000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reference Values Performance Curve Probability Plots This chart uses a special scale that makes the Gage Performance Curve look like a series of straight lines The horizontal width of the diagonal line is 5 15 times the Repeatability and the horizontal distance between a specification limit and the 50 point on the corresponding diagonal line is Bias The repeatability and bias are not necessarily the same at both specification limits GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 157 Probability of Accepting cn zl an e e e e e eE e e e e C e e e e e 0 00200000 0 00400000 0 00600000 n 0 Reference Values This chart shows how the probability of acceptance gradually changes in an curve near the Specification Limits The horizontal width of the f curve is about six times the Repeatability and the horizontal distance between a specification limit and the 5096 point on the curve is Bias Attribute Analytic Formulas C acceptance count P probability of a particular acceptance count x normal score plots on vertical scale in this case y
80. but these two tables can actually be interchanged as described in selection 2 and 3 of the Join Properties option Setting Data Sort Order To set the order or arrangement of data in your report you have to specify which table and what field will determine this order 234 Chapter 8 Customizing Reports Set Sort Orders Which fields do you want to sort Y ou can choose multiple fields from multiple tables listed below Tables Gage Events Y Available Fields Selected Fields Calibration_Header Gage_ID Gage_Events Event_ID Sort Order Ascending Y Cancel lt lt Back Next gt gt You can however choose not to apply any particular order on your records within the Selected Fields list box if you do not your report will display them as they appear in your original records You must also set the Sort Order to Ascending or Descending f no setting is specified the application default is set to Ascending Click on the Next button and view the SQL statement summary on the next window The following summary screen will show you the actual SQL statement that will be used to open your data source Summary Below is the summary record source for your report You can modify edit the existing query through the text box below Select Calibration Header Gage ID Calibration Header Calibration Date Gage Events Gage ID Gage Events Event ID FROM Calibration Header INNER JOIN Gage Events ON Calibration Header Gage
81. by default Click on the Calc button and GAGEtrak automatically calculates these fields Field Button Name t for 95 Confidence Coverage Factor K Combined Uncertaint DF for Combined Uncertaint Expanded Uncertainty Description This is a multiplier that could be used to convert Combined Uncertainty to a 95 confidence limit It is based on the DF for Combined Uncertainty It is here for comparison to Coverage Factor k This multiplier is used to convert Combined Uncertainty to Expanded Uncertainty Most but not all calibration certificates use a Coverage Factor of k 2 for approximately 95 confidence You can change Coverage Factor k if you wish Values of 1 or 3 are sometimes used or a value equal to t for 95 Confidence Coverage Factor k should be stated on calibration certificates This is the total of the Uncertainty Contributors added by the RSS root sum square method i e They are squared summed and the square root is taken This is also called effective degrees of freedom It is used to calculate t for 95 Confidence It is a good idea to include this DF on calibration certificates This is the value to be included on applicable calibration certificates Coverage Factor k should also be included DF of Combined Uncertainty is good to include also GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 139 Background on Probability Distributions Normal Distribution The bell shaped p
82. d csse E oet bo ebd no a e md cette ee abd TC Een ducent d i Led 170 Inventory ana ClassifiCallol sso o p he eti n rote n be Pet inn d asd edad ida tua didibeu s UD ME 170 Calibration Schedules 3 een deae aeei s Potete ad Pom asco e RN ES IL ecc Pr Ue nt DU i UE 170 Calibratori PEaCUEB s ead ad cedi errori ttv ame qu iN d eH t nistei i etie utum cb cane ie tm EA 170 PROTO SINC OS ERE RTT Rma ne 170 Resources for Books Publications and Reference Materials eee ee eeeeee eee eee etnnn ness eee tnass see eee ens asse eee 171 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE eere 173 Chapter 12 INSTALLATION CC cx me LED Programi Redquiremelblts ieee ee NM MEI MM E EL MEM 175 Mtalaa tiO mee T EE 175 al em 175 Installation ODUOFIS cote rob dE cet un ED pe eod E antes eeie 175 After You Install GAGE OK cio eee SERVARE NR ERREUR NERVES UO NS NEU NS UR vaca o vu mU UM UD M E TUM Cr EU NU UNDA eee 180 Adiministrater Installallol cio ae ee E QNS e HEU HN EUR ES ED EUN ORDRES SEE E n SNP IN eS CU n SH Dre Se deii sas Ete eS ise Di es Sce ERE Edu iun ine 180 Configuration FILE Seins co oec erecto en etat eta etui Peto cendi da dete eru leto era eti eta ete etas doe Ate sive tae ebd AEA S 181 Sample Oo a ce Eg a 0 NR RR DAT 181 Cha
83. don t want to test it click OK 13 When youre finished close the ODBC Data Source Administrator Chapter 3 Running GAGEtrak Logon When you open GAGEtrak a logon window will appear if you have set up security Enter your User ID and Password and click OK For information about setting up user security please see page 195 User ID Default Password Change Password Cancel Serial Number If you haven t entered your program serial number into the About box the following message will appear to remind you to enter it No Serial No Entered IN Please Enter your Serial No in the About Box 187 188 Chapter 3 Running GAGEtrak Click OK and the About window will appear Enter your GAGEtrak serial number located on your registration card and on the packing list that came with your package If you can t find your serial number contact Technical Support at 480 922 7300 Main Menu The main menu shows the name of the currently logged in user in the lower left corner and shows the full path to current database file in the lower right corner 83 Main Menu Main Records GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 189 Below is the breakdown of the menu bage Entry Part Entry Procedure Entry Service Request Entry Kit Entry Supplier Entry Issue Gages Return Gages Status bage Frequency Adjustment Intervals lt
84. due for calibration Gage ID of Standard is limited to Reference Standards with no Due Date or Next Date Due in the future Std Due Date Calibration schedule next due date Uncertainty If you select the reference standard from the list the uncertainty value will automatically display If you manually enter the standard then enter its uncertainty value here You can obtain this value from the manufacturer it s expressed in units such as percentage 0 5 proportion 0 005 or measurement 0 0001 inch You must enter units of the same value otherwise the calculated 2 Uncertaintywill be wrong Calibration Formula Listing Use the Custom Formula button next to the Before or After fields to help calculate a Before or After value if there is not a calibration reading for the selected standard the Calibration Formula Listing works like a calculator based on predefined or user defined formulas originally set in Formula Entry 83 Calibration Formula Listing x Formula Name Calibration Formula Listin Fahrenheit TE Formula Name Add New Cancel 9e Select a predefined formula from the dropdown list box You will notice that the value present in the field is retained from the last input for the selected formula calculation Either retain the value or input a new value and select OK formula computes You will be reverted back to the Measurements form and the newly calculated value 102 Chapter 11 Entering Calibra
85. equipment variation appraiser variation and interaction Usually referred to as GRR or GR amp R or Gage R amp R Part Variation PV The part variation is the part of the total GRR study error that is due to the parts being measured Total Variation TV The total variation is the RSS root sum square sum of the gage repeatability and reproducibility including interaction if available and the part variation Total variation is an estimate of process variation that can be used when process variation is unknown Illustration of Gage Errors The chart below illustrates several terms we have discussed The three zigzag patterns show the pattern of Part Variation PV as measured by three different Appraisers These patterns vary a lot more than the control limits which is good the control limits show the variation to be expected due to Repeatability EV if we always measured the same part The three patterns are not close in height which is an error called Reproducibility AV The three patterns are not close in shape which is an error called Appraiser x Part Interaction INT AVERAGE CHART BY PART 1 0633 0 9633 CEN IAA j A wit osd ff OO O O AAO OAOA 0 6633 0 56334 0 4633 UCL 0 8796 Avg 0 8075 LCL 0 7354 MSA Menu Select MSA from the Main menu to access the MSA menu n Your Company Name Main Records Division Name GRR Attribute Risk Analysis Linearity Bias and Attribute Analytic Uncertainty
86. filter window similar to the one below will appear BS Calibration Label Filter _ Ol x From Date Done oO ToDaeDoe FomTmeDone st S To Time Done 1 O By bd BaelD Description 0 1 5 Current Location M Storage Location a Type z View Print Clear Filter Close Advanced Fiter Add To Queue Fill From Queue You can use this window to filter for a group of calibration labels based upon Calibration Date Gage ID Location or Descriptionfor any calibration record that exists in the database Below are brief descriptions of the fields and buttons in this window Field Button Name Description From and 7o Date Done Inclusive calibration dates From and 7o Time Done Inclusive calibration times By Name of calibrator Gage ID ID of specific gage This will limit your label to one for the specific gage ID only Description Enter a description for the gage Current Location The current location of the set of gages to be selected Storage Location The storage location of the set of gages to be selected Type The type of the set of gages to be selected View Button To see how your label will appear before you print it click on this button Print Button Prints labels Clear Filter Button Clears all filter entries Close Button Aborts label printing and goes back to the Custom Label Menu Advanced Filter Button Use this button to open the Advanced Filter window You can then fil
87. gages that an employee is specially permitted to use Gage selection is limited to the dropdown list Once selection is made the gage Description Type and Model No fields will automatically populate with Gage ID related information To the right of the Gage ID criteria is a Note field that can be used document special instructions etc Staff Entry Issued Gages 53 Staff Entry ees Sten Sth C 002 CALIPER DIAL124NCH Dent HAIN 1 2 OD MIC 0001 MITUTC QC NEED In this screen you can view but cannot edit the list of gages that are currently checked out to this employee Chapter 6 Data fools In addition to setup features the Data Tools menu also contain functions that help you maintain your program and database In this chapter we ll discuss these utilities including archiving or un archiving records backing up your data and exporting or importing records Data Tools Archive Un Archive Use this utility to archive or un archive your calibration and gage issue records Archive moves your records from the current group and puts them in a storage location within the database This makes your current group of records smaller and your database faster An archive is not the same as a backup Remember Always make a backup copy of your database file before you archive When you select this feature the following filter will appear S5 Archive Filter Record Type Calibrations C Gage Issues GAGE ID
88. labeled 1 60 The average of all the Bias estimates The Lower 95 Confidence Limit Must not be greater than zero The Upper 95 Confidence Limit Must not be less than zero Degrees of Freedom Standard Deviation the variability of the individual Bias estimates Standard Error The variability of Average Bias Histogram This chart is used to show the central tendency spread and shape of the distribution of Bias values Example Histogram 1E0000 agentem 14 000000 T E Lan P 12 000000 possess poseees bose oes Senay gae ae eR 10 000000 r TIE See eee ena iine 8 000000 4 ne Frequency B 00000 Too e pauca pases 4 000000 4 a a oo 2 000000 4 000000 e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e ce A e Uu e m e Au e C4 A h c aad u C e eo u e e N Yp eo Bias Interpretation of Bias Tab To be acceptable the lower 95 confidence limit must not be greater than zero and the upper 95 confidence limit must not be less than zero If not acceptable then the Histogram may Identify outliers or patterns that provide clues Possible causes are 1 Gage not calibrated properly at lower and upper ends of the operating range Error in the minimum or maximum master Worn instrument Internal instrument design characteristics a po mM Mistakes in measurement or typos
89. next step by clicking Next et Label Size Paper Size Paper Sizes wd VHS C Video Cassette d Audio Cassette Case a DAT Cassette d Mini Disk Back d Mini Disk a Organizer Large d Organizer Small tCustom S Note for Custom Paper Size enfer paper width D inch dimensions here Height D inch 3 Cancel lt lt Back Next gt gt Select Report Tables Now choose from all available tables in your database by highlighting the table name and clicking the gt button You can select multiple tables but since the links will not be established you must make sure that both tables have records in them that match or have at least one common field Only matching records will be shown We recommend that you select only one table in making your labels Select report tables Which Tables do you want in your Query Database Tables Selected Tables Calibration Header Calibration Header Sig L alibration Measurement Calibration Procedure Lir gt gt Calibration_Scans Es Calibration Standards CHArchive Ee CheckBox lt lt CMArchive Customer Adiustmert Fadil Cancel lt lt Back Next gt Select Report Fields Choose the fields you need for your label from the list of all the fields in the selected table When you are done click Finish to edit your label in the report editor Select report fields F Which fields do you want in your query ar ccr You can choose any field from your
90. next to each day you want to skip If a calculated calibration due date falls on a skip date GAGEtrak schedules it on the following day or the previous day depending on the Skip Forward and Skip Backward set for each gage Select Skip Forward or Skip Backward in this window to set the default If you manuallyenter a calibration due date GAGEtrak won t apply your skip dates to It Calendar Color Coding Four different colors are used to display the number of hours shown on the Intervals Calibration Calendar You can set the number of hours for each color according to the staffing level available on a daily basis The colors on the calendar will show at a glance which days are over or understaffed Calendar Range Use these fields to set the number of months to look ahead of or behind the current month If you want to put large numbers here experiment with them The larger the number of months the longer it will take to calculate next due dates and generate the Calibration Calendar For faster operation you may want to set the Calendar Range from 1 to 3 months ahead and behind Calendar Refresh Rate Use this field to modify the interval at which GAGEtrak automatically updates the calibration data shown in the calibration schedule calendar Refreshing the calendar ensures that the data shown in the calendar accurately reflects the data in the database you may wish to modify the refresh rate according to how busy your calibration lab is
91. of Measurement Type AJ These apply to working measurements made after calibration Uncertainty Contributor GRR or its components EV AV and INT Stability lof the gage Consistency lof the gage Details These are available in GRR studies In this version of GAGEtrak the Probability Distribution is Normal 1 Other sources or old printouts may require a Divisor of 5 15 Include this item when a Stability study shows instability Use the maximum shift or drift that occurs on an X bar chart This can be done by ignoring where the centerline of the limits is currently drawn on the chart and imagining the limits were centered around the variation at the beginning of the chart Then imagining that the limits were centered around the variation at the point of maximum shift or drift Use the difference between the two imaginary centerlines as the Plus or Minus value The Probability Distribution is Rectangular Follow the instructions for Stability but do it with the s chart when the s chart is unstable The Probability Distribution is Normal 1 General Uncertainty Contributors Type B These apply both to uncertainty of calibration and uncertainty of measurement Uncertainty Contributor Reference Standard Temperature Difference Parallax Details Use the Expanded Uncertainty from the reference standards incoming calibration certificate Expanded Uncertainties are usually Type B and the Probability Distrib
92. of the Gage ID field if you have selected a gage with a calibration schedule already past due 89 90 Chapter 9 Gage Issue and Return Batch Mode Field Button Name Description Next Due Date Issue Gages will generate the Next Due Date when you issue out a gage with a frequency UOM other than Usageand or Cycles unless Usage and or Cyclesis due for calibration then a Next Due Date will be generated If the gage is due for calibration this message will appear when the past due gage is selected Past Due This gage is past due calibration ssue Date These fields track the gage issuance date and time the fields are prefilled with the and ssue Time current date and time but are editable fields Type Choose the type of issue this field creates a self building list as you enter different descriptions Issued To Enter or select the person to whom you issue the gage however the name selection for this field may be dependent on the Gage Entry Auth Persons Restrict Issue selection For more information see Restrict ssueunder Gage Entry Auth Persons on page 65 Issued Dept Select or enter the department or job number that will use the gage Part No Use this field to track the part or group of parts that the gage will measure PO No You can enter a Purchase Order number if you re sending the gage out to a supplier for repair or calibration or are manufacturing parts for a customer Promised Date Enter the date on which y
93. or between appraisers Gage theory tells us that a part made exactly on a specification limit would have a fifty fifty chance of being accepted by a perfect gage that has no bias This is true for both attribute and variable gages For customer protection attribute gage manufacturers deviate from theory and shoot for slightly less than 5096 acceptance at the specification limit Because all gages attribute and variable have repeatability and reproducibility problems parts made too near a specification limit will experience inevitable disagreements between and within appraisers This module will compare pairs of appraisers and perform hypothesis tests to determine if there is sufficient agreement If a variable gage is available that can check the same parts GAGEtrak will compare attribute and variable decisions and calculate gage repeatability and reproducibility GRR for the attribute gage If variable measurements are not feasible you can substitute attribute reference values from an authoritative attribute source the customer perhaps Information Tab Gage RR Attribute Risk Analysis P Information Input Crosstabs Effectiveness Miss Rate Analysis Signal Detection Study Date S01 2002 Co Part No Msa o Gage ID O22EDigtal Gainer 0 8 J PatNo iozr1i x Gage Desc Caliper O 6inch Part Desc Bracket Rt Hand Study Type Risk Analysis Approved Pass Value fo Upper L
94. person who calibrated the gage This field automatically displays the name of the current user but you can change it Calibration Type In this field enter the type of work being performed such as calibration repair or rebuild As Found Condition Choose the condition of the gage before calibration or adjustment Select In for in tolerance Out for out of tolerance or New for a new instrument that has not been calibrated before Prior to calibration a test points of the instrument must be within tolerance to have the As Found Condition field set to In You need this information only if you ve chosen Auto Adjust Calibration Frequency for this gage see the System Administrator s Guidefor details Results Enter any results or comments typically used for attribute type gaging or dimensional layouts Enter calibration measurements into the Measurementstable see below Pass You must check this box in order for the program to automatically calculate the next calibration due date Calibration Frequency Calibration Date Note The calibration Status field will disappear and cannot be edited once the calibration record has been passed Interval Adjustment This is non editable field based on the Gage Frequency Adjusting Interval selection Method made for this record in Gage Entry Calibration Schedule Action Required Enter any action that may be required such as send out for repair Calibration Status Select the final ca
95. record Saving Records GAGEtrak automatically saves records whenever you go to a different record or close the window but you can manually save records by clicking the record selector bar or selector button in Table view You can also use Save Record from the File menu to save your records Editing and Shortcut Keys You can use these keyboard shortcuts to save time when you re entering records Note Where indicated by CTRL press the CTRL key while pressing the other key Keyboard Shortcuts General Press To PAGE DOWN Go to next record in Form view next page of records in Table view PAGE UP Go to prior record in Form view prior page of records in Table view CTRL PAGE DOWN Go to next record but keep cursor in same field CTRL PAGE UP Go to prior record but keep cursor in same field CTRL Copy field data from the priorrecord s field CTRL Insert the current date CTRL Insert the current time CTRL Add anew record SHIFT ENTER Save changes to the current record CTRL Delete the current record CTRL ENTER Add a new line to a memo field F2 Switch between field editing and navigation modes F5 Move to the record number entry box SHIFT SPACE Select the current record Field Editing and Selection Keys Press To _SHIFTRGTARROW Extend the selection or deselect one character to the right _CTRLSHIFT RGT ARROW Extend the selection or deselect onewordtotheright SHIFT LFT ARROW Extend the s
96. snesneseesessessese 165 Installing the Label Printer and Windows Software eere eee eee eese eese eese eee ee eene ette etse tas t tae tas etas e tas s enses etse tassa eta 165 Printing Calibration tabels 2 5 cr A Pes voces tases eb ace De aria Deique Qu eua Sede IUS cu Du oe aca duds opa ee e ara Dr CUN DP UM DENT IM COME 165 Printing Labels from Calibration ENY qoot atn ei las end au ve a n RO Ele albos n To ud A Detto ER 166 Printing Labels from the Calibration Labels Report 1 00 riri erc torte ER otn iees eo t eroe ta emere eh ead E cadeau 167 Viewing and Printing Wael sce niii e eoo p et eto e e a nat nO vc i dea one ur Tarte iUm dedi i Cede 167 Appendix B Gage Calibration and Control A ee ree recen eene ee eene een ea ee en eene eaesessesaeseesesss 109 Purpose of CalibFSblOPi c e eo Ee ERES re rat t e aveva it EC qa MM E ME 169 Calibration Terminology sects a Sees Dese eee Des coma Dope ut Pessoa Do uva opaca eau D esee aque Doc Dus ei Penso a Dor cued t dupe vete Dd a pud esas 169 MES Ie sine n RTT P CR 169 PUrChaSEd nd i icio Reitz B6 S RS RR m 169 Purchased Working Standakds uiuere caso etin e or oe et lava crest ee cree aurea eine TRETA 169 Test EGQuIDETIPDEU n nio EE Ade c eai Pro IS et enic ICM oo grr grr re t deitatis E ee retin rer rere tren 169 Test WALT TALS oo DRE RR He id e beu Ie 170 Gages lor Gadgess
97. standard For safety measures GAGEtrak will question whether you wish to continue with the new standard attachment Gage Entry Attach Procedures Button Attach Procedure to Multiple Gages Gage Type DIAL Procedure Attach Close The Attach Procedures button allows the user to attach a procedure to a gage type for every gage ID with the same identification for example Gage ID C 002 If there is an existing type already assigned to the gage and you try to attach a new procedure to this gage record all gages with the selected gage type will have the selected procedure attached to it For safety measures GAGEtrak will question whether you wish to continue with the new procedure attachment Chapter 4 Part Records Part Entry Use Part Entry to track parts and set up lists of gage requirements lists of gages that you need to use to inspect parts as you produce them From the Main Records menu select Part Entry BJ Part Entry lel ES PatNo io2211 Description Bracket RtHand Operation Stamping Drawing No P0022 Drawing Date 2 3 1998 Change Level BO Change Date FO Part User 1 FO m Part User 2 Inspection Procedure z Checks Burrs Scratches Corrosion Missing Holes Gage Requirements 14 Kodak Optical Co Digital Indicator Record M 93 ba px of 3 Field Button Name Description Part No In this field enter the number of the
98. t MS Interaction 2 _ MS MS din r Appraiser EON MS MS nr Part 25i MS MS kr ANOVA Calculation Source DF SS Appraiser 0 04800 Parts 2 05871 Appraiser x Part 18 0 10367 Gage Error 30 0 03875 Total 59 2 2491 Estimate of Std Dev Variance o T 0 00129 0 0359 Repeatability 0 00091 0 0302 Operator 0 00223 0 0472 Interaction R amp R 0 00443 0 0666 P o o 0 0371641 0 1928 Part MS 0 02400 0 22875 0 00575 0 00129 F EMS C 2y 200 T 2 6o 4 45 T 2Y T Significant at a 0 25 level GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 127 Source AIAG Measurement Systems Analysis Guide Sample ANOVA Study This section contains data and calculations for a sample ANOVA study You can use this sample study as a model for your own ANOVA studies Readings Appraiser A Part Trial 1 Square Trial 2 Square Sum TAE JE ARD tal a tm m 1c 10 2 00 2 00 3 o85 o72 oso 064 165 135 0 85 o95 oo 180 16 s oss oso oss oz 100 o5 100 100 100 100 200 20 7 o ogo os ogo 190 180 8 o85 o72 ogo 064 165 14 9 100 100 100 100 200 20 o 036 o70 o49 130 O85 744 7 13 Total 16 55 SS Total 14 27 Appraiser B Part Trial 1 Square Trial 2 Square Sum Sum Square Appraiser C Part Trial 1 Square Trial 2 Square Sum Sum Square 0 50
99. the Calibration Frequency in fewer steps than Method M Method A3 s recommendation is available even for gages that do not have Auto Adjust Calibration Frequency turned on To see these recommendations click on Gage Frequency Adjusting Interval in Main Records Reliability Target This is the desired end of period reliability for example the desired probability that the as found condition of the gage will be in tolerance at the end of the calibration period after the optimum calibration frequency has been achieved GAGEtrak will recommend changes to the calibration frequency until the specified reliability is obtained The default Reliability Target is 80 but you can change it Specifying higher reliability will result in more frequent calibration Significance Threshold This is the maximum amount of risk GAGEtrak will take in recommending a change i e the risk that a recommended change will turn out not to have been necessary The default is 0 3 Specifying lower significance will increase the number of calibrations required to make a decision Significance must be between 0 never change and 1 always change Print Issue Label Default print label selection for label issuance When Issuing Gage Certificate of This statement is included in the Certificate of Calibration document see the Calibration Statement Reports section of the User s Manual This field scrolls up and down to allow for longer statements Failure Notice This s
100. the sub report with an appropriate name We suggest that you indicate within the name that this is a sub report since it will not have its own page header GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 245 Adding a Sub Report To add a sub report click on the SubReport button on the button bar then drag the cursor across the canvas while holding down the left mouse button to form a rectangle that will be occupied by your sub report Now that you have created a container for your sub report you must edit the link to the sub report you created earlier Click on the Edit Sub Report Link button amp to open the Sub Report Custom Properties window First you must define the Report Source or the name of the sub report that has been pre defined y Sub Report Custom Properties f 1 x Report Source 5D ForCalibProcReport Sub Report Data Source SOL SELECT tblMaster ms ID tblMaster ms Code tblMaster ms Status tblMaster ms Desc tblMaster ms Code AS GAGELabel tblMaster ms_CalFreq tblMaster ms_CalFreqUnit tbl Master ms Vendor tblMaster ms Location tblMMaster ms Type tblMaster ms_NextCalib tblStandards sd StandardlD tblStandards sd Min tblStandards sd Nom tblStandards sd Max tblCalibration cb_CalD ate tblCalibration cb CalBy tblCalibration cb Results FROM tblMaster LEFT JOIN tblStandards ON tblMaster ms ID tblStandards sd MasterlD LEFT JOIN tblCalibration ON Refresh
101. to open the selected file with that file type application Delete Highlight the record indicator to the left of the File name and or place the cursor in the File name field and select Delete from the floating toolbar to remove the attachment from the gage record GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 67 Gage Entry Events Gage Entry gt History Standards Parts Procedures Calibration Schedule R amp R Schedule User Defined Auth Persons Attachments Events gt Gage ID c 002 Description CALIPER DIAL 12 INCH X Event Parameter Application Gage Issued Email Triggers when this particular gage is issued Gage Returned Email Triggers when this particular gage is returned Calibration Fail Email Triggers when this particular gage Fails calibration Type Changed Email Triggers when the gage s type changed Calibration Failed Executes an application Status Changed Email Sends email when this gage status is changed Due Date Changed Email Sends email when next calibration date changed Sends email when this gage is renamed Sends email when this gage is deleted Status Change Report Opens 4 report when this event triggers Record I 4 1 gt bt gt gt of 1 4 gt Record I 4 2 gt gt i rx of 56 Individual gages can have specific triggering events for example a Gage Issuing Email or if running of an external application if a calibration has failed An external applicati
102. you were able to give each of your technicians the Calibration Work Orders and Calibration Procedures that they needed for their assigned calibrations The PDA gave the technician who was going off site a faster less cumbersome way of recording his calibration information and later you will easily be able to upload this information into your database The Clone Gage feature also saved you time Without it entering the new gage s information would have taken much longer not to mention that it would have been a redundant task This feature also provided for more accurate data entry since you didn t have to worry about as many potential errors The Software Wedge program instantly inserted your calibration measurements into GAGEtrak you didn t have to enter anything CalPro gave you proven calibration procedures that were already researched and documented The Calibration Label Kit helped you speedily print durable easy to read calibration labels for each gage that you calibrated Using Issue Tracking Entry you were able to quickly issue a gage out to another department and avoid the problem of not knowing where the gage is located Most importantly you now have an easy way to provide traceable gage usage history for each of your gages The Bar Code Reader provided for fast easy and accurate entry of issued and returned gages and even updated their current information all directly into GAGEtrak Thanks to GAGEtrak s large variety of detail
103. 0 Table Name Skip Dates Description Skip date information Associated From Edit Skip Dates Settings Calendar tab Field List Data Type Length Skip Date Date Time key 8 Table Name StabilityResults Description Lists Stability Study information Associated From Stability Study SubForm Field List Data Type Length ResultlD Long Integer key 4 GRR Results ID Long Integer 4 GRR Results Date Date Time 8 SubGroupNo Double 8 ChartNo Long Integer 4 S1 Double 8 S2 Double 8 S3 Double 8 S4 Double 8 s5 Double 8 S Double 8 S7 Double 8 s8 Double 8 s9 Double 8 s10 Double 8 LinBias Double 8 LinSlope Double 8 LinFit Double 8 MR Double 8 Notes Memo 0 Appraiser Text 50 MSA Ver Double 8 Table Name Staff Description Employee information Associated From Staff Master Auto Email List Calibration Cost by Staff Calibration Hours by Staff Graph Field List Data Type Length Employee ID Text key 50 Social Security Text 50 EmpName Text 50 ysnActive Long Integer 4 Job Title Text 50 CraftCode Text 50 Date Hired Date Time 8 Date In Job Date Time Department Text 50 Supervisor Text 50 Phone Ext Text 50 GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 293 Field List Data Type Length Pager_No Text 50 EmailName Text 50 Address Text 50 Address 2 Text 50 City Text 50 State Text 50 ZIP_Code Text 50 Home_Phone Text 50 WorkPhone Text 50 DepartmentName Text 50 Date Of Birth Date Time 8 Educatio
104. 0 10 1 Inch Block Table Definitions The next few pages contain a list of tables that are most commonly used in GAGEtrak 6 Table Name Analytic RefValues Description A list of values used for analytical studies Associated From Gage RR Studies Field List Data Type Length ID Long Integer key 4 GRR_Results_ID Long Integer 4 Accepts Long Integer 4 L SRefVal1 Double 8 LSRefVal2 Double 8 LSRefVal3 Double 8 USRefVal1 Double 8 USRefVal2 Double 8 USRefVal3 Double 8 265 266 Appendix B Table Definitions Table Name Authorized Persons Description A list of all personnel authorized to accept return gages Associated Form AuthorizedGages Auth Persons Field List Data Type Length Auth ID Long Integer key 4 AuthName Text key 100 AuthNote Memo 0 Gage ID Text key 50 Table Name Auto Email Header Description A list of events that trigger automatic sending of e mail Associated Form Auto Emailer Field List Data Type Length Email ID Long Integer key 4 Email Event Text 100 Send List Long Integer 4 Send IssuedTo Long Integer 4 Email text Memo 0 After Body Long Integer 4 Send AuthUser Long Integer 4 Table Name Auto Email List Description List email of a particular employee Associated Form Auto Email List Entry Field List Data Type Length Email ID Long Integer key 4 Employee ID Text key 50 Table Name Bookmarks Associated Form frmBookmarks Field List Data Type Length UserlD Text key
105. 0017 ND 3 Dial Bore Floor Insp Bench E Description Last R amp R Result A Calibration Formula Entry GAGEtrak has included a formula calculator with two 2 predefined formulas for your use Additional formulas can be added and tested using the calculator but Formula Entry only works with Calibration Entry GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 111 d Formula Name Fahrenheit l Built in Functions 5QR ev tos ass Am sm z cos tan Operator xl cola Formula 8 Celsius 32 Close Test Record I 4 1 gt gt i gt gt of 2 The predefined formulas are Formula Name Formula Fahrenheit 1 8 Celsius 32 Celsius Fahrenheit 32 1 8 The Formula Entry form will allow the user to add and edit formulas Each formula consists of simple mathematical expressions using the given variables enclosed in square brackets arithmetic operators etc This functionality will parse the entered formula to produce the result The user will be prompted to enter a numeric value for each variable when the Test formula button is clicked the formula computation is done when the Test button is clicked Chapter 12 MSA Entry Overview With MSA you can assess your measurement systems using the statistical test procedures of repeatability reproducibility bias stability linearity collectively referred to as MSA studies This feature saves ti
106. 1 equals one tenth of a percent Tolerance Enter the owertolerance for this gage as published by the manufacturer use a positive value GAGEtrak later uses this information to calculate the minimum value for calibration standards To enter this value as a percentage of the nominal enter the value followed by the percentage sign for example enter 1 Tip Check the placement of decimal points for example 1 equals one percent 1 equals one tenth of a percent Uncertainty This field holds the uncertainty value use it only if this record is for a reference standard You can obtain this value from the manufacturer It s expressed in units such as percentage 0 5 proportion 0 005 or measurement units 0 0001 inch GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 57 Field Button Name Description Operating Range Enter the gage s allowable operating range as to the minimum and maximum size it could measure Print Issue Label Select Print Issue Label options include Always Print Never Print Ask To Print or When Issuing Gage Program Default Option selection made directly in Gage Entry Specification will override the Program Default in Settings Cal Option which can be set to Always Print Never Print or Ask To Print Gage Entry History B3 Gage Entry gt Information Specifications History Standards Parts Procedures Calibration Schedule R amp R Schedule User Defined Auth Persons
107. 150 Crosstabs Tab aise ates bc sak 151 PETRUS TSS Mel 2 ed pii ic too a tbc ech Set nal th ea du cb etie ences d one Ft Anse re OE seh e TARDE ELS ME DUCI de 152 Miss Rate Analysis Tab a iso iie teta riva DS S RE e Festi esit aveo DER e RU e yd sash bt E Id trud ies o I Ei deret EV o pi dee UE UP I TUI 152 Signal Detection Fab us ehe i bed toeo ect bett occ v T a Cn bali aa E MM M Do dU DU ioduE 153 Attribute Analvtie sr E E va as canus ata ada da qase a E M M ME EAS 154 Informauob T3 inui A a ped EI Opt da hl Ts EE C S ober ob od obi oen OE Fea GOLD E MILI OA 155 Lower Specilication TAD RET RP 155 Upper Specilic alor Lab 565 onec incedit ebe ae tio s eben ee Dv eo A Reo ld ead ucibus idiot Cl Lb Ladies pde enda diete eb NEUE 156 Other Techiigues RelfeFeriC6S ursa esi Resto a neu Hes ci ces EQ fae Rua o oa e RC ERRAT AT 158 BIETER RET EL Report Commands and FUNCTIONS 4e e nn E ES tp a OO b v v ra i a E TE 159 VIeWwMO E Te BER EET EET 159 oT E s PEE EE EE vom 160 SENO eM e Q PNE 160 PARCS CN Sero ETOILE U lab cia tase SA 161 Report DESC DUO n EE EE D 161 Appendix A Calibration Label Kit 4 4 4 cen ree eene eere eee rn erae en eene rn ere ene en een ene ene
108. 23105 3 Appr s 1 91155 1 80538 1 76858 1 74989 1 73857 1 73099 1 72555 EV Not calculated AV Not calculated l d xR GRR GRR 2100 x GRR TV or GRR 2100 x GRR TOL 6 where TV is 60 Process Variation 6 AIAG Average and Range Method Long Form Note K K and K are all equal td d Equipment Variation EV Repeatability Tias 2 3 EV RxK EV 100 x EV TV or if comparing to tolerance EV 100x EV Tol 6 Appraiser Variation AV Reproducibility Agrs 2 3 AV Js xK EV nx r where n of parts r f of trials Note If a negative value results under the square root the AV is reported as 0 AV 100 x AV TV or if comparing to tolerance AV 100x AV Tol 6 126 Chapter 12 MSA Entry Repeatability amp Reproducibility R amp R R amp R EV AV GRR 100 x GRR TV or If comparing to tolerance GRR 2100 x GRR Tol 6 Part Variation a PV R xK R Max X Min X X values are the averages of each measured part Note If you know the 6 Sigma Process Variation from SPC or Capability studies enter it into the Proc Var field If entered into the Gage R amp R Study form the software will calculate TV as TV 6Sigma Proc Var 6 and calculate PV as PV TV R amp R Total Variation TV TV 4R amp R PV ANOVA Formulas Estimate of Variance Components Variance Estimate Gage
109. 5 ToCount Long Integer 4 DTUVersion Text 50 DTUDate Date Time 8 Table Name tblFilters Description Internal use Associated From None Field List Data Type Length fL ID Long Integer key 4 fl Code Text 255 fl Title Text 255 Table Name tbiMenuGroup Description Group name listing for reports Associated From N A Field List Data Type Length GroupID Long Integer key 4 GroupName Text 255 Table Name tblReports Description Internal use Associated From None Field List Data Type Length ReportName Text key 100 Structure Memo BaseSQL Memo TimeCreated Date Time LabelMode Long Integer 4 PrinterDevice Text 255 PresetConnection Text 100 HardCoded Long Integer 4 296 Appendix B Table Definitions Field List Data Type Length TimeBase Long Integer 4 TimeField Text 50 GroupID Long Integer OriginalStructure Memo 0 RptVersion Long Integer 4 UpdateRpt Long Integer 4 Author Text 50 Company Text 50 Keywords Text 50 Creation Date Date Time 8 ReportName Text key 100 Table Name Training Description Staff Training information Associated From Training History Field List Data Type Length ItemNumber Long Integer key 4 Employee ID Text 50 StartDate Date Time 8 EndDate Date Time Description Text 50 FS Hours Double 8 CEUs Double 8 School Text 250 Cost Double 8 Status Text 50 Certification Text 50 CertExpDate Date Time Comments Memo User1 Text 50 User2 Text 50 Table Name UncertaintySetup Descriptio
110. 50 InCal_Freq Double 8 InCal_Freq_UOM Text 50 NextDue Date Time 8 Temperature Text 50 Humidity Text 50 Pressure Text 50 Other Text 50 CalibType Text 50 UserDef1 Text 50 UserDef2 Text 50 UserDef3 Text 50 UserDef4 Text 50 UserDef5 Text 50 UserDef6 Text 50 UserDef7 Text 50 UserDef8 Text 50 UserDef9 Text 50 UserDef10 Text 50 UserDef11 Text 50 UserDef12 Text 50 UserDef13 Text 50 UserDef14 Text 50 UserDef15 Text 50 UserDef16 Text 50 UserDef17 Text 50 UserDef18 Text 50 UserDef19 Text 50 UserDef20 Text 50 SentToPDA Long Integer 4 CalDiscrepancy Long Integer 4 Field List FloatFixed Description Gage_SN Est Calibration Cost Calibration Hours Effective DF Coverage FactorK Bill To PassHistlD FailHistlD PreCalFreq CurrUnits Table Name Calibration Header Sig Description Lists and links signature information for every calibration entry GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 269 Data Type Long Integer Text Text Double Double Double Double Text Long Integer Long Integer Double Length 50 50 co oo A A Associated From frmSubApprovedBy Sig Calibration Entry Signature tab frmSubCalibratedBy Sig Calibration Entry Signature tab Field List Signature ID Gage ID Calibration Date Calibration Time UserlD Signature Name Signature Type Signature Date Signature Time Signature On Table Name Calibration Measurement Description Contains information o
111. 9 Chapter 1 Starung DAGEUAK iro eet E EO EE CR Pr RENE PS SESS aa a di stalling GAG aii et M I 31 RUNMING GADEIUSK unc e eus e E EE Hit tar du e ue TS UT doe ete Mn DM ener acetic 31 LOG OM NER rc 32 uuu T 33 Organization of GAGEtrak S Menus itio to abad Farid terea iae aa aa aia ta a aiea inn fedes ats Posee iia 33 Chapter 2 Program Conventions 4 eren rere eere eroe ern en orn en eene re ene sn ene enero ene se sse seene see sesne sesso sees 3D GAGEEFFaKHeIDao ee ioo eua MEM LEM NM EMEN E 35 aieo no Fitter A LIRIR SEIS nadran eana aaan eea aa aoa aaa 35 Q ick Filter Calmiiabld izinen tne tne Sete ETN E ES E I Me uM ce ER 36 Advanced Filt r COMMANA aea a a E aa a eaa aE aa a a a a a a a a Eae a aa a EE a aa aa ae ee 36 Accessihg AUURSCOLUS ht N N N 36 Accessing CertainjRECOnds 2 emo eit d A N N 36 Supported Wildcard Characters in Search Fields sesesesesesesesesessssssssssssseosssosososososososesosescsescsesescsescscoeseoeoeoeosososososososososesesesesesesesesesesesesesesese 37 oat TOODA cee a hM S E M E SM UNE EUM M T 37 Pop Up Calendar tor Date Flelds reno irr enit ri rr N Ta N aurea IINE siu 38 Formi A AS HR SIEUT m em 39 Elementsola Record EOEED a ocior etoile tuo dida c
112. A order Quick Filter Use this command when you need to quickly find records based on a simple search In addition to sorting you can enter a criteria expression to find only those records that match your specific conditions Advanced Filter Use this command when you need to find a particular record or group of records This command lets you search on any field or combination of fields in a form Edit Filter Sort This feature allows a user to setup specific filter sort queries Show All Records Choose this command to disable any previous filters and see all records Bookmarks Menu Command Description Add to Bookmarks Allows a user to create a quick go to for the currently viewed gage by placing the gage ID with in the Bookmarks tree and or within a particular folder Manage Bookmarks This feature is similar to a card rolodex in which folders can be created to hold various gage information Items within the Bookmarks tree can be dragged and dropped within the tree structure and or Renamed or Deleted Help Menu Command Description Contents To see the Help file s table of contents choose Help Contents Tip of the Day View a useful procedure or performance tip About Select this command if you want to see information about the program Chapter 3 Entering Gage Records Gage Entry To begin entering your gage records select Gage Entry from the Main Records menu The window below will appear 83 Gage Entry Inl x P In
113. Attachments Events Gage ID C 002 Description CALIPER DIAL 12 INCH x Date By Pass Results Type oms Defeat User n OO oms peanv o OOO A ies Dette o OOOO O OSOA iors Deets o oO OO 0272003 Defeat User 10 2 2003 Default User Yes OK Calibration ES Record 4 4 1 b PEI of 19 Record I 4 T 1b pl rl of 46 The History tab displays all calibration history for the selected gage ID These records are sorted by date in descending order this means that the most recent calibrations are at the top of the list GAGEtrak pulls this information from the data you record in Calibration Entry Field Button Name Description Gage ID The ID code for the current record appears in this field Date This field shows the date for each calibration record By In this field you ll see the name of the user who performed the calibration Pass This field tells you whether each calibration was successful Results Any additional results recorded about the calibration will appear in this field Type A description of the type of calibration performed will appear in this field Drilldown Button Select this button to view the Calibration Entry for this gage Gage Entry Standards Gage Entry gt Information Specifications History Standards Parts Procedures Calibration Schedule R amp R Schedule User Defined Auth Persons Attachments Events Gage ID r0 Description CALIPER DIAL12INCH J Sta
114. Co Part No vs Gage ID COMPARATOR bd Part No 10 221 1 Gage Desc fi 4 Kodak Optical Comparator Part Desc Bracket Rt Hand Study Type analytic Characteristic Number Format 4 000000 X Percentage Format 4 00 Comments Prefill Calc Charts Print Record I4 4 1 gt gt i gt gt of 1 The Information tab contains these fields and buttons Field Button Name Description Study Date This field defaults to the current date but you can change it Gage ID Select the ID code for the gage you re using in the study Gage Desc Once you select a gage ID the gage s description will appear in this field Study Type Analytic is the only type in this module Approved Select if study is approved Number Format Select the format you want for calculations Comments Enter any comments such as the gage I D of a variable gage to be used for cross checking Co Part No Enter your internal company part or job number if relevant Part No Select a related part number such as the customer or supplier part number if relevant Part Desc This field displays the description or name of the part if relevant Characteristic In this field you ll see the characteristic that you are evaluating Percentage Format Select the format you want for calculations Lower Specification Tab Gage RR Attribute Analytic Method P Information Lower Specification Upper Specification Study Date 11 01 2002 Co P
115. DN M qmm M C Rt Tec aay ect cq R IM IUIUS 89 Return Gago t I 91 Calibratgm SatHls c S s v V MA M I MD A MA E UU M E DE Cd EA 91 Chapter 10 Gage Frequency Adjusting Interval 4 4 e eer ee rene eene ee enean ern ea ena enesaess JQ Method A3 FOLTRUlaS need ot ast of cases te decus aa iee ue Lu stent d up ire tror Bed ausus tesa si pur ese a DEED Sec f xcu d estes reste tees 95 Extrapolatidi FO gu DIU E MR EE T mp 95 Chapter 11 Entering Calibration Records 4 4 4 eere eere enero ree en ene en ee eneeeeseseeseses 97 Calibratlon Enuy sCallbESUDE eds disce DO CU COR SNR UHR MERC EOND eH SS CH pede etin ava ee tub ct COE D ein Lise aei ono han ten eus adesivi o Qu bue tiu eL Sds 97 Calibration Eritry MeasurermelllS oce rra CER ER ROSEO E XEQUS NX IRE E SCANS IDEEN POTENTI UAM EUN Dt ua De Ah na PO RID NS V peR eR UNS 100 Calibration EntFy PEOCEOUE 6S st ORE Ix abso o E ho aA dte Desa dA DN D E EE 102 viii Table of Contents Calibrator Eny DEabels s or TS an IPSS EAN TERT Cg aI TR ERE ET PERT EPEAT OT eRe et Ae Or eee 103 Calibratiori Entry SiGe Une iu ia tra oar tad aca DR o cue Divo n Gd de om Dm f ee CH raa ott eis E Lud RD a CUR o RTL CESAR 104 Calibratlon Entry ALS cH me BES anro ie E PES EE EROR NER SEP QR TY eof E pde POR ETUR A A d ves def ee iN IE Rep NER EMI TR ed 106 C
116. Date Time 8 Form Description Memo 0 Table Name Calibration Standards Description Contains calibration standards information used in comparing calibration measurements Associated From Calibration Standard Entry Calibration Entry Measurements tab Edit Calibration Standards Find New Measurement PDA Records Gage Accuracy Gage Accuracy2 Gage Accuracy Print Gage Accuracy Print2 IDSTDForm Field List Data Type Length Gage ID Text key 50 Standard ID Text key 50 Minimum Double 8 Nominal Double Maximum Double Units Text 50 CS Type Text 50 GT Format Text 50 GM Type Text 50 Comments Memo 0 CM Calibration ID Text 50 Table Name CertStatHist Description Not Used Associated From Not Used Field List Data Type Length HistlD Long Integer key 4 CertStateMemo Memo 0 DateTimeStamp Date Time 8 PassState Boolean 1 Table Name CHArchive Description Contains archived calibration records Associated From CHArchiveViewfrm Field List Data Type Length Gage ID Text key 50 Calibration_Date Date Time key Calibration Time Date Time key 8 Calibration Type Text 50 Calibration By Text 50 Department Text 50 GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 271 Field List Data Type Length Results Text 50 Action_Required Text 50 Approved Long Integer Findings Memo 0 Calibration Cost Double 8 AcctNo Text 50 TotalUncert Double 8 ResultCode Double CalDateUpdated Long Integer CertNo T
117. E 135 Uncertamty Setup Subestab schaue pedi oed ei eed o erc ele oe b A a EL a uet bo de rr E Me Desin A eei tuere dudo Gut 136 Uncertainty Budget Sub tabas n DE t te c E d dote oer E Dee ENDO e fuor RUN Coe ed Fo AM Sco Pu EN 138 Background on Probability DISECIDUUOFIS 1 Eee eco eti eret attt ve eie oet s kcu ep ce anaes tear ERE SUL Edd ve Sa TRIER T 139 Background on Uncertainty Contributors n peti cdita e obe edi epp e tere Dea dioe ob aiuto HER dieu Coda aie a aa 139 Linearny FoErilllds sess st itera e ER ha rae tea OR E I HU a ote tee pta at tek EO E E I xoc Evers ue c baie ees 140 Bids Formulas 5 osse ALS D TM Ut uod Suc LUC cDNA A Ch D A e aL 141 Uncertainty FORTIS atraer eren uti ecu iva br c YI D RO EYE Io AVI Ieri sun E buda d otis E ME dd 142 Stability Tarid Blas ener hcc ooa ace cobro cele Lc DM IDA M M e MINIM LL IM LED EE 143 IBfoETmialobi Tabasco ote heel t ER MED ec Uter bn et bosser s nct c eh N cedem Mev acseastentacie 143 Data Tapia edited eda Coeur A beo o ic Md Code Leti ona ose bi Nea ie fusta A Fo ac iD E d lose oo odes oA cde fu ad 144 Control Chart mee ngo i ETT M M M 147 GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual ix Attribute RISK Analysis c eiut Dea ux e ve ies and en ON exe LU M E ME M MD MEME 149 In pH Obs cccea eats cae tid Rib oe E EE eid ei d T dez HOA Ub Ca RED LORI DE COE Mo EDEN E avv dE Du Cot dun iude
118. E 55 Storage EOCSUOFT une noc FD ER EE RIPE dps 55 DUD DIE COC ERR Ir 55 89 System Maintenance eese 307 T Tab SClECl Ol a schon A MEE Ee 40 Table View eere enne 38 41 43 45 48 50 10 190 264 305 308 FOr GAGE R amp R ENY eod se abesse cu bero i 115 MU AG hezece cae tsainte reas AE 41 Toolbar Forrm eese eren 37 48 54 Open Autorrnatically n Pie E reiecit 195 Toolbar Report eese 161 Total Variation TW soos terea cetera CH ene tete 118 TAMNO eee PER 311 Stai RECO 1S eoe hu Deest erit tul 216 Type Re SIMI Pel CO ised cedet en ocn aude teut en Docs a Raatet e aoo PLE Dru E 57 Calibration TV oscon eben DM aieo 101 E Io c NUNC S 6 55 172 Gage RAR Pro E 120 145 Service Reguesb ci esteri tie enema etre s 82 212 Sonda RR E TT 58 59 103 UND ODI vcio taste or URS Cet PR OST ees ca dies 89 U DIETE SRA D geeremerenserereneren nee cermerererenere rn EU ret 57 101 WIP CO PER RERO ETHER 49 Unfreeze Columins eereeeee e eren erre nnnnet 44 Unit of Measure GIJE ag d ER PA 55 SAGO Loto cincti dS ED AO EN E 172 sei Dettstauses ir E ERE EA IAM 66 Users Setting UP Ses ccce m Sem RR EGe 206 V View POPE OW NT EET 39 41 48 Table View eere 41 43 44 48 49 50 VIGWMBRU S S echo a at ae ee a 51 W Whiskers Chart eese eere 124 Wildcard Characters ser trennt cos 37
119. E E A bacae valeurs bodie tle andes EE DEN ance 201 Settings Form Tabs Main Menusa unes ote oae e ele na aed acre tate dhe ace fies A ice iis pube he ieu 201 Set ngs Menu Bab sue rk otra eds oot eth ortas Ced dui oA DA AE ETUR v Ta Vv CER Id ose UT aco FLA I A ovd unde aces 202 Setl irigs Message Saino coded orici eene iof oL Fo ThE moe DO eka iacu obi E Mud tec 203 Set rigs Mehl COLO S ubi inb Efe tito cu a a eL NA ETE GRE dins 203 Setup Re port ContFoL ID ENY a ees ERA REESE RENE TANTA NEN EE ERN E Ve Ee E eR Vg c Ep Ene E iM ENT UNE E E NNUS 204 DO UID SS CUPILY aai UE PERMET 204 SCU OrOHB omen ce ra CN Aem an dean and oned 204 Secun SOUS csetera eau m Ea I M C 205 Security Oroup Perrmissiol5 c ionic qaia dene iR ENEE ecd D OU preci e e LR Rv TRA eot UD oen aun a I MEHR RU 206 Secun Object PENIS SEC o E 207 Security SAUL S actos S enun EE MEN La E 207 Setup Auto Brhal Headers uui eb ntt o mE e aav dM DM M UE 207 Setup Multiple Choice ENUY esit ERU NND EE vA C b peas Dassin NER UE bn sU un UNE HE ub cie DU ue DURS U T AS RU DIUX NES GE D EI De rU uS 209 Setup Setup CA SeT vice ReguesL oca aco ec er iseue a ieiuno NRN a dee Uu M tUe in dua 209 Setup Stats ID ENMU V cet t 210 Setup Gage Mm inpr 210 Chapter 5 Entering Personnel seocococososososososeseseoeocococococococosocosococososeseseococococococococososocososeseseseseseoeoeoeosoesee 211 Ha EV ee eee Eo PT A A AR 211 StA PUY n AIC RRRISM TERT
120. Floppy A E IBM_PRELOAD C E Compact Disc D F 5g3 production on Cyber main G i 2 development on Cyber_main P My Network Places Cancel Note When you restore your database restore it to a different location than your current database location The Restore utility contains a safeguard that prevents you from overwriting your current database even if you try to do so This safeguard lets you alternately open your restored and current databases to compare them in case you suspect that you ve lost data because of a corrupted database Use a folder named Backup as the location for your restored database as shown here Browse for Folder 2I x Select the folder where the restored files will be placed B eg3 IBM PRELOAD C Pod C Books CFGSAFE C DISCOVER i Ce Documents and Settings DRIVERS Fws CJ Grwe pp RI PR RT 89 C HPW4 C 1386 IBMTOOLS Fa irans fel Click OK to begin the Restore operation When it s finished you ll see this message Successful Operation Ea Operation completed successfully Tip If you ve replaced your hard drive or are installing the software to another computer re install GAGEtrak first then restore your backup database file GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 219 Automatic Backup Choose Automatic Backup to create a backup of the current database automatically To start th
121. Format Text 50 SRLastNumber Text 50 LabelAction Long Integer 4 AuditPurge Long Integer 4 SecurityOn Long Integer 4 SecurityWarning Long Integer 4 LoginMethod Long Integer 4 MonthsAhead Long Integer 4 MonthsBehind Long Integer 4 RefreshRate Long Integer 4 GreenNumber Long Integer 4 BlueNumber Long Integer 4 YellowNumber Long Integer 4 RedNumber Long Integer 4 Flags Long Integer 4 ProgramVersion Double 8 Electronic_Signature_Login Long Integer 4 ForceChangePassword Long Integer 4 ForceChangePasswordDays Long Integer 4 NoAllowLogin Long Integer 4 NoAllowLoginEmails Memo 0 PasswordMinimum Long Integer 4 LoginlnactivityPeriod Long Integer 4 LastDateSetting Date Time 8 Overwrite Warning Long Integer 4 Restrictlssue Long Integer 4 SecurityRestrict Long Integer 4 LastDueEmail Date Time 8 GIDLastNumber Text 50 GIDNumberFormat Text 50 Scanned_Image_Path Text 255 ReliabilityTarget Double 8 OOT_Rate_Target Double 8 DesiredDispPrecision Long Integer 4 MinAllowInterval Double 8 MaxAllowinterval Double 8 ConfidenceLevel Double 8 SCNumberFormat Text 50 SCLastNumber Text 50 FirstDayOfWeek Long Integer 4 PrintlssueLabel Long Integer 4 PagerPause Long Integer 4 DoNotArchiveUnsignedCalib Boolean 1 DoNotArchiveUnapprovedCali Boolean 1 b ProcControl Long Integer 4 292 Appendix B Table Definitions Field List Data Type Length Failure_Notice_Statement Memo 0 EnableAutoGageNumber Boolean 1 Significance_Threshold Single 4 A3 NumberFormat Text 5
122. Freq and R amp R Freg Units R amp R Skip Direction Last R amp R Date Last R amp R Result Next R amp R Due Date Description Enter the frequency of R amp R study using the unlabeled list box field on the right for the frequency units for example 45 DAYS When the software calculates the next R amp R date it uses this value Your choices for the Units field are explained below Days schedule is based on elapsed calendar days Weeks each week equals seven days schedule is based on elapsed calendar weeks Months schedule is based on elapsed calendar months Years each year equals 365 days schedule is based on elapsed calendar years If the R amp R date falls on a skip date this determines whether to move the calibration date forward or backward Enter the last R amp R date for the gage GAGEtrak automatically updates this field whenever you add a new R amp R record for the gage Percentage value of last R amp R result The next R amp R date is automatically updated when you add a new R amp R record for the gage Next R amp R Date Last R amp R Date Freq You can also manually enter a date into this field If today s date is past the Next R amp R Due Date you ll see the message Past Due on the right of this date Tip Click Next R amp Abutton to calculate this field immediately only if you entered an R amp R frequency and last R amp R date This button is useful if you want the program to calc
123. Grow True CanShrink False ColumnLayout True GrpKeepToget 0 None height 360 KeepTogether False NewColumn 0 None NewPage 0 None pu 0 None To add a field to your group just drag and drop the field from the Fields frame Just make sure that you include the field defining the group The information on the fields that you put here will be only of the first record for the particular group 238 Chapter 8 Customizing Reports Creating the Details As mentioned above you can drag and drop as many fields from the Fields frame as you can fit on the designer canvas Details section The Details section should be based on the paper prototype you have developed prior to using the graphics tool You can modify the row height of the section by dragging the button to the left of the row header below the Details section up or down You can also directly change the row height by entering a value in the Height property in the Properties Details frame The unit used in the program is the twip There are 20 twips per printer s point or 1440 per inch ETE B bpp r E its Im SES C HHHEEEHI Dee Dar 7 E S GETH By default all movement sizing and graphical CanGrow mus MM e oues gt ilu E E drawing statements use a unit of one twip A twip is 1 20 of a printer s point 1 440 twips equal one p CE E E inch and 567 twips equal one centimeter These GrpKeepToget 1 First Detail aupEante g g height aah
124. IALT24INCH z Status 1 Active Storage Location BN O Ref Standad NISTNof J Curent Location BobSmith DEPTOTA Gage S N 5N13803467 Service Date nans Asset No Retirement Date Model No Supplier Code General M Type DIAL Cost 236 00 Unit of Meas INCH Purchase Date fi 1 13 1987 Notes FOR PRODUCTION USE ONLY User Defined X Manufacturer STARRETT m Owner COMPANY Issue Retun Clone Gage Graph Calibration Attach Standards Attach Procedures Record 14 4 1 gt gt i rx of 47 Elements of a Record Form All record forms have the following elements Form Title Bar Located at the top of each form the title bar shows the form s name Gage Entry in the above example Click the title bar to drag the form to a new location Menu Bar Located above the title bar the menu bar usually has menus for File Edit View Format Records Bookmarks and Help Click on a menu title and a list of commands will appear Some items may not be available they appear gray If commands are unavailable you can t use them in Form view Control Menu Icon Click on this icon located to the left of the name on the title bar to change the window s size and location Double click on it to close the window Control Menu Icon from Gage Entry Screen Gage Entry Gage ID Description el C002 CALIPER DIAL EE Record Selector Bar P Information Specificatio a gt Gag
125. ID Gage Events Gage ID ORDER BY Calibration Header Gage ID Gage Events Event ID ASC El Cancel lt lt Back Finish Direct SQL Query Advanced users can directly enter the SQL statement using this third type of query preparation It is assumed that you know the full syntax for creating SQL statements We have however included the basics for creating SQL statements or statement structure to help you get started Select Query Type What type of Report Query would you like to build C Simple Query Display fields from a single table in the database recommended for Single Table Reports C Advanced Query Display multiple fields from multiple tables in the database using user defined table relationships used for Reports with multiple source tables and summary queries Direct SQL Query Allows you to manually enter the Report s SQL Report Source directly for Advanced Users Cancel i GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 235 Clicking on the Next button will give you a window with a blank input field as shown below aoi Set Report SQL Source Directly You can modify edit the existing query through the text box below Hu Cancel lt lt Back Finish The Report Editor uses the Microsoft Jet database engine a database management system that stores and retrieves data in user and system databases The Microsoft Jet database engine can be thought of as a data m
126. IF GRR of TV is unsatisfactory it provides no clues as to why not PV and TV will be calculated only if you provide an external estimate of 6 sigma process variation This method is for one trial only and is usually done with 5 parts and two appraisers Information Tab P Information Appraiser A Appraiser Appraiser C Study Date 34 2003 Co Part No usa Gage ID 022EDigtal Caliper 0 6 M Pat No 10 221 2 Gage Desc 4ssessment Data Pat Desc Bracket Lt Hand Appraiser g Trials f2 Characteristic Study Type anova X Speclicabon Limits Min 0 Max 0687 Approved 6 Sigma Proc Var Study Variation 0208 Validation data from AIAG MSA2 page S7 Number Foemat F 0000 X Percentage Format F 0 Std Dev Cortibution X oFTV of Tol Repeat EV 88858 osos AEEW 3ENS bs mes Reooducb Av Taos ooms asses zTtT UCLA 011326 4252 Apps x Part INT 7700873 fossan 2323 GAR coes 0106592 sare 5992 PatioPat PY MSas less Sx Tames Total Variation TY 782030 number of distinct categories X080 Record I4 Ili 1 gt ors of 3 118 Chapter 12 MSA Entry When you are ready to start entering your R amp R measurements click the tab for Appraiser A and enter the appraisers name in the Appraiser A area Next click your cursor in the first column for Part 1 After you enter the measurement click the TAB or ENTER key and your cursor will be blinking in the area for th
127. Kit see page 165 for installation and setup instructions Field Button Name Description View Label Button Generates the label based on the label design selected Print Label Button Sends the selected design for the label directly to the printer 104 Chapter 11 Entering Calibration Records Field Button Name Edit Label Button Description When selected the Custom Report Editor module is opened allowing you to update the label design selected Note Updating the label from this location will update the original label Tape Button View an online label catalog Calibration Entry Signature If your system administrator has enabled security calibrations can be electronically signed or unsigned Signatures are drawn from the User ID listing in Setup Security Users For more information see Security Users in the GAGEtrak System Administrator s Guide on page 205 Click the Sign button to sign your calibration GAGEtrak will save the signature and stamp it with the current date and time Note The User ID is case insensitive where as the password is case sensitive Bl Calibration Entry d Calibration Measurements Procedures Labels Signature Attachments User Defined Calibration Scans Gage ID c 002 E Calibrated By Signature Signature Name Signature Date Signature Time Signature Mode Record I 4 1 PLP Approved By Signature Record I 4 1 gt rjr of 1 Record I
128. Maximum m Ref Type Gage ID of Standard Format fi Block 0 Inch M fv x finch 0 001 o 0 001 GAGE BLOCK S T MSGB1 T 4 000 T 2 Block 1 Inch T v x finch 0 23 1 023 1 001 GAGE BLOCK S M MSGBT T 8 000 T 3 Block 2 Inch M lv bd finch 1 399 2 2 001 GAGE BLOCK S M MSGBT T 8 000 T PreFill Update Record I4 4 1b gt i gt gt of 1 Field Button Name Description Standard Group Enter the name of the standard group you wish to define Resolution Enter the Resolution of the gage This is the smallest or least count unit of motion that the gage is capable of measuring and displaying Operating Range Enter the operation range for this gage Group Description Enter a description for the group Tolerance Enter the Plus Tolerance for this standard group Tolerance Enter the Minus Tolerance for this standard group Prefill Button If most of your measurements begin with the same numbers such as 1 1651 1 1650 and 1 1658 you can save time by prefilling the measurements with those digits In this case click the Prefill button and then enter Number of Standards Start prefill Value of 1 165 and Increment Value Now you need to enter only the last digit of each measurement Update Button Any gage using this standard group will be updated to the newly defined standard Note Using the Update button will wipe out current standards but will not effect standard history
129. Method Stability View MSA v2 Studies o e a F a zm S e Data Tools User D NoUser Name C A GTWE GTSamp60 mdb Click the menu button that corresponds to the study you want We ll discuss each type of study next Tip You can also run MSA by clicking the MSA button in the Calibration Entry screen Running MSA this way restricts you to entering gage R amp R studies for only the gage shown in the Calibration Entry screen GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 117 GRR Module GRR studies look at the ability of a calibrated gage to measure an actual part characteristic using real operators and production conditions GRR studies are specific to a part characteristic and can apply to multiple gages Study Types Analysis of Variance ANOVA This method gives the most information If GRR of TV is unsatisfactory you will be able to view EV AV INT and PV for clues as to what should be done This method is usually done with 2 or 3 Trials and 2 or 3 Appraisers and 10 parts Average and Range Method Long AI AGJ This method is the most familiar it became popular pre computer for it s ease of calculation If GRR of TV is unsatisfactory you will be able to view EV AV and PV but not INT for clues as to what should be done This method also requires 2 or 3 Trials and 2 or 3 Appraisers and is usually done with 10 parts Range Method Short AIAGJ This method is quick and easy
130. NT Normalized Individuals Chart by Part Appraiser and by Appraiser Part In this chart the plotted data consists of the individual readings minus the overall average of the readings The normalized data is plotted grouped by appraiser or part number This chart can help you determine reproducibility consistency among appraisers occurrences of abnormal readings and the interaction between the parts and appraisers Example Normalized Individuals Chart 0 2558 i E P T T T o c d Hc T miu dj d md d d c CQ di G d n dg n d T C4 CO sy Ww Pe oo A CJ 0 sp Woo P dO of CJ 00 sp now De dO om 10A 10B 10 Whiskers Chart The Whiskers chart plots and connects the high and low data values and the average by part by appraiser This chart helps you see consistency among appraisers occurrences of abnormal readings and the interaction between the parts and the appraisers Example Whiskers Chart 1 0612 0 3612 0 6612 0 7612 X Y Plot of Averages by Size This chart plots the averages of each appraiser s various readings for each part using the overall part average If the appraisers disagree on certain parts Appraiser x Part interaction this can help to determine whether that depends on part size GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 123 Example X Y Plot Averages by Size Measured Average Comparison X Y Plots In a Comparison X Y Plot the averages of each appraiser s readings on each part
131. Open Database window where you can choose the file path of your Source Database GTDATA55 MDB GTDATA50 MDB GTDATAAO MDB or DATA9731 MDB Note If you do not recall where the Source Database is located you can find out by opening your old version of GAGEtrak Select the Main Menu and the location of your database will be displayed on the lower right hand side of the form The default Location for the database is C GTW5 GTData55 mdb or earlier However depending on the options you selected during the setup of GAGEtrak this may not be where your database is located 3 4 Select the Next button The Destination Database from where data is being transferred to selection functions the same as the Source Destination First verify that the Destination Database drop down box has Version 6 0 Data as a selection After you have selected the Destination Database you will need to specify Destination Connection Information the path of where the Destination Database can be located Click the button that is labeled Browse You will be presented with an Open Database window where you can choose the file path for you Destination Database GAGEtrak 6 database GTDATA60 MDB Note The default Location for your Destination Database is C GTW6 GTData60 mdb However depending on the options you selected during the setup of GAGEtrak 6 this may not be where your database is located ae Click the Transfer Data button GAGEtrak Calibration Manag
132. S SQL users must enter the server name in this field For example if the server name is Company NT enter that name in this field Not supported only Run Test Connection Cancel When you ve finished entering all of the necessary information click this button to run the scripts Click this button to make sure that you re connected to the correct path before you run the scripts To exit this screen without running the scripts click Cance to return to the main DTU screen When you re finished running the scripts you can begin transferring data and or updating or adding reports 258 Appendix A Data Transfer Utility Data Transfer Instructions Version 5 5 5 4 and 3 Access Users to Client Server Version 6 0 Converting your database file GTDATAs5 MDB GTDATAS50 MDB GTDATA40 MDB and DATA9731 MDB Data Transfer Utility Wizard Data Transfer Utility Page 2 of 3 Source Database Version 3 Archive 05 01 1338 SS ee Version 3 Data 05 01 1998 09 01 1999 11 01 2000 11 15 2001 04 28 2003 Version 6 0 New 04 28 2003 Cancel lt Back Next Under Source Database from where data is being transferred select a database based on application version being transferred Version 5 5 Data Version 5 0 Data Version 4 0 Data Version 3 Data Click the Browse button on the right of the Source Connection Information field to navigate to your database file You will be presented with an
133. Se GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software Version 6 User Guide Cyber Metrics CyberMetrics Corporation 1523 W Whispering Wind Drive Suite 100 Phoenix Arizona 85085 USA Toll free 1 800 777 7020 USA Phone 480 922 7300 Fax 480 922 7400 www CyberMetrics com Entire Contents Copyright 1988 2011 CyberMetrics Corporation All Rights Reserved Worldwide U S GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS This software and documentation are provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subdivision b 3 ii of The Rights in Technical Data and Computer software clause at 252 22 013 Contractor manufacturer is CyberMetrics Corporation QUESTIONS Should you have any questions concerning this agreement or if you wish to contact CyberMetrics Corporation for any reason please write or call CyberMetrics Corporation 1523 W Whispering Wind Drive Suite 100 Phoenix AZ 85085 Tel 480 922 300 USA Toll Free 1 800 77 020 Fax 480 922 400 TECHNICAL SUPPORT If you need technical support please call or write our product support and development office CyberMetrics Corporation 1523 W Whispering Wind Drive Suite 100 Phoenix AZ 85085 Tel 480 922 300 USA Toll Free 1 800 77 020 Fax 480 922 400 Technical support is available by telephone during normal business hours Mountain Central time Email and Internet Support
134. Select Start of Week The day of week selected will dictate how the calendar is presented to the user for example select Monday as the start of the week and then double click in a date field You ll notice the day of the week begins with Monday and ends with Sunday in the Choose a Date popup calendar Settings Security The Security tab contains controls for the security features of GAGEtrak Security parameters are set in the Security section of the Setup menu For more information see Setup Security on page 204 196 Chapter 4 Setting Up GAGEtrak The 21 CFR Part 11 Compliant version of GAGEtrak permanently enables its security advanced audit trail and electronic signature features Therefore if you have installed the 21 CFR Part 11 Compliant version of GAGEtrak the Enable Security Audit Trail and Electronic Signature fields show at all times that these options are active These fields are grayed out and cannot be changed ES Settings fel Ed User Info General Cal Options Calendar Security Automatic Numbering Interface Security Audit Trail v Enable Security Advanced Audit Log Enable Audit Trail IV Enable Security Messages Remove Audit Trail records after Application Logon Logon Method this many days Le ave blank to not remove records Require Password Changes 14 Number of Days Before Password Change eee eee 4 Minimum password length Iw Electronic Signature Login 30 User Login
135. Sigma If available enter a known value for the standard deviation This might be known from a Linearity or Bias study or from a previous Stability study To see the following fields enter data on the Data tab and click on the Calculate button These estimates should not be used unless the control charts have been confirmed to be stable If the charts discussed below do not appear stable the following estimates will be incorrect Field Button Name Description Bias If stable The bias of the gage Standard Error The variability of the bias estimate Lower The lower 9596 confidence limit of Bias This will be unacceptable if greater than zero Upper The upper 95 confidence Limit for Bias This will be unacceptable if less than zero df Degrees of freedom for the Standard Deviation and Standard Error Standard Dev Standard Deviation The repeatability of individual measurements Data Tab To add stability sub group measurements click on the first row in the Sub Group table Each sub group row represents the values of the repeated master or master part measurements that you make You must use the same number of readings for each sub group of measurements for example you shouldn t use a sample size of five repeated readings on your first sub group and then use only three repeated readings on your second sub group Add additional sub groups to the rows following the first sub group row Note Subgroup sizes of 3 to 5 are common for stability s
136. Software System Administrator s Guide 289 Field List Data Type Length Msg_ Desc Text 250 Msg_User Text 50 Msg_Misc Long Integer 4 Table Name RepControl Description Report control number information Associated From ReportControlForm Field List Data Type Length ControllD Long Integer 4 ReportName Text key 100 ControlText Text 75 Alignment Text 50 User1 Text 20 User2 Text 20 User3 Text 20 User4 Text 20 User5 Text 20 Table Name ResultCodes Description Result Codes information Associated From Edit Calibration Result Codes x ResultList Field List Data Type Length Result Codes ID Long Integer key 4 ResultCode Text 50 CodeValue Double 8 Lookback Text 50 Table Name Risk Analysis Description Risk analysis information Associated From Gage RR Atribute Risk Analysis Field List Data Type Length GRR Results ID Long Integer 4 RiskSeqNum Long Integer 4 A1 Double 8 A2 Double 8 A3 Double 8 B1 Double 8 B2 Double 8 B3 Double 8 C1 Double 8 C2 Double 8 C3 Double 8 Decision Long Integer 4 RefValue Double 8 Code Text 50 AppSignal Text 50 Table Name RootCause Description Not Used Associated From Not Used Field List Data Type Length Cause Text key 50 Enabled Long Integer 4 290 Appendix B Table Definitions Field List Data Type Length Description Text 100 Table Name Settings Description Program settings Associated From Settings frmGage Frequency Adjusting Interval Interface Lock Catcher Form F
137. TARRETT X DIGITAL FORCE GAUGE Digital Variable Owner COMPANY E Digital ariable DROP INDICATOR FEELER GAGE SET FIXTURE FLOWMETER GAGE BLOCK S Hardness Tester MICROMETER PLUG GAGE Ring Gage STANDARD Step Gage THREAD GAGE Issue Retum Clon Record I 4 Attach Standards Attach Procedures 2 Place the cursor in the field that contains the incorrect data in this case the Type field 3 Select the Find button d on the floating toolbar When selected the following screen will appear Find and Replace 21x Find Replace Find What X Find Next Cancel Look In Type v Match whole Field z 4 Enterthe value you wish to remove or replace in the Find What field GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 47 5 Select the Replace tab If you wish to remove the value altogether leave the Replace With field blank Otherwise if you wish to replace the value with some other value then type the new replacement value in the Replace With field Find and Replace Find Replace Find What Dia s M Find Mext Cancel Replace With Y Replace Look In Type t Replace All Match whole Field Y More gt gt 6 Finally select the Replace All button A message box will remind you that you cannot undo this Operation 7 Select Yes and then close the Find and Replace form 8 Select the dropdown for Type to verify th
138. Text 255 Description Memo 0 Table Name Calib Defined Description Contains user defined fields for a particular calibration record Associated Form Calibration Entry User Defined tab Field List Data Type Length Item Text key 50 Label Text Text 50 LabelFontWeight Long Integer 4 dftLabel Text Text 50 Field Type Text 50 Field Attrib Text 50 List Source Memo 0 List Table Text 50 List Field Text 50 Table Name CalibFormulas Description Lists Calibration formulas Associated From CalibFormulas Field List Data Type Length ID Long Integer key 4 Formula Name Text 255 Formula Memo 0 Table Name Calibration Header Description Contains calibration information including measurements and results Associated From CalHistory Calibration Entry SubKitHistory Calibration Hours Graph Edit Calibration Header frmGage Frequency Adjusting Interval Gage Calibration Certificate Entry 268 Appendix B Table Definitions Field List Data Type Length Gage ID Text key 50 Calibration_Date Date Time key 8 Calibration Time Date Time key 8 Calibration Type Text 50 Calibration By Text 50 Department Text 50 Results Text 50 Action_Required Text 50 Approved Long Integer 4 Findings Memo 0 Calibration Cost Double AcctNo Text 50 TotalUncert Double 8 ResultCode Double CalDateUpdated Long Integer CertNo Text 50 Time Required Double Repair Cost Double Repair Hours Double CalFrequency Double 8 CalFrequency UOM Text
139. Text This is an editable field and is where the new text for a predefined list can be entered This module only permits editing of the text fields The user will not be able to add or delete any items from this module Setup Setup CA Service Request The CA Service Request form from the Setup menu automatically generates a letter for preview and printing based on a predefined letter format To set up service request letters or corrective action request notices choose Setup CA Service Request from the Setup menu The Letter Entry screen will appear Here you can enter the Letter Type Date Authored Authored By and the Body of the letter Enter as many letters as you need Letter Entry Letter Type Calibration Request Date Authored 2 12 1333 Authored by Sample Enclosed is one or more instruments which are in need of calibration Upon receipt of these units please call me at the number below with the estimate for the cost of the calibrations Be sure to include any return shipping and insurance charges in your estimate Please include the following information in your calibration documentation The calibration environmental conditions including but not limited to relative humidity and ambient temperature 2 A calibration certificate which states that the calibration technique or standard which is directly traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology or an internationally accepted naturally occuring p
140. Timeout Period mins Do Not Archive Unsigned Calibration Do Not Archive Unapproved Calibration Email the ff recipients email addresses separated by semicolons After 3 unsuccessfull login attempts Restrict Issue To Authorized Users Cancel Close The table below describes the fields on this form Field Button Name Description Enable Security Check this box if you want to use system security with GAGEtrak If you have installed the 21 CFR Part 11 compliant version of GAGEtrak security is automatically permanently enabled this option is grayed out to show that you cannot change it If Enable Security is checked under a Standard Installation of the application you will be required to create at least one Admin user prior to enabling this feature You can create user security groups and assign group permissions in the Security utility see page 204 Enable Security If you check this box GAGEtrak will display warning messages if users try to perform Messages actions such as deleting records they don t have permission deleting If you leave this box unchecked users won t see messages but will still be unable to do anything they don t have permission to do Logon Method GAGEtrak allows you to choose from two types of system security Windows Logon uses security from your Windows operating system when users login to Windows they can access GAGEtrak Application Logon uses security sp
141. Use this screen to set the desired format User Info General Cal Options Calendar Security Automatic Numbering Intertace Calibration Certificate Numbering Numbering Schemes gt E mos Panne Test Number Field Calibration Cert No fi 203 030 Last Number Issued Calibration Type Digital Variable il Service Request Numbering Format nmyy amp iit Last Number Issued 0403 002 nmddy ttt Format Test Test 012004 0000 Last Number Issued Record I4 4 8 5 gt gt I gt of 5 Gage ID Numbering Enable Automatic Gage Numbering Format LET Enter the format to use for Automatic Numbering into Format Use for letters that will be incremented and for digits that will be 0000001 10 Last Number Issued incremented For letters or numbers that will not be incremented enter the text as you want it to appear in the number letters must be all Calibration Scan File Name and Path Option caps If you want to include date information in the Automatic Number enter the date codes from the table below in the Format Leave the ausa Format Test 0000000002 Last Number Issued CAT emp E File Path the week Sun to Sat Format field blank to use standard incremental numbering Date Information dd numeric day of the month 01 to 31 ddd text day of Cancel Close tam numeric month 01 to 12 mmm text month
142. User Defined Auth Persons 4 gt Gage ID c 002 Description CALIPER DIAL 12 INCH X Procedure Text Procedure Attachment Procedure Name CP22E Revision 12 01 99 Procedure DIAL DIGITAL AND VERNIER CALIPERS zv ISO Org gt Calibration Frequency 12 months can be modified according to stability purpose and usage 1 0 Scope This method describes the calibration of calipers inside and outside dimensions up to 72 inches 1800 mm and depth dimension up to 12 inches 300 mm Instrument resolution 0 001 or 0 0005 inch 0 02 or 0 05 mm 2 0 References This document is based on the DOD procedures Record 14 4 View Print Delete Record I 4 2 hl gt gt of 55 Field Button Name Description Gage ID The ID of the selected gage will appear in this field Procedure Name To link a calibration procedure to the current gage select the procedure name from this list box Procedure In this section you ll see either the procedure text or any attached pictures View Hide OLE You can view the procedure text or you can click the OL Object Linking and Embedding button to view its associated picture The OLE button s name will be either View or Hide only one of these options is visible at a time View OLE appears when you re viewing the text and Aide OLE appears when you re viewing the picture The View Hide button has no effect on how reports are printed View Print Attachment
143. Where LPT1 Comment r Paper Orientation Size Letter v Portrait Source Automatically Select M C Landscape Network 1 Cancel l Tip To save paper and time first view the report on screen and then adjust the print setup values Any changes will be visible on screen after you click the OK button When you close the report window the program will save the new settings Report Descriptions This table contains a description of the most commonly used reports including special filtering options Report Description REPORT QUEUE This feature allows users to Save View Printand Print All commonly used report filter criteria Once you have a report filter set up as required simply add the filter criteria to the queue These saved filters can be retrieved at a later date or printed directly from the reports queue Users can save multiple sets of criteria for each report report criteria may be fixed dates such as January 1 2004 or variable dates such as 30 days before the current date Report Queue allows several reports to be printed consecutively GAGE REPORTS Report Description Gage Bar Code Labels Use any of these reports to print a pre designed bar code or group of bar code labels Make sure that the label height matches the cartridge installed on your label printer Gage Detail Report Use this report to see a comprehensive gage report including record details Gage Issue For a complete list of ga
144. You can also use five or six sets of diskettes one set labeled for each day of the week and back up your database as GTDATA60 ZIP every day This way you ll always have a week s worth of backups You might also want to archive a permanent set of backups on a regular basis perhaps once a month Next select the database file to add to your ZIP file Choose your data file GTDATA60 MDB and click the Open button Select Database file to Zip reeks Look in cy atwe e 83 er E3 PocketPC 2 Dtu6 mdb l GTData60 mdb l GT5amp60 mdb 4 GTVal6x mdb 5 Gtw6 mdb A Newrpts mdb File name GTData60 mdb Files of type Access mdb v Cancel My Network P V Open as read only AL Tip If your database is on your server you must change the drive letter to your network drive and select the appropriate folders then highlight GTDATA60 MDB If you aren t sure where your database is located check the database location on the lower right corner of the main menu before you back up your database If you use more than one database with GAGEtrak back up each one of your databases on a separate set of labeled diskettes Place a blank pre formatted diskette in the drive and click the OK button DynaZIP ZIP Request xi Please insert a disk in the drive Press OK when ready or Cancel to abort Concor A progress meter will show you the percentage of completion If the backup requires more than
145. _ Groups Users Group Permissions Object Permissions Status System Status Logon System EZ Security Current UserID No User ID Security Enabled No Security Warning Yes Setup Auto Email Header The Auto Email Header function allows plain text emails to be sent automatically from the program based on the Email Event selection The Email Event list is predefined and entries cannot be added to or deleted 208 Chapter 4 Setting Up GAGEtrak Auto Emailer iis A Email Event Gage Issued Out M v Send List v Send Gage Info After Email Body v Send Auth Persons v Send Issued To Email Text l gage has been issued out to the person and department listed Email Address Record I 4 1 gt Lt gt of 11 The table below describes the fields on this form Field Button Name Description Email Event Select the event you would like to modify The predefined email events are e Gage Issued Out when a gage is being issued from the Gage Entry Issue Return or either the Issue Gage form e Gage Returned when a gage is being returned from the Gage Entry Issue Return or either the Return Gage form e Automatic Gage Due Listing sends an email automatically when the application is opened The list of gages due is based on the filter criteria created on the automatic due report e Cal Due Listing will be sent from the Calibration Due report e Gage Added to Service Request will be sent when a g
146. a m al m wi s 257 386 sto 6 mol 947 949 ms m asi wom 207ara 2azra7 254452 2TGs 285662 297787 308487 Us toa s ma sae er ma orf mef rea i 143 mal s aaf sl esf wl sos toa nsa o uro 206978 233535 254274 2853 297649 3 08358 eal e aay ans ssl m osal e mo oma GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 149 FEEUSESERCEEENMESNSEM 182 3 08324 CN CN N N CN CE NN ws 19 2 1 14520 e 1 70480 2 06862 2 33436 2 54187 2 71111 2 85341 2 97581 n 3 08294 w e s sso m7 se se mog isaf wga 30826 S077 a ume see amm sam eats E emm aa For g gt 20 use d and estimate dfwith the constant difference ca Attribute Risk Analysis Attribute gages produce binary outputs like pass or fail and zero or one To perform this study you need to select fifty parts with a range of measurement values that extends all the way from out of specification at the lower specification limit to out of specification at the upper specification limit You will need three appraisers who check each part in random order then check them all again in a different random order for a total of 3 trials per appraiser This procedure is similar to a study in previous versions of GAGEtrak called the Short Attribute study The Short Attribute study involved only twenty parts and published requirements called for perfect agreement New requirements allow a modest amount of disagreement within
147. a funnel with a lightning bolt You can then use the Find binoculars button on the toolbar to find the gagels that you want to clone If you use this method when you re done cloning GAGEtrak will show you the last cloned record that you created and you can enter each clone s unique information Gage Entry Graph Button To generate an accuracy chart for the current gage record click the Graph button in the Gage Entry Information screen By default the program charts the entire calibration history for the first calibration standard You can specify a time frame by entering beginning and ending dates in the From Calibration Date and Through Calibration Date fields BJ Gage Accuracy Chart _ Of x Gage ID C 002 From Calibration Date 11 1 1980 Thru Calibration Date LU M Gage Accuracy History CM Before a CM After d3 Minimum 10 74003 Nominal Maximum Print Close Record 14 4 1 gt gt i gt gt of 10 To view different standards use the navigation arrow buttons or press the PAGE DOWN PAGE UP keys Remember you can generate this chart only after you ve entered some calibration and measurement records see the next chapter for more information on calibration records As you can see in the sample screen the chart plots before and after values as well as the nominal minimum and maximum allowable limits Click the Print button to print the graph or go to
148. able Name ezy Groups Description Security groups Associated From Security Field List Data Type Length GroupName Text key 50 OperatorStamp Text 50 DateTimeStamp Date Time 8 GroupOnly Long Integer 4 Table Name ezy_GroupUser Description Security group user list Associated From Security Field List Data Type Length GroupName Text key 50 UserlD Text key 150 OperatorStamp Text 50 DateTimeStamp Date Time 8 Table Name ezy Users Description Security user list Associated From Security Field List Data Type Length UserlD Text key 150 Password Text 150 FullName Text 50 OperatorStamp Text 50 DateTimeStamp Date Time 8 OpenForm Text 50 StatusRules Long Integer 4 GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 275 Table Name Field Labels Description Custom field label information Associated From Field Labels Field List Data Type Length Field Name Text key 100 Label Text Text 100 Status Bar Text Text 255 FontWeight Long Integer 4 dftLabel Text Text 100 dftStatus Bar Text Text 255 Table Name Form Captions Description Lists names and captions of every form Associated From Form Captions Field List Data Type Length Form Name Text key 50 Form Caption Text 100 Table Name Formula Vars Description Stores variables of customized calibration formulas Associated From Formula Vars subform Field List Data Type Length ID Long Integer key 4 Formula ID Long Integer 4
149. ach standard Your IDs would look like this 01 CMM Check 02 CMM Check 03 CMM Check This numbering also lets you control the list s sort order the program automatically keeps the list in alphabetical order by the Standard Dvalue Two types are available Variable or Attribute Select Variable for those standards that have a value that you actually measure such as 0 502 inches Select Attribute for pass fail or visual types of checks Selecting Attribute does not calculate accuracy of particular standard Indicate the units being measured such as inches mm or degrees When you enter the nominal measurement GAGEtrak automatically calculates the minimum measurement based on the gage s tolerance This value is the minimum acceptable value for the gage when you measure this standard for example 0 999 Enter the nominal value for the gage when you measure this standard for example 1 000 When you enter the nominal measurement GAGEtrak automatically calculates the maximum measurement based on the gage s tolerance This value is the maximum acceptable value for the gage when you measure this standard such as 1 001 Select the type of Reference Standard that will be used for this standard This list box will show the Gage Type of every reference standard in the database Select from a list of available standard IDs The list is limited by the Ref Type field An empty Ref Type field would show all available
150. age is added in Service Request Entry e Gage Status Closed sends when a gage status is changed to Closedin Service Request Entry e Service Request Closed will be sent when the Service Request Status has been changed to Closed n Service Request Entry e Calibration Passed is generated when the checkbox in Calibration Entry is checked e Gage Limited will send when the Pass checkbox in Calibration Entry or importing a Passed record from a PDA when one or more measurements have the limited checkbox checked e As Found Condition Out will send when Passedis selected under Calibration Status in Calibration Entry or importing a Passed record from a PDA e Calibration Status Change will send when the Pass checkbox in Calibration Entry or importing a Passed record from the PDA when the Calibration Status is anything other than Passed Email Selection The following selection will provide the following results e Send List Send Issued To when selected a list of all gages that have a due date on or before the current data will be created and included in the email body e Send Auth Persons an email will be sent to the list of person in the Gage Entry Auth Persons form is the Restrict ssueis set to either Not Restricted or Program Default e Send Gage Info After Email Body if selected the body of the email will contain the following information Gage D Description Model N Current location lesued To Is
151. aining B3 Staff Entry iof x Information Training Photo Authorized Gages Issued Gages Employee ID 2781 Name Stan Smith Education BS Mechanical Engineering Industry Experience E years Inspection Technician Grade II Related Experience AutoCAD 3 dimensional wire diagrammir Management Experience Supervised Calibration Inspection Dept i Training History _ Description Start Date End Date I Welding 11 28 2002 12 13 2002 Welding E Institute m 00 uus ett Cert 5 1 7 2102 0 00 Record I4 4 1 gt EE of 1 Record I 4 1 gt gt I rx of 6 Use the Staff Entry Training screen to keep track of the employee s current and continuing education The table below describes the fields in this screen Field Name Description Education Give a basic description of the employee s education for example BS Mechanical Engineering Industry Experience Enter the employee s work experience for example 6 years Inspection Technician Grade II Related Experience Use this field to track any other useful experience such as AutoCAD 3 dimensional wire diagramming Management Enter any management experience that the employee has for example Supervised Experience Calibration Inspection Dept in 2000 GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 213 Training History In this section you can track classes or certifications that each em
152. ak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 279 Chart MSA2 Gage RR Stability SubForm Gage RR Stability MSA2 Gage RR Whiskers Chart Gage RR Whiskers Chart_MSA2 Gage RR XY Chart Gage RR XY Chart MSA2 StabilityHistogramChart StabilityXBarRChart StabilitySBarRChart StabilityXMRChart Field List Data Type Length GRR Results ID Long Integer key 4 Gage ID Text 50 Gage Desc Text 50 Part No Text 50 Part Name Text 50 Characteristic Text 50 Company_Part_No Text 50 GRR_Results_ Type Text 50 Approved Long Integer 4 Completed Long Integer 4 GRR Results Date Date Time 8 Trials Text 50 Parts Text 50 Ops Text 50 USL Text 50 LSL Text 50 GRR Text 50 GRR_PCT Text 50 EV Text 50 EVTOL_PCT Text 50 EVTV_PCT Text 50 AV Text 50 AVTOL_PCT Text 50 AVTV_PCT Text 50 RR Text 50 RRTOL PCT Text 50 RRTV PCT Text 50 PV Text 50 PVTOL_PCT Text 50 PVTV_PCT Text 50 R BAR Text 50 UCL R Text 50 TV Text 50 Comments Memo 0 C Long Integer 4 a11 Double 8 a12 Double 8 a13 Double 8 a14 Double 8 a15 Double 8 a16 Double 8 a17 Double 8 a18 Double 8 a19 Double 8 a110 Double 8 a21 Double 8 a22 Double 8 a23 Double 8 a24 Double 8 a25 Double 8 280 Appendix B Table Definitions Field List Data Type Length a26 Double 8 a27 Double 8 a28 Double 8 a29 Double 8 a210 Double 8 a31 Double 8 a32 Double 8 a33 Double 8 a34 Double 8 a35 Double 8 a36 Double 8 a37 Double 8 a38 Double 8 a39 Double 8 a310 Double 8 b11 Double 8 b12 Do
153. al Ed 4 Information Training Photo Authorized Gages Issued Gages Employee ID 3781 Name Stan Smith v Active Address fi 234 E Main Street SS No 222 22 2222 City State ZIP San Diego Ca X 35338 Job Title Mechanic E Mail ssmith yourdomainname com DOB 1 1 1960 Home Pager 555 1 234 555 5673 E Page Technician i 1 1 2003 Work Phone 555 1011 Ex 112 ase Emergency Contact Name ane Smith Date in Job 1172003 Emergency Contact Phone 555 1234 Department Calibration zl EG Supervisor John Doe Craft Mech M Shift X Rate 25 00 Crew E E Seniority 3 Staff Userl Skill Level 5 Staff User2 Record I 4 1 gt gt i gt gt of 6 The following table explains each of the fields and buttons in this screen Field Name Description Employee ID Enter a unique alphanumeric identifier for each employee Name In this field enter the employee s full name Active Check this box to show that the employee is currently active If you don t mark the employee as active his or her name won t appear on reports that list available employees Address City State Enter the employee s mailing address including city state and zip code and Z p E Mail Enter the employee s e mail address Home Pager and Enter the employee s home phone number pager number work number and Work Phone Ext extension 211 212 Chapter 4 Setting Up GAGEtrak Field Name Description Emergency Con
154. alibration Measurements Procedures Labels Signature Attachments User Defined Calibration Scans Gage ID C 002 m Scan Date File Path Description 12 21 2004 C Temp 0000000004 jpg End C 002 Procedure Record I4 4 1 gt rj of 1 Record I4 4 1 gt gt i gt gt of 62 To begin scanning documents select the Scan New button The following form will appear 83 Scan Certificate Eq Pixel Type All Pixel Types C Banw C Grayscale C RGB Color C Palette Color Scanner Interface Show Interface C Hide Interface m File Extension bmp C jpg C pdf Description Select Scanner Device This form is where you can scan your calibration certificates images and documents Note Your TWAIN device needs to be set before you can use the scan feature You can do this by clicking on the Select Scanner Device button The Select Source dialog will appear If the desired scanner is not highlighted as shown click on it to highlight it then click on the Select button and you will be returned to the Scan Certificate dialog Select Source xi Sources 108 Chapter 11 Entering Calibration Records You can select the Scan button to start scanning your images after you have selected the device set the pixel type refer to your scanner literature for more information regarding pixel types and whether or not to see the scanner int
155. alibration EMtiny USEF DERG 0 PER M 106 Calibration Entry CaliDraviOn SCANS saranin ERAS ERR ENS REESE EVE SENSN Me ELS AUR UNNS MEE Ce SUE ERN RR ue BRNO Rete 107 Calibrations Export to PDA Import from PDA scsscsssssessssssssssecessesseccesessessecessessessecestessecsecessesseceesessesseceesessesseceenessesseneeees 108 Calibrations Staridard GFoUD ceno EE ROREM e a Ia I IM ME EE 109 Calibration Calendar coe ne pen case Gud eei DH oos Piin on Pbi e duis ven Pe eve a Ivbevvs dedecus Pieve Debe E Pete ves eai euvEa vae vu Dv 110 Calibration Formula EM Uy oio e ri EE St SE Ro EDEN E Meu enu E igual im NE t cH NU M tM ME NI NI SAU mI MEE NU NN MN Ui MS 110 Chapter 12 MSA EIU cosscscessdecccscssecancessectessosdassuessecscasnessesesstucusssuedsaes cssuensedoesanea Urt eo tope S OVENI ccs SH EL Odit ced timc ubi o Sam ne verry tric herr nnt rary tre yenrrter Terme veriener yee nt ced 113 About the Manual Software and Technical SUPPOFt cscscssecsscesssssecessscsecssssceccessaseccasensessacessecseceassceesecsaceesassaceesaceasessaceasessacsassceeseceesees 113 Validating ihe SONWANE EE 113 Terms and Definitions E LI m 113 BIE E A ETR TATIE NEE T A TA E E NTE A 114 Wl mS 114 PRECISION ANIC Wa efe P gs oh RE T UO LE 114 Repeatability Equipment Variation scscsssssssssscsssssssssssssssescscscsesesesesesesseesesesesesesesesesesssseseseseseacaesenesesessssesesesesesesesesesseses
156. allations and directions for setting up and maintaining the program and database The first section of this guide briefly discusses the development of formal measurement testing and calibration Next we ll look at a hypothetical example of how you could use GAGEtrak on a typical day This example will familiarize you with the program s major functions and features while giving you a look at some optional accessories In the second part of this guide you ll learn how to quickly install and use GAGEtrak s three major functions Gage Entry Calibration Entry and Gage Issue and Return Measurement and Calibration Throughout history measurement has been a tricky process Before our modern measurement systems were developed people didn t have standard measurements to use in their daily lives For example if you told the local woodcutter that you needed a foot of wood you would get just that but a foot by A s definition not your definition If his feet were longer than yours you benefited if not you were left short Gradually people began to realize that this method of measurement simply would not do They developed standards of measurement ultimately national standards However with the advent of the global marketplace it became apparent that we needed global standards to ensure part interchangeability between countries In developing these standards we were trying to ensure accuracyand precision in our measurements Accuracyis h
157. als unnecessary GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software Quick Start Guide 11 Your Company Name Division Name Gage Entry Supplier Entry Part Entry Issue Gages Procedure Entry Return Gages Service Request Entry Status Kit Entry n Paate fi Uea D NoUserName CAGTWE GTSamp60 mdb This table lists the menu buttons and functions that you will use in this Quick Start Guide For a complete list of menu options consult your User s Manual Menu Button Options Main Records Gage Entry Issue Gages Return Gages Calibrations Calibration Entry Chapter 4 Entering Gage Records Gage Entry To begin entering your gage records select Gage Entry from the Main Records menu Gage Entry P Information Specifications History Standards Pats Procedures Calibration Schedule R amp R Schedule User Defined Auth Persons Attachments Events E Gage ID 0000000001 Description X Status 1 Active Storage Location um Ref Standard NIST Nf f Current Location pooo Gage S N SSS Service Date Po Asset No Retirement Date Model No 5 1 Supplier Code m Te Cost 000 Unit of Meas d Purchase Date NENNEN Notes User Defined Manufacturer Owner X Issue Retum Clone Gage Graph Calibration Attach Standards Attach Procedures Record 14 4 Il 48 Pb gt i gt gt of 48 Since you don t
158. an immediately generate a part recall report that lists all parts that you might have measured incorrectly The table below explains the fields and buttons in the Issue Tracking Entry screen Field Button Name Description Issue Date and These fields track the date and time at which you issue the gage the current date isie Jona and time prefill the fields in which can be edited Type Select the reason for issue this field creates its own list from your entries Issued To Enter or select a user from the dropdown list box of the person to whom you issue the gage The name selection for this field will be dependent on the Gage Entry Auth Persons Restrict Issue selection For more information see Restrict Issue under Gage Entry Auth Persons on page 65 Issued Dept Select or enter the department or job number that will use the gage Part No Use this field to track the part or group of parts that the gage will measure GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 69 Field Button Name Description PO No You can enter a Purchase Order number if you re sending the gage out to a supplier for repair or calibration or are manufacturing parts for a customer Promised Date Enter the date on which you expect the gage to be returned to you ssue Label Click on this button to print an issue label for the gage being issued Note A label printer must be installed to accommodate this request When you click on Issue Label the Se
159. anager component with which other data access systems such as Microsoft Access and Visual Basic are built The SELECT SQL statement is used to set up your data source A brief syntax explanation is shown below It instructs the Microsoft Jet database engine to return information from the database as a set of records Syntax SELECT predicate table table fieldl1 AS aliasi table field2 AS alias2 fy FROM tableexpression IN externaldatabase WHERE GROUP BY HAVING ORDER BY WITH OWNERACCESS OPTION The SELECT statement has these parts Part Description predicate One of the following predicates ALL DISTINCT DISTINCTROW or TOP Use the predicate to restrict the number of records returned if none is specified the default is ALL sj Specifies that all fields from the specified table or tables are selected Table The name of the table containing the fields from which records are selected field field2 The names of the fields containing the data you want to retrieve If you include more than one field they are retrieved in the order listed alias alias2 The names used as column headers instead of the original column names in the table tableexpression The name of the table or tables containing the data you want to retrieve externaldatabase The name of the database containing the tables in tableexpression if they are not in the current database Remarks To perform t
160. and highlights the first occurrence of the text 2 Click the Replace button to replace the highlighted text with the text in the Replace With box If you don t want to replace this occurrence of the text click the Find Next button to locate the next occurrence To Replace All Occurrences without Confirmation 1 Click the Replace All button Remove Unwanted Information from Dropdown Lists If the dropdown list is a self building list contains unwanted data then use the Find button to remove the entry To Remove Dropdown List Data 1 Select the dropdown list for Type under Gage Entry A dropdown list is represented with a solid inverted triangle In the screen shot below notice that the Type field has two values listed Dial and Dial s Let assume that Dial s is incorrect and should be removed from the dropdown list EF Gage Entry ix P Information Specifications History Standards Parts Procedures Calibration Schedule R amp R Schedule User Defined Auth Persons gt Gage ID C 002 Description CALIPER DIAL 12 INCH M Status 1 Active Storage Location BIN 12 M Ref Standard v NIST No M Current Location Bob Smith Deta Gage S N SN1 98034674 Service Date fi 1 13 2004 Asset No Retirement Date Model No Supplier Code General Type RUE X Cost 234 00 Unit of Meas Attribute Purchase Date fia 3 1987 Bore Gage Notes BEN User Defined DIAL s Digital Manufacturer S
161. and the Destination Database is the database accepting the data If particular records are needed from the source database the Merge Utility lets you select a single Gage D Part Number or Procedure Nameto merge from the dropdown list box If all records from the source database need to merge into the destination database select the checkbox to the right of Gage ID Part No or Procedure Name for entire database merging Merge Utility Wizard Merge Utility Page 2 of 2 Gage ID VAL 01 4 S Part No a Iv Procedure Name E Iv Merge Options on Identical Gages Skip C Merge history records C Adda prefix C Overwrite C Adda suffix Cancel lt Back Next Merge Data The Merge Options in Identical Gages are options that can be used to determine the exact operations required to merge the records when identical equipment ID s are found Note This procedure merges data from the Source to the Destination database and can be a time consuming process dependent on the quantity of records being merged Data Tools Compact Repair Data Whenever you delete a record the program doesn t actuallydelete the record it only marks It as deleted and then re uses the space whenever you add new records i e your data file size does not decrease If you delete many records you should compact your data file so that the program actually removes these records decreasing the size of the data file You can do this by running C
162. any authorized persons that are associated with a gage record Bs Gage Entry Bl x gt Information Specifications History Standards Parts Procedures Calibration Schedule R amp R Schedule User Defined Auth Persons Attachments Events Gage ID C 002 Description CALIPER DIAL 12 INCH M Restrict Issue Not Restricted Authorized Persons Name Note P Bob Smith x bd Record I 4 1 gt b rx of 1 4 gt Record 14 4 T 1 gt gt I gt gt of 46 The table below describes the fields in this area Field Button Name Restrict Issue Description The option selections in this list box are Program Default Restricted and Not Restrictedand control the persons authorized to Issue gages If Program Defaultis selected the application will check whether or not Restrict Issue to Authorized Useris checked in Settings if it is the ssued Tofield in Issue Gages will list only the authorized users that were entered on the Gage Entry Auth Persons for that gage Program Defaultis Restrict Issue the default If Restrict Issue to Authorizedis not checked all staff will be listed in the ssue Toin Issue Gages form If Restrictedis selected it will override the program default and the ssued Toin Issue Gages will be restricted to the authorized persons for that specific gage You will not be able to select this option until Authorized Persons have been added to the list If Not Restri
163. aracters You can use them in record filters and in Find Replace commands to include all records that begin with specific characters or match a certain pattern Wildcard Character If You Enter GAGEtrak Finds wh What white and why works like MS DOS commands at cat bat and what b lL ball bell and bill this symbol matches any single character 1 3 103 113 123 matches any single digit not for use with date fields use asterisk instead b ae lL balland bell but not bill matches any single character within the brackets Tip Because it allows a literal search on wildcard characters this character helps you find records that contain wildcard characters for example to find Machine 1 you would enter Machine 1 Ais another wildcard character b ae lL billand bull but not bell matches any character not in the list between the brackets b a c d bad bba and bcd matches any one of a range of characters Floating Toolbar In GAGEtrak you can access common program functions from a floating toolbar that appears in all entry screens If you don t want the toolbar to appear you can disable it through GAGEtrak s Settings screen see the System Administrator s Guide for more information The default for the program is that the toolbar is parked on the upper left hand corner just below the menu Dow X Ba GER EE H t 57 Y Vp 2 Z close Repositioning the Toolbar To move the toolbar click
164. ard Group Digital Caliper 06 M Standard ID Type Units Minimum Nominal Maximum c Ref Type Gage ID of Standard Format fi Block 0 Inch S bd finch 0 001 jo 0 001 GAGE BLOCK S bd MSGB1 bd 1 000 bd GAGE BLOCK S T MSGB1 M 5 000 T Block 2 Inch x fv z finch 1 383 2 2 001 GAGE BLOCK S bd MSGB1 M 5 000 bd PreFill F Block 1 Inch Inch 0 23 1 023 1 001 Record i 4 T 1b bl gt of 46 In this example the minimum and maximum measurements are automatically calculated based on the and tolerances entered in the Gage Entry Specifications screen 001 For manual entry start with the Standard ID and type in the appropriate information according to the following table Field Button Name Description Standard ID Enter the name or identification of the calibration standard or checkpoint for example Gage Block Each standard ID that you enter for the gage must be unique If you need to use the same name for more than one ID number or letter each ID For example if you need to use the name CMM Check for more than one standard ID you could number the name each time The names would then look like this 1 CMM Check 2 CMM Check 3 CMM Check Type Select either V for Variable or A for Attribute Units Enter the units measured such as MM inches lbs or degrees Minimum This field contains the minimum acceptable value
165. are plotted against each other using appraiser as an index This plot compares one appraiser s readings to those of another appraiser If the appraisers readings matched perfectly the plotted points would form a diagonal straight line Example Appraiser Comparison X Y Plots B vs A A vs IC Scatter Plot The Scatter Plot charts individual readings by appraiser by part to help you determine consistency among appraisers occurrences of abnormal readings and the interaction between the parts and appraisers Example Scatter Plot A 1st x 2nd 3rd Readings o smosmoxmosd Jos98o Appraiser Part Ad B1 C1 A2 B2 C2 A3 B3 C3 AA B ATO B10 C10 Repeatability Range Control Chart Using a standard range chart this chart plots the ranges of the readings by each appraiser for each part including the average range and control limits Appraiser groups the data and lines connect the points for each appraiser 124 Chapter 12 MSA Entry Repeatability Range Chart Interpretation The Range Control chart shouldn t show data patterns relative to the appraisers or have any out of control points An n contro Range Control chart is a sign that the appraisers use the gage in the same way With the Range Control chart you can determine whether repeatability is the same for all appraisers the numerical methods do not answer this question Example Repeatability Range Control Chart 0 1280 0 0280 Par
166. are stored with the calibration record This allows you to maintain a complete history of calibration frequencies and how they might change over time Note If you made a selection from the Gage Frequency Adjusting Interval section for this gage whenever you enter a new calibration record GAGEtrak will automatically adjust the Calibration Frequency according to the rules you defined in the Adjusting Calibration Frequency Settings table Please see the System Administrator s Guide for details Next Due Date This field stores the next due date for calibration based on the calibration frequency You must check the Passbox in order for GAGEtrak to show the next due date Note If a gage has a calibration frequency of Usageor Cycles and the gage is not past due for calibration you will not be presented with a Next Due Date this field will remain blank until the gage needs to be calibrated Calibration Date Use this field to store the date of the calibration it s automatically set to the current date You can change it until the calibration record is saved GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 99 Field Button Name Description Time Like the Datefield this field automatically displays the current time If you change the time enter it in this format HH MM This field is required Department In this field select or enter the name of the department that used the gage before calibration By Select or enter the name of the
167. art click on this button Calibration This button takes you directly to Calibration Entry for the current gage ID In this window you can perform all actions that you would normally do in Calibration Entry To return to Gage Entry click the Gage Masterbutton at the bottom of the window or the close button in the window s title bar Chapter 5 Entering alibration Records Calibration Entry To enter calibration records select Calibration Entry from the Calibration menu A window similar to the one shown below will appear Calibration Entry P Calibration Measurements Procedures Labels Signature Attachments User Defined Calibration Scans Description Gage S N Calib Freq Calibration Date Department Calibration Type Results Action Required Findings Uncertainty Temperature Humidity MSA Graph Certificate Gage Entry Record I 4 1 b bl gt gt of 60 COMPARATOR CTG002 DB S N 1 DIO4 DM 00002 FGOS FG25169 FIX143 FM14 FMM 00003 G 1230192 G 3862C 002 G 41230196 GNG 00013 GNG124 GNG125 L44565 20 MSA56 MSGB1 CALIPER DIAL 12 INCH 14 Kodak Optical Comparator SUNDSTRAND THREAD GAGE 0001 NO 3 Dial Bore MITUTOYO 0001 ELEC DROP IND Digital Micrometers FEELER GAGE PERSONAL 0 200 LB S DIGITAL FORCE GAUGE OLIN WING SPAN GAGE 848 010 0 0 1 50 GPM LIQUID FLO WMETER Multimeter Digital Indicator Temp Controller Digital Scale Go NoGo Pin Ga
168. art No usa Gage ID COMPARATOR X Part No 10 221 1 Gage Desc fi 4 Kodak Optical Comparator Part Desc Bracket Rt Hand LSL 0 010 LsLGmR Qnni347 xo 80 40 LstBIAS CORBA stat 77770 10894482 X Reference Value tC ca 2083 Entry required If multiple entries enter three largest of 0 016 0 018 Need six total For row with excess enter randomly s omnes i Tp Entry required IF multiple entries enter three smallest 20 0 01 Prefill i i Charts Print Record I4 4 T 1b gt i gt gt of 1 Field Button Name Description LSL Enter the Lower Specification Limit 156 Chapter 12 MSA Entry Field Button Name Description LSL GRR Gage Repeatability and Reproducibility GRR for the Lower Specification Limit Attribute Gages may use different methods for upper and lower specification limits Therefore each has it s own GRR This will appear after you enter data and click on Calc LSL Bias Bias for the Lower Specification Limit This will appear after you enter data and click on Calc 0 zero Enter a variable measurement for at least one part that was accepted zero times out of twenty If you have more than three such parts enter the three largest 1 19 Enter variable measurements for six or more parts with acceptance counts between one and 19 out of twenty If you have more than three parts with the same acceptance count then enter them randomly 20 Ent
169. ase location for each workstation The user can still change databases or use multiple 13 Click Finish If additional files are required for GAGEtrak 6 to run they will install now Follow the instructions on your screen to install any additional files Please note that Technical Support is not available for the creation of your client server database After You Install GAGEtrak If you re upgrading from a previous version of GAGEtrak you will need to run the Data Transfer Utility before you begin using the program Please see Appendix A Data Transfer Utility beginning on page 255 for complete instructions If you re using GAGEtrak in a client server environment first follow these steps to configure it with your MS SQL database Administrator Installation To complete the administrator setup follow these steps Note You will need to do this only once for an administrator setup To set up each workstation follow steps 3 10 1 Run the appropriate scripts for your server to create the database and tables The scripts are located in the GTW6 SCRIPTS directory The files have prefixes to their names Step1 Step2 to indicate the order in which you should run them You might need to modify the data file in the table space for your system See the Step 1 script for details 2 Next run GAGEtrak s Data Transfer Utility Version 6 to import existing data from a previous version or prefill the database See page 255 for instru
170. ast important headings Heading 3 and body content Normal You may use the controls in the right hand pane of the Styles window to modify the font size color or alignment of a style You may also create new styles by clicking the New button under the list of styles in the Styles window GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 241 Note New styles or modifications to existing styles in a given report appear onlyin that report Report Settings x 3 Normal Headingl Heading2 Heading3 StrikeThrough False Horizontal Alignment Lett Vertical Alignment Top Cancel To apply a text style to an element in the designer canvas select it then choose the desired style from the drop down list at the top left of the window just above the ruler Heading Arial E m Di he Cote Gai Wo Completing Your Report Layout Every report must have a page header and footer The page header contains the heading for each field of the report i e report date and perhaps a page number The footer usually contains the page number and subtotals of the value fields in the report You can create titles and field labels using the label button the report editor also includes buttons that generate automatic page numbers and a date time stamp Note The Report Editor does not save your report automatically so when you are done with the report layout do not forget to save your report T
171. bel 1 gso gH 1 2 Inch Gage Barcode Label 1 2 2 sip zd J 1 2 Inch Label 1 15b p xd 1 4 Inch Label 1 djhp xd 3 4 Inch Label E 3 8 Inch Label E zd A3 Frequency Adjusting Report 0 Op 4 J Cal Due Listing by Calibrator E zz Cal Due Listing by Calibrator per Page 1 t1 Sdp f Cal Due Listing by Calibrator w Cal Stds amp 1 SK Cd Action Legend Overwrite overwrites your existing report with the updated one Note Do not choose this option if you have customized the report earlier Saveas savethe updated report with a new report name Skip skips the report update Note Reports that need to be updated are automatically set to Overwrite action by default Overwrite All Skip All Cancel Transfer Data You can take an action for each report available for updating these actions are verwrite overwrite the existing report with the new report Save As save the current report with a new name Skip do not do anything with the current report Note If you have not modified any reports in the past then click 7ransfer Datato have the updated versions of the reports transferred to your database If you have modified certain reports then you will want
172. bering Interface Company Information Name Your Company Name Address 1234 E Main Stet City Stae Zip AnyTom M 43133 CoMact Admn o Phone 555 555 5555 Fax s5555 Logo CyberMetrics lt Paste Logo lt Insert Object 191 192 Chapter 4 Setting Up GAGEtrak The table below describes the fields on this form Field Button Name Company Information Paste Logoand Insert Object Cancel Close Settings General 83 Settings Description Enter your company name address contact phone fax numbers and logo optional The two lines for your company name and logo will appear at the top of all reports To enter your company logo use the nsert Objector Paste buttons Use nsert Object if you already have a logo file or want to create the logo in a graphics program and link it to GAGEtrak Use the Paste button if you ve copied the logo to Windows Clipboard Try to insert a logo graphic about the same size as the logo region shown that would fit into a square or rectangular area If the logo would fit best into a rectangle check the Use Wide Logo Field checkbox as shown above To avoid wasting memory don t use a logo with more colors than your printer can print You can use a scanner to obtain your logo but scanners are often set for more resolution or colors than your printer can support A logo created this way becomes a huge file that uses an excessive amount of memory T
173. bf 4 00 4202 00 Microsoft ODBC Driver for Oracle 2 00 00 6325 Microsoft ODBC for Oracle 2 573 4202 00 Microsoft Paradox Driver db 4 00 4202 00 Microsoft Text Driver t t csv 4 00 4202 00 Microsoft Visual FoxPro Driver 6 00 8440 00 Oracle ODBC Driver 8 00 05 00 SUL Server 3 70 06 30 MSSQL GAGEMGEU 5 Enter MSSQL GAGEMG60 for the data source Name In the Description field enter a brief explanation about the data source After you enter the name of the MS SQL server click Next This screen will appear Create a New Data Source to SQL Server Enter the Login ID and Password for your SQL server and then click Next You ll see the Configuration screen If needed change the default database check the box next to this field and enter or select a new database GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 185 Microsoft SQL Server DSN Configuration Ire ate Te Tmporamstarea proGedures ToT prepared Si lP statements LHe StGTEG PIGCEGUTES DAI When POU qisconrmest WHen POU cIsSCGhhest analas sppiopiate Wile Vou RETE CGH eGten USE Ine TalGyer SUL Seven ie pinay se Sevens Hot avalawe lt Back one cm Hee 10 Now click the Next button You should see a screen similar to this one Create a New Data Source to SQL Server BIGVISE 11 Click Finish The SQL Server Setup screen will appear 12 Tocheckthe data source click Test Data Source If you
174. by these specifications 83 A3 Gage Frequency Adjusting Interval Reliability Target po Significance Threshold p3 Number Format f 0000 M Recommended Significance Calibration Frequency Change Level Pre approved 30 0000 Days 67 5000 0 2684 E 6 0000 Months 3 6000 0 0006 r 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 Gage Type Remove Re calculate Record I 4 1 gt pl rx of 2 Field Button Name Reliability Target Description This is the desired end of period reliability i e the desired probability that the as found condition of the gage will be in tolerance at the end of the calibration period after the optimum calibration frequency has been achieved GAGEtrak will recommend changes to the calibration frequency until the specified reliability is obtained The default Reliability Target is 8096 Specifying higher reliability will result in more frequent calibration You can t change this here To change this go to Setup Settings Cal Options A3 Adjusting Calibration Frequency Setting Number Format Choose the number of decimal places you want to be displayed Significance Threshold This is the maximum amount of risk GAGEtrak will take in recommending a change i e the risk that a recommended change will turn out not to have been necessary The default is 0 3 Specifying lower significance will increase the number of calibrations required to make a decision You can t change this h
175. c nian nese nie aids aa weenie siete 226 Sel Slatus Of Gages xe tensa aa ca laa Dn e Du alae 226 Chapter 8 Customizing Reports o osococoososososososososososococoosososososososososososococoososososososososososocoesososeoesososossssseso 227 Using Custom Reborte oirin aS AEE A aes 227 Create Edit REDOR aiina ae N E E EE T TE T N TERTE T E NA 227 GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual xi Creating a NEw REDOT sissano EO t e Ee T oa iv RE HI DI RIDES caiman Aa aA la aaa 228 User Im Clare ee On One E E 229 Opening a Data SOLE G6 55 ioo iof ion c tes ares vid o EL uL E to Dos iat iac tat omn DM dcm e zm med c SD af a te ua etna TuS 230 SIMPE OUSLY Er rep C e 230 Advanced QUGrPy uic isst o etai cde TO DR RD DRE DETECTOR NE vOv c ent cocti OS Ted 232 Direct SO Ll QUSy 15 s daran SOC OD don eR ed CI iMd deve ve acu b e cs uu 234 Se tiineieE ioU 236 Grouping Your Dade ed do bei ES en cot baa e oo dece uds toe Vots ize tegen cana o tea Ave a Lo te opel cial 236 Creating the Detalle niti o d o bdo Ea M ito D read e vie nate obe UU op Ree MR De Po rU MEA CH Pe Roe eU RUM 238 Report senings ondas ic e e tote EO Co t etat MES fen hentci an tuii ca tipo PEU CI Sena UU ote tup t CL fea eS ata 238 Completing Your Report Layout resini a M 241 SUD REDON Sisa s nec EU I EE PRA E RE Ee E VEA SEE EIL DRE Rec arora ates 243 Creating a SUDsReDOFL iiit e he ttl i o e etre d a cre cd RU des L
176. can be enabled and or disabled under Automatic Numbering To clone more gage records based on the selected scheme continue clicking the Clone button Cloning a gage will not clone all information related to the gage ID being cloned for example history and calbration dates Click the close button in the window s title bar when you re finished Other Gage Entry Options We ll discuss each of these options in more detail in the User s Manual Tab Button Name Description History This tab shows all calibration history for the gage It sorts the calibration history by date in descending order Parts Use these records to define the parts and operations for which you will use the gage Associating this information facilitates traceability to manufacturing Before you can associate parts with a gage enter the part records in Part Entry Procedures The Procedures tab lets you link a procedure to each gage You must enter the procedure in Procedure Entry before you can access it in this screen User Defined These fields can be used to store additional information and can be customized the label names changed and the Data Types altered in Setup Settings Interface Authorized Persons Includes names of persons authorized to use or Issue Return a gage Attachments The Attachments tab lets you attach any kind of file to your gage record Events This tab allows you to set up events associated with a particular gage Graph To view an accuracy ch
177. can select the title of a report in the listing and click the Edit Selected Report button to open the selected report for editing or you can click Create New Report to create a report completely from scratch For you to better understand the report editor canvas we ll start with a blank report and discuss each of the elements of the canvas 227 228 Chapter 8 Customizing Reports Creating a New Report GAGEtrak 6 s report editor comes with templates to help you build reports If you have a label printer using the most common label formats will fast track your label design You may also use the Label Wizard to develop new label designs quickly The report editor screen is common to all the templates For our purposes we will base our discussion on a basic blank report and build as we move along Towards the end of the discussion we will touch on the Label Wizard as a review of what we ve learned When you click the Create New Report button the window below will appear S 3 8 Inch Label 1 2 Inch Label 3 4 Inch Label 1 Inch Label m N 1 1 2 Inch Label Label Wizard Select Blank Report and click on the 0K button Ex Report Designer New Report File Edit Yiew Insert Format Tools Help D c HB Sm B E Gs Ac abl IV gj 5 o ELE i ga 2 I SI oF Me Ws JE ECTS Design Preview J r Baw Of lani x EE MainReport H PageHeader H Detail gea PageFooter Property ToolBox
178. cess database version of GAGEtrak 6 Database dbType 0 UseDSN UseFileDSN File G7DATA60 MDB Path C G7W6 DSN FileDSN Driver Server Database 182 Chapter 1 Installation UID PWD APA DBA DBQ PFC TLL TLO Install InstallCode Chapter 2 MS SQL Installation If you re going to use GAGEtrak on an MS SQL client server system first install GAGEtrak see chapter 1 for instructions then create the data source name DSN for your setup following the instructions in this chapter Create Data Source Name DSN for MS SQL If you re using GAGEtrak with an MS SQL server follow these steps to create your DSN 1 Click Start then select Settings Control Panel Administrative Tools Double click the Data Sources ODBC icon and the ODBC Data Source Administrator window will appear 2 Goto the System DSN tab ODBC Data Source Administrator HEI UserDSN System DSN File DSN ODBC Drivers Tracing About System Data Sources Add Name Driver Configure An ODBC System data source stores information about how to connect to the indicated data provider A System data source is visible to all users on this machine including NT services OK Cancel 183 184 Chapter 2 MS SQL Installation 3 Click the Add button You ll see a screen similar to this one Create New Data Source Microsoft Excel Driver xls 4 00 4202 00 Microsoft FoxPro Driver d
179. clone a gage fields that are specific to the orginal gage will not be brought over to the cloned gage Some of these fields are Last Calibration Date Next Due Date Gage Frequency Adjusting Interval Minimum Frequency and Maximum Frequency Gage S N and other fields Source Gage ID C 002 Gage Numbering Scheme M New Gage ID 0000000001 Clone Close Enter a new gage ID directly into the New Gage ID field or select a gage numbering scheme from the list box If you select a gage numbering scheme GAGEtrak will automatically input the next subsequent Gage ID for the New Gage ID based on the numbering scheme developed in the Setup Settings Automatic Numbering section refer to Automatic Numbering on page 198 for more information then click Clone Click the Close button in the window s title bar when you re finished To clone more gage records based on the selected scheme continue clicking the Clone button Click the close button in the window s title bar when you re finished If you filtered for just one gage when you re done cloning GAGEtrak will show you the original gage record from which you created the clones If you want to edit your cloned records you ll have to re filter and find them to re filter click the toolbar button that looks like a funnel with a pencil A better way to clone gages is to re filter and find all of your gages beforeyou clone any of them to re filter click the toolbar button that looks like
180. contact Technical Support at 480 922 7300 for assistance Click the Finish button to return to the main DTU window Sample Data Transfer from Version 5 5 Data Similar for Version 5 0 Version 4 0 Version 3 0 Data B3 Data Transfer Utility Record Counts Source Destination Table Record Counts Source Version 5 5 Tables Count Destination Version 5 0 Tables Calib Defined 0 Calib Defined Calibration Header 7 956 Calibration Header Calibration Header Sig 1 564 Calibration Header Sig Calibration Measurement 20 121 Calibration Measurement Calibration Standards 6 443 Calibration Standards CHArchive 0 CHArchive Checkbox 51 Checkbos CMArchive 0 CMArchive ezs Search riteria 69 Jezs SearchCriteria ezy AuditLog 10 064 Jezy AuditLog ezy AuditLogD ata 29 621 Jezy AuditLogData ezy_GroupPermissions 342 Jezy_GroupPermissions ezy_Groups 5 Jezy_Groups ezy_GroupUser 2 Jezy_GroupUser ezy Users 2 jezy Users Field_Labels 962 Field_Labels 1 327 Form_Captions 0 Form Captions 103 Gage Master 2 203 Gage Master 2 203 RGage Master Schedule 0 Gage Master Schedule n Wer ba fale Maer eects Print f Emish ERE been added in Destination Tables f Button GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 261 Sample Data Transfer from Version 3 Archive amp Data Transfer Utility Record Counts DN CI NENNEN ENT LCS NC x CHAhve LT Update Add Reports To Update Add Reports to GAGEt
181. cord New Record 42 Chapter 2 Program Conventions All Records Selection Button Gage Entry COMPARATOR CETGOO2 This small square button is located on the upper left portion of the table just below the control menu icon Click It to select a records in the table Record Expand Contract Symbol Field El iage Entry Benth Desipian Status COMPARATOR 14 Kodak Dr t Date By T Results 9 15 2003 Default User 5 9 2003 Record 4 4 Mo CTG 02 XXE Default User Expands or contracts a record row to show other related tables The symbol is to expand and the is to contract gage ID history Column Field Selector Buttons Ane mum ID Description CALIPER DIAL 14 t Di04 MITUTOYO 0l These small rectangular buttons are located at the top of each column Each button contains the name of the field that it represents Gage ID and Description in the above example When you click on one of these buttons you select the entire column like the Description column shown above You can then work with it as a whole For example click the column selector button to select a column that you want to move or hide Note You cannot move the contents of one column to another column Navigation Buttons Use the navigation buttons located in the bottom left corner of the window to move through the records in the table
182. cordset Fields BCode Value End Sub Here Field10 is the name of the bar code field that you created in your report and BCode Is the data field that you created in setting up your data source This is VBScript Just copy the script and remember to keep the lines 2 3 and 4 together or in one row between Sub and End Sub The line has been divided into 3 parts for illustration purposes only to fit within the page margins In rpt Sections 2 2 is the index number of the Deta lSection You can use rpt Sections Details replacing 2 with Details The double quotes are necessary for Stringsin the statement In our example you start with 0 from the top most section so Deta swill be section 2 The same holds for the Controlssince you do not know the index number of the bar code control you created you can just include the name of the control enclosed in double Alignment 2 ddT Center quotes Controls Field10 BackColor C Bar Widkh 1 Caption CaptionPositior 0 ddbcCaptionNor Direction B ddbcLeftToRight Font 3 of 9 Barcode Forecolor B Mame Sebslrekurns name of control Creating Labels In Report Editor Automatically creating labels is a breeze with the report editor Imagine creating labels manually from a printed list for 100 gages Even with label designer software you would still have to change each label manually unless your software were linked to a database The report editor include
183. ct from the list Owner This field also creates its own list as you enter different gage owners Issue Return Button To loan this gage out and or return it click this button see page 67 Clone Gage Button Click Clone Gageto create a new record based on the current record see page 67 Graph Button If you want to see an accuracy chart for this gage click Graph see page 70 56 Chapter 3 Entering Gage Records Field Button Name Description Calibration Button To go to Calibration Entry for this gage click this button see page 70 Note When you enter Calibration Entry via Gage Entry the calibration records presented will be of historical records for the particular gage ID record you were viewing in Gage Entry In other words if the user is in Gage Entry looking at the gage record for the Gage ID C 002 and selects the Calibration button only the calibration records for C 002 will be visible To create a new calibration record for the particular gage ID select the new record icon button and or the new record button in the record navigator toward the bottom of the form Attach Standards Allows you to attach a Standard Group to the selected Group Type Attach Procedures Allows you to attach a procedure to gages with the selected Gage Type Gage Entry Specifications Gage Entry me x gt Information Specifications History Standards Parts Procedures Calibration Schedule R amp R Schedule User Defined Auth Perso
184. ctedis selected it will override the program default and the ssued 7o in Issue Gages will be populated with the staff list 66 Chapter 3 Entering Gage Records Field Button Name Description Name Authorized person s name Note Information of person s affiliation with use of gage Gage Entry Attachments Gage Entry mea P History Standards Parts Procedures Calibration Schedule R amp R Schedule User Defined Auth Persons Attachments Events 4 oO Gage ID c 002 Description CALIPER DIAL 12 INCH M File File Description b v C 002 Instructions doc Ee Microsoft Word Document Record I 4 1 P gt I gt of 1 View Print Delete Record 14 4 2 b L rx of 56 The table below describes the fields in this area Field Button Name Description File Path of file attachment Selection of files is made easier by selecting the drilldown button to the right of the file field that brings up a Locate File To Attach dialog box for file selection Note Verify that all users of this application have the ability to view the contents of this file This includes both access to the directory where this file is stored and having sufficient network security rights to open this file Description Description of attached file type For example if the attached file is a Microsoft Word document the Description field will contain Microsoft Word Document View Print Button Select this button
185. ctions 3 Open GAGEtrak 6 and select Open Database from the File menu 4 Inthe Open Database screen check the Use ODBC checkbox 5 Place a check in the Use DSN checkbox Important If you used a different Database Name DSN User ID and or Password during installation enter the information you used instead of the values listed below 6 The Database Name should read GageMg60 or the name that you entered during installation 7 The DSN field should show MSSQL GageMg60 the DSN that you entered during installation this value may be different Your user ID should be GageMg60 this field may also vary according to your setup The Password field should contain the password you entered during installation Note that the password Is displayed as asterisks for security purposes GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 181 10 Your screen should look similar to the one below When you re finished click OK Tn 000 xl Database C GTVVE GTSamp60 indb Use ODBC IV Use DSN Iv Required Fields Use File DSN J Schema Owner Database GageMg60 DSN MSSQL GageMg60 bl B FlepSN Browse User ID GageMg60 Password fete Driver Service Name Mg Database Attribute a Application Attributes MM Prefetch Count uu E Transaction Option Translation Library Name DK Test Cancel Configuration File Settings If you want to
186. ctiveness Tab B3 Gage RR Attribute Risk Analysis BEE gt Information Input Crosstabs Effectiveness miss Rate Analysis Signal Detection Study Date 11 01 2002 Co Part No vs Gage ID 022EDigital Caliper 0 6 bd Part No fi 0 221 1 bd Appraiser Score vs Attribute Appraiser vs Self Appraiser vs Reference Appraiser A B t A B t Total Inspected Matched False negative appraiser biased toward rejection False positive appraiser biased toward acceptance Mixed 95 UCL 96 672 Effectiveness 95 LCL System Effective Score System Effective Score vs Reference Appraiser vs Each Other All Appraisers vs Reference Total Inspected Matched 95 UCL Effectiveness 95 LCL 64 033 Prefill Calc Print Record I 4 ll 1b gt i rx of 1 The following fields and buttons are available and apply to each column in which they appear There are comparisons of each appraiser to themselves each other and the reference values from the variable gage Field Button Description Total Inspected Number of parts inspected Matched Number of parts with consistent ratings False Negative Number of parts that were consistently rejected by the appraiser and accepted by the variable gage False Positive Number of parts that were consistently accepted by the appraiser and rejected by the variable gage Mixed Number of parts where an appraiser had inconsistent results 95 UCL A95 Upper Confid
187. cy Adjustment Factorstable This table is preset to use the NCSL RP 1 Method A1 see Appendix B of the User s Manualfor NCSL s address This method increases the existing calibration frequency by 10 if the as found condition of the gage is in tolerance multiplied by 1 1 If the as found condition of the gage is out of tolerance then it reduces the interval by 55 of the existing frequency multiplied by 45 If the gage is new and you ve never calibrated it then the interval remains the same multiplied by 1 Simulation studies show that you achieve measurement reliability target of 95 EOP using this approach EOP stands for End Of Period it refers to the reliability of a gage at the end of its calibration interval You can change the table to use different factors if you need to use another frequency adjustment method Example If the frequency is 30 days and the as found condition before calibration is n tolerance then the frequency would be set to 33 days 1 1 x 30 33 days If the as found condition was out of tolerance the frequency would be automatically reduced to 13 5 days 45 x 30 13 5 days A3 Adjusting Method A3 lets you specify a Reliability Target and requires a certain amount of Calibration Frequency statistical Confidence before deciding that a change is necessary Method A3 tends to Setting eliminate unnecessary changes When a change is found to be necessary method A3 uses formulas that optimize
188. d reports that have been added to GAGEtrak 6 new client server users need to run it in order to transfer the prefilled settings such as status IDs to the client server database If you re a new user with an Access database these settings are already in the database so you do not need to run the DTU After you run the DTU your records will be in both your old and new versions of GAGEtrak However do not use your old version of GAGEtrak use the destination database that was used during the DTU which will contain current records from an earlier version of GAGEtrak to the newest version of GAGEtrak 255 256 Appendix A Data Transfer Utility Running the Data Transfer Utility To run the Data Transfer Utility click the Start button select Programs and then select the GAGEtrak 6 program group Choose Data Transfer Utility from this program group to use the Data Transfer Utility Client Server Versions Before You Run the DTU If you re using a client server version of GAGEtrak you must run scripts to set up your database and tables before you transfer your data To do so click the Run Scripts button on the main DTU screen 83 Data Transfer Utility Wizard The Run Scripts screen will appear The table below contains information about the fields and buttons in this screen 83 Run Scripts ASQL DATABASESYGAGEMGRB MDF ASQL DATABASESYGAGEMGRB LDF QL Server service Hames Lal _testcomnecton
189. d to be compliant with 21 CFR Part 11 select the radio button labeled 21 CFR Part 11 Compliant Application If you are not sure if you are required to comply or not select the standard version of the program Both versions are identical except that the compliant version requires security to be active at all times Select the version of GAGEtrak 6 0 that will be installed Standard Application C 21 CFR Part 11 Compliant Application If your company requires software to be 21 CFR Part 11 compliant select that version of the application If your company does not require this compliancy or you are not sure select the standard application Select the user profile that GAGEtrak will be installed under fyou want every user who logs in to the workstation to see the shortcut for the GAGEtrak application select the radio button labeled Common Users Group This is the default installation fyou want only the current user to see the shortcut for the GAGEtrak application select the radio button labeled Current User Only Select the user profile that GAGEtrak 6 0 will be installed under Common Users Group C Current User Only GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 179 9 If you re using a SQL version of GAGEtrak the installation program now asks where you want to install the database scripts Click the Browse button to select a location If you don t want to install the sc
190. database version of GAGEtrak into the new GAGEtrak 6 database The data transfer may take a few minutes depending on the number of records in your existing database If you select Cancel the DTU will terminate Note If the Source and Destination file path are identical you will be presented with the following message and you must redefine you file paths GAGEtrak 6 0 EX Source database and Destination database are the same Y ou must pick a different database 260 Appendix A Data Transfer Utility When the transfer is finished you ll see this message Transfer Completed G Data Transfer Complete Click OK will be presented with the Data Transfer Utility Records Count screen where you can check the transfer and verify that it was successful This screen is different for each version but the general instructions are the same The Record Count values in the Destination tables should be greater than or equal to the Record Count values in the Source tables for those table names that appear in both sections You can ignore the table names on the Destination list that have no corresponding name on the Source list these are GAGEtrak 6 s new tables the report control table will always be higher on the Destination side when you are transferring data from Version 3 If the Record Count value for a Destination table is not greater than or equal to the value in the corresponding Source table print the form select File Print and
191. date Gage ID Select the gage ID of the measurement device Gage Desc In this field you ll see the name of the gage or measurement device Study Type GAGEtrak automatically sets this field to Stability Appraiser Enter the name of the person conducting the study Approved Select if study is approved Comments Use this field to enter any comments Co Part No Enter your internal company part or job number if parts were used Part No Select a related part number such as the customer or supplier part number 144 Chapter 12 MSA Entry Field Button Name Description Part Desc This field shows the description or name of the part Characteristic In this field you ll see the characteristic that you re evaluating Number Format Select the format you want for calculations Percentage Format Select the format you want for calculations Resolution Enter the resolution of the gage This controls the minimum resolution of the Histogram chart Reference Value The value of the reference standard used in the study Used to calculate Bias Use Range Method If selected bias statistics will be calculated from an R chart otherwise the RMS standard deviation will be used Use Historic If selected control limits will be calculated from historic values of X bar and sigma Historic X Bar If available enter a known value for the grand average This might be known from a Linearity or Bias study or from a previous Stability study Historic
192. dget DF Row3 Text 50 Budget Uncert Row4 Text 50 Budget Type Row4 Text 50 Budget PlusMinus Row4 Single 4 Budget Prob Row4 Text 50 Budget Divisor RowA Single 4 Budget SensiCOE Row4 Single 4 Budget UncertCont Row4 Single 4 Budget DF RowA4 Text 50 Budget Uncert Row5 Text 50 Budget Type Row5 Text 50 Budget PlusMinus Row5 Single 4 Budget Prob Row5 Text 50 Budget Divisor Row5 Single 4 Budget SensiCOE Row5 Single 4 Budget UncertCont Row5 Single 4 Budget DF Row5 Text 50 Budget Uncert Row Text 50 Budget Type Row Text 50 Budget PlusMinus Row Single 4 Budget Prob Row Text 50 Budget Divisor Row Single 4 Budget SensiCOE Row Single 4 Budget UncertCont Row Single 4 Budget DF Row Text 50 Budget Uncert Row7 Text 50 298 Appendix B Table Definitions Field List Data Type Length Budget Type Row7 Text 50 Budget PlusMinus Row7 Single 4 Budget Prob Row7 Text 50 Budget Divisor Row7 Single 4 Budget SensiCOE Row7 Single 4 Budget UncertCont Row7 Single 4 Budget DF Row7 Text 50 Budget Uncert Row8 Text 50 Budget Type Row8 Text 50 Budget PlusMinus Row8 Single 4 Budget Prob Row8 Text 50 Budget Divisor Row8 Single 4 Budget SensiCOE Row8 Single 4 Budget UncertCont Row8 Single Budget DF Row8 Text 50 tPercentConfidence Single 4 kCoverageFactor Single 4 CombiUncert UC Single 4 CombiUncert DF Single 4 ExpUncert UC Single 4 Table Name User Defined Description User defined information Associated From frmGageCustom Field List Data
193. dure name or click Undo Procedure In this field enter the text of the procedure You can set the font size color underline bold and other formatting options by clicking the Open Editor button Remove If you want to keep the procedure in your database but remove it from your gages click Remove This action removes the procedure from all attached gages but keeps itin Procedure Entry for your reference If you want to remove a procedure only from a particular gage go to Gage Entry Open Editor Opens an external text editor program for editing procedure information 75 76 Chapter 5 Entering Procedure Records Copying Procedures from Another Windows Application You can use Windows Clipboard to copy procedures from other programs If you want to paste a procedure from the Clipboard 1 Open the program that contains the procedure you want to copy Highlight the text and then press CTRL C to copy it to Windows Clipboard In GAGEtrak s Procedure screen first enter a procedure name Next click within the Procedure textbox field Press CTRL V to paste the procedure SE dee qe CalPro Calibration Procedures INDEX OF CALIBRATION FOURES To help save time when you re entering procedures CyberMetrics Corporation offers an optional add on product called CalPro CalPro is a database of complete step by step calibration procedures covering everything from gage blocks to micrometers and calipers CalPro procedures are industry
194. e SST Issued To am Issued Dept d Promised Date 1 SELECTION CRITERIA FOR AUTOMATIC GAGE SELECTION Manufacturer M Storage Location Current Location M Exclude Gages With No Calibration Schedule Exclude Gages With No Study Schedule Clear Criteria Record I4 1 b prj of 1 Field Button Name Description Issue Date Time These fields are prefilled with the current date and time but are editable fields Type Self building list why kit is being issued Issued To Enter or select a name from the dropdown list box of the person to whom you issue the kit Issued Depart Kit issued to what department Promised Date Expected kit return date GAGEtrak uses the following rule to manage the issuance of Kits 1 When you issue a kit GAGEtrak inserts the current date and time as the issue date and time It also changes the kit s Current Location field to a description that consists of Issued To plus Issued Dept for example 675 Job 7512 Final Assy 2 When a gage is returned GAGEtrak shows it as an open issue record allowing for the received date and time to be entered After you enter the Received Date and Time and save the record GAGEtrak changes the kit s Current Location field to its Storage Location 84 Chapter 7 Kit Entry Selection Criteria for Automatic Gage Selection Field Button Name Description Manufacturer Gages will be selected based on specific Manufacturer criteria
195. e ID E Status fi Ref Standard Gage S N 40 Chapter 2 Program Conventions You can use the record selector bar a tall rectangular bar located on the left side of the form to select the entire record for copying or deletion You can also use it to save any changes made to the record if you change anything an icon of a pencil appears on the bar click on the bar to write your changes to the database Record Selector Bar Symbols gt Current Record New Record Navigation Buttons Use the navigation buttons located at the bottom left corner of the form to move through your records Each buttons has an arrow on it that indicates its navigation direction IN First Record 2 Next Record Create New Record Previous Record gt t Last Record Record Allows you to type in the record number that you want to go to Example If you have 250 records and you want to go to the sixteenth record enter 16 in the Record box then press ENTER to go to that record Scroll Bars 12 Inch Vernier Cal Caliper Analog 12 Inch Vernier Cal 1 Inch Gage Block i 2 Inch Gage Block j 3 Inch Gage Block h 4 Inch Gage Block n b amete er You might see scroll bars on the right the bottom or both sides of a form Use them to go to portions of the form that you can t see Jab Selectors Information Specifications History Standards Parts Procedures Calibration Schedule R amp R Schedule User Defined Aut
196. e Preview tab E PageFooter 230 Chapter 8 Customizing Reports Opening a Data Source When you create a report you must first connect to a data source The fields for your report will come from this data source On the toolbar select the button labeled Set or Build SQL Source for the Report as shown H Report Designer New Report ini x File Edit Yiew Insert Format Tools Help Design Preview HLTH E MainReport PageHeader UL RH PageFooter Create a new SQL Record Source for your report Property ToolBox ActiveReport SA AllowSplitters True documentName ActiveReports Docum MaxPages 0 Printwidth 9360 RulerVisible True ScriptDebuggel False ScriptLanguage VBScript l_ o 1 gt 1 Ready a Z The Report SQL Entry Main window will appear as shown with New SQL Source selected This is the only way you can make a connection to a data source so you must click OK to proceed The SQL Builder dialog box appears giving you three types of queries to choose from SQL Builder Select Query Type What type of Report Query would you like to build Display fields from a single table in the Database Recommended for Single Table Reports C Advanced Query Display multiple fields from multiple tables in the Database using User Defined table relationships Used for Repo
197. e Text key 50 MenuCustomName Text 50 Table Name MenuBarNamesSubMenu Description File submenu custom names Associated From Submenus Field List Data Type Length MenuBarName Text key 50 MenuDefaultName Text key 50 MBDefaultName Text key 50 MBCustomName Text 50 Table Name MenuBarNamesSubSub Description File sub submenu custom names Associated From Sub submenus Field List Data Type Length MenuBarName Text key 50 MenuDefaultName Text key 50 MBDefaultName Text key 50 SubMenuDefaultName Text key 50 SubMenuCustomName Text 50 Table Name Number Format Description Number Format Associated From NumberFormat Field List Data Type Length NumberField Text key 50 NumberLink Text key 50 NumberFormat Text 50 LastNumber Text 50 Table Name Part Master Description Contains attributes of every part record Associated From Edit Part Record Parts Parts Master Entry Parts Measured SubForm Field List Data Type Length Gage ID Text 50 Part No Text key 50 Description Text 50 Operation Text 50 Drawing_No Text 50 Drawing_Date Date Time 8 Change_Level Text 50 Change_Date Date Time Insp_ Procedure Memo 288 Appendix B Table Definitions Field List Data Type Length User Defined1 Text 50 User Defined2 Text 50 Table Name Part Meas With Gage Type Description Relates parts measured with by a particular Kit Associated From Parts Measured SubForm Field List Data Type Length Kit ID Text k
198. e backup procedure click on the Automatic Backup button You will be prompted to insert a diskette then a dialog box will appear asking you to confirm that you want to erase any files on the diskette Click OK to confirm a progress meter will show you the percentage of completion If the backup requires more than one diskette the program will ask you to insert another disk Data Backup E ETE e Select Automatic Backup to automatically create a backup of the current database Select Automatic Restore if the backup was created with Automatic Backup Automatic Backup Automatic Restore When the backup is finished you ll see this message Successful Operation X Operation completed successfully Your data is now backed up For future reference clearly label the backup diskette s with the date or day of the week and diskette number The resulting backup files will be compressed in the industry standard ZIP format This means that you can use other utilities such as PKZIP PC Tools WinZip or Norton to restore your files Automatic Restore To restore your database file insert your backup diskette in the floppy drive and click the Automatic Restore button in the Automatic tab of the Data Backup window If your backup used more than one diskette use the astdiskette of the set first If a database file exists with the same name as the database file you are restoring you will be prompted to rename the file y
199. e basic gage numbering as defined to the left of this form Typical functionality for Calibration Certificate and Service Request Numbering To exit this screen without saving your changes click the Cance button If you want to save your changes click C oseto return to the main menu GAGEtrak provides a way to customize the appearance of the user interface of forms labels tabs and much more Listed below are descriptions and options available to users for customization GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 199 Settings Custom Label This screen lets you modify the text labels of the fields you can use in the GAGEtrak 6 program User Info General Cal Options Calendar Security Automatic Numbering Interface Custom Labels Gage Custom Calibration Custom Form Captions Form Tabs Main Menu Menu Bar Messages Menu Colors Field Name Label Text Default Label Text Font Weight PO ctv n Active Nomal Bold il h mm ss AMPM h mm ss AMPM h mm ss AMPM Normal Bold Tolerance Tolerance Tolerance Moral Bold Tolerance Tolerance Record I 4 1 b gt i Ea of 1379 Report Label Options Open Normally C Open with default label text Cancel Close The table below describes the fields on this form Field Button Name Description Field Name Default text used to describe the field in GAGEtrak Label Text Text that
200. e deletion of DiaUs 83 Gage Entry me EG gt Information Specifications History Standards Parts Procedures Calibration Schedule R amp R Schedule User Defined Auth Persons Gage ID C 002 Description CALIPER DIAL 12 INCH Status 1 v Active Storage Location BIN 12 M Ref Standard V NIST Nof M Current Location Bob Smith Deta Gage S N sv 38034574 Service Date fi 1 13 2004 Asset No Retirement Date Model No Supplier Code General M Type BE M Cost 234 00 Unit of Meas Attribute Purchase Date 171 3 1987 Bore Gage Notes BIB User Defined Digital DIGITAL FORCE GAUGE Manufacturer STARRETT m Digital V ariable Digital Variable Owner COMPANY A DROP INDICATOR FEELER GAGE SET FIXTURE FLOWMETER GAGE BLOCK S Hardness Tester lssue Retum Cloni MICROMETER Attach Standards Attach Procedures PLUG GAGE Record 14 4 ice Step Gage THREAD GAGE Quick Sort Command You can use the Quick Sort command from the Records menu to perform a simple sort of your records based on the currently selected field s When you select this command you ll see a submenu that enables you to sort in ascending or descending order see below The sorted records return to their original order when you close the form or table Ascending Descending A Z or 0 100 Z A or 100 0 Edit Filter Sort Criteria In addition to sorting you can enter a criteria expression to find onl
201. e first measurement for Part 2 Subsequent clicking of the TAB or ENTER key after entering the measurements will advance you to all of the parts and all of the trials for Appraiser Click the tabs for Appraiser B and Appraiser C if required and follow the Same procedure Mz R amp R Study P Information Appraiser A appraiser 5 Appraiser C Study Date Co Pait No MSA 0 221 2 Gage ID 022 Digtal Caliper 0 6 M Gage Desc 4ssessment Data Part Desc Bracket Lt Hand Record 14 ff o vt p of 3 Button Name Description Prefill If most of your measurements begin with the same numbers such as 1 1651 1 1650 and 1 1658 you can save time by prefilling the measurements with those digits In this case click the Prefill button and then enter a Prefillvalue of 1 165 Now you need to enter only the last digit of each measurement Before using Prefil enter the number of trials and appraisers for the study GRR Study Screens The table below explains each of the fields in the GRR screens Field Name Description Study Date This field shows the date of the study defaults to the current date Gage ID Using the drop down list box select the ID of the gage Gage Desc This field shows the name of the gage or measurement device Appraisers In this field enter the number of appraisers used in the study Trials Enter the number of measurement tests that each appraiser performed either two or three Study T
202. e in the same location as your database named GTDATA60 EMP Copy this empty data file for each additional database that you want to use Before you add a new data file you may want to create a new folder in which to store it Use Windows Explorer or My Computer to create the new folder You can name your folder to identify which GTDATA60 MDB file it contains such as PLANT5 or CALIPERS or by the name of a customer or a supplier For example if you had a database for three locations you might name your folders as follows C GTW6 CHICAGO GTDATA60 MDB C GTW6 MIAMI GTDATA60 MDB C GTW6 SEATTLE GTDATA60 MDB After you ve created your new database run GAGEtrak and select File Open Database while in the main menu Click the Browse button to navigate to the new directory containing the second GTDATA60 MDB file then click OK In the lower right corner of the main menu you ll find the name of the database file that you re currently using as shown here C Program Files Tw5 GT S amp60 mdb GAGEtrak will remember which database file you last opened even if you quit the program and restart it later To open and use your original GTDATA60 MDB file select File Open Database again but this time go to your original directory usually CAGTW6 Important Currently no easy method exists for transferring records between databases Although you can use the Copy and Paste approach it s cumbersome and error prone you must be extremely care
203. e left to use the gage before it is due for calibration Notes Use this field for important comments such as damages or malfunctions GAGEtrak uses the following rules to manage Issue Tracking records 1 When you issue a gage GAGEtrak inserts the current date and time as the issue date and time It also changes the gage s Current Location field to a description that consists of Issued To plus Issued Dept For example Joe Jones Assembly 2 GAGEtrak assumes you want to return a gage if its current record is incomplete After you enter the Received Date and Time and save the record GAGEtrak changes the gage s Current Location field to its storage location Pop Up Issue Information In the Gage Entry Information tab the Current Location field turns yellow to show that the gage Is currently issued out Double click on this field to open a pop up window that shows you the date time person department and part information from Issue Tracking Double click anywhere in the pop up window to close it x Issue Date 227 2000 Issue Time ETI3PM Issued To jBBSMTH Issued Dept Eoo Part No 022010 70 Chapter 3 Entering Gage Records Cloning Gage Records If you want to copy a particular gage record ncluding its set of calibration standards procedures and parts click the Clone Gage button located at the bottom of the Gage Entry window This window will appear Clone Gage x When you
204. e of gages belonging to a particular Kit Associated From Kit Entry Field List Data Type Length Kit ID Text key 50 Gage ID Text key 50 KitGageUseCheck Long Integer KitGageUseMemo Memo 0 KitGageUseDesc Text 50 Table Name Label Hdr Description Contains attributes of every label type Associated From Labels Field List Data Type Length Label Name Text key 50 Description Text 50 Height Text 25 Width Text 25 FontSize Text 10 Font Text 20 Columns Text 1 Field Label Long Integer 4 Logo Long Integer Company Logo Long Binary 0 Logo Align Text 50 H Company Long Integer 4 H Company2 Long Integer 4 Text Align Text 50 Field Align Text 50 LT1 C1 Text 255 LT2 C1 Text 255 LT3 C1 Text 255 LTA4 C1 Text 255 LT5 C1 Text 255 LT6 C1 Text 255 LT7 C1 Text 255 LT8 C1 Text 255 LF1 C1 Text 255 LF2 C1 Text 255 LF3 C1 Text 255 LF4 C1 Text 255 LF5 C1 Text 255 LF6 C1 Text 255 LF7 C1 Text 255 LF8 C1 Text 255 LT1 C2 Text 255 LT2 C2 Text 255 LT3 C2 Text 255 LT4 C2 Text 255 LT5 C2 Text 255 LT6 C2 Text 255 LT7 C2 Text 255 LT8 C2 Text 255 GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 285 Field List Data Type Length LF1 C2 Text 255 LF2 C2 Text 255 LF3 C2 Text 255 LF4 C2 Text 255 LF5 C2 Text 255 LF6 C2 Text 255 LF7 C2 Text 255 LF8 C2 Text 255 Table Name Letter Description Service Request notification and update letters Associated From Edit Service Request Letter Letter Entry Field List Data
205. e style ddda dd MMMM yyyy Maintaining Your Hard Drive We highly recommend that you run the Windows ScanDisk and Disk Defragmenter utilities to keep your hard disk running smoothly Run ScanDisk each week to clean up cross linked files and other problems Next run Disk Defragmenter to reorganize your files this keeps your files from being spread out in pieces all over the hard drive 303 304 Appendix D System Maintenance and Troubleshooting Your disk accesses will run somewhat faster and your hard drive will be less prone to problems To run these utilities check the Start button select Programs then choose Accessories Highlight System Tools then select the utility and follow the directions on your screen Please check with your IT department or whoever Is responsible for maintaining your computer before running these utilities We also recommend making sure you have a current backup of your GAGEtrak data before performing any hard drive maintenance Maximizing Your Performance We recommend that you keep a large amount of empty hard drive space for your operating system s virtual memory management If you have limited resources and GAGEtrak runs slowly try closing all other applications to devote all available system resources to GAGEtrak Installation Fails If for any reason you can t install your CD or you receive any error messages during installation try reinstalling the CD If installation fails again p
206. e tables Importing Data You can import data into the same tables from which you can export using the same filenames and file types as for the Export utility Export Import fel x Export Import Table s To Import Format to Import From Calibration Header Text Calibration Measurements Gage Calibration Standards Saved Advanced Filters Custom Field Labels Gage Records Gage Part Links Import T able s The easiest way to import data is to first export data from GAGEtrak s empty database to the file format of your choice You ll then have the exact import configuration in place for the file Next open the file and duplicate its configuration for a file you already have or add the records you want to import to the file created by the export In order to import files you must name them as shown with the appropriate file extension of TXT or XLS Make sure that you put the files you re importing into the same directory as your GAGEtrak program file GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 223 Data Tools Modify License Modify License is only used when GAGEtrak s 30 day evaluation period is about to expire Based on your demo expiration date GAGEtrak provides an easy way for you to continue your license you will first be presented with the following message xi The expiration date for this software has been set to expire 30 days from now Within this time period you will need
207. ecific to the GAGEtrak program you must set up user IDs and passwords in Security see page 204 Require Password Check this checkbox to require users to change their logon passwords at intervals Changes chosen by the administrator When this option is selected you may select any Number of Days Before Password Change The default interval is 14 days Minimum Password Enter the minimum number of characters GAGEtrak will allow for user defined Length passwords User Login Timeout Enter the number of minutes of inactivity GAGEtrak will allow before automatically Period logging out a user This feature is only available if Enable Security is activated Note When the time period is changed you will have to restart the program before the change in duration of inactivity period will take effect When the time has been exceeded and there has been no activity in the current session the user will be prompted to log back into the application For a 21 CFR installation only a non zero whole number can be entered for the User Login Timeout Period For a Standard Installation a zero value can be entered to disable the login prompt but still maintaining security GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 197 Field Button Name Description Email the ff Enter a list of e mail addresses separated by semicolons that will receive an recipients automatic e mail notification based on the number set in Unsuccessful Login Attem
208. ect the type of object you want associated with the procedure then click 0K When you select an object type the program in which you created the object opens so that you can edit the image if necessary When you re finished just click inside the OLE object box which links the object to the associated procedure and returns you to Procedure Image Procedure Entry Procedure Attachments In the Procedure Attachments screen you can attach additional information related to the specific procedure name for example an amendment to the existing procedure explaining revised processes Procedure Entry Fe fen FS gt Procedure Text Procedure Image Attachments Gage List Procedure Name CP22E Revision 12 01 99 File File Description E 5 W NC 002 Procedure doc EE Microsoft W ord Document HN gt Record 4 4 1 gt rl gt gt of 1 View Record I 4 1 gt gt I gt gt of 5 This screen contains the following fields Field Button Name Description File The File textbox can accept manual input of a path and file name of files to attach to a procedure or you can select the drilldown button to the right of the File textbox and browse for the path and file name with the help of Locate File To Attach form Note Verify that all users of this application have the ability to view the contents of this file This includes both access to the directory where this file is stored and having sufficient net
209. ed Fite to view Neve OO OOO Lnabie to View Print the selected File Please make sure that the file exist or is Cannot open fle fou are about to overwrite information in an existing record Do you wish to con Field Overwrite Warning Gage ID can not be dupiicated Oo Duplicate 5 8 Please Enter vaid Date value Date Input Validation OOO The folowing enor occured amp Eror amp Chr 13 amp In Module Maintenance Enty OOOO fhe cunent user is not the user who signed this record Oooo Tris record has an approval signature please unsin it frst WOOO Record I4 4 1 gt MJ of 579 Cancel Close The table below describes the fields on this form Field Button Name Description Message Text Input text to collectively explain the need for the message Message Title Select a simple title that allows explains at a glance what the message is pertaining to for example Cannot open file contains the message Unable to View Print the selected File Please make sure that the file exist or is not corrupted Cancel To exit this screen without saving your changes click the Cance button Close If you want to save your changes click Close to return to the main menu Settings Menu Colors The user interface menu colors can be customized by selecting the Menu Colors tab in the Settings Interface section GAGEtrak provides eight 8
210. ed NOE dice RU ae Mcd Mt EN cite in 243 Adding ai SUD RED OE 50r o he i oo aa c ah ebd e obi b D bcdnte d udis ri picsenes as 245 Addinga Bar COGS RR 246 Creating Labels Im Report Editor idea e p tito notiert o dp hd ete ices eile ieee eles eee ee 248 CUSLOTb LaDeb eo scene e RO ys IO DR Sete Na MM OS e OPS A SOS SOR TG uM NTA E rt Se ar 249 ADSL WI Zar Mee er M I 250 Ft nning the Data TranStar Wty soa edo a o aoo oe ESOS EAE EIE IE E e 256 Client Server Versions Before You Run the DTU 4eeeeeeeeeeeeee eene ene een ettet enne ttns einst tasses stia s sense tisse ense tasses stans sense essen se 256 Data Transfer Instructions Version 5 5 5 4 and 3 Access Users to Client Server Version 6 0 eese 258 Converting your database file GTDATA55 MDB GTDATA50 MDB GTDATA40 MDB and DATA9731 MDB scscsssssssssssssesseceesecsecees 258 Data Transfer Instructions for Version 3 Archive File cccccccccccccccccssssssccccssscccccccccsssssscccscccsssccccesccssssssscsccccsssccccesecssssees 259 Converting your archive file ARCH9731 MDB or ARCH9735 MDB sssscssssssssssssssccssesceccceasessaceesecseceessceececsaceecacsaceecaseasecsaceaseceacnsaceasess 259 All Versions Verity Data Transfer esce otn rhe t eaa ner ENSE Dn Tis irte ua osea situer tes QUERN UN GU UE RISO I DAS NK nasser 259 Sample Data Transfer from Version 5 5 Data Similar for Ver
211. ed reports you can rest assured that you ll be able to quickly and accurately retrieve any calibration information that your auditor asks to see Finally GAGEtrak s features and optional accessories helped you with one extremely important task ensuring your company s compliance with ISO 9001 2000 and QS 9000 Chapter 3 Installing and Running GAGEtrak Now that you ve seen how GAGEtrak works it s time to install your software The following instructions will tell you how to install and run the software quickly allowing you to evaluate its major functions For more detailed information please consult your System Administrator s Guide and User s Manual which are located elsewhere in this publication Program Requirements GAGEtrak 6 Workstation Requirements Microsoft Windows 98 2000 or XP Hard disk with 200 MB of free space for program files plus 100 MB for a typical database 512 MB or higher RAM Pentium 1 4 MHz CPU required Pentium 2 4GHz or current technology recommended SVGA monitor at 800 x 600 resolution or higher Microsoft Internet Explorer Version 6 x Mouse or compatible pointing device Default Windows printer for printing reports GAGEtrak 6 Network Requirements Optional This section will only apply if the data file will be shared over the network or will be part of a regular network backup Network folder with full rights for each GAGEtrak user 100 MB LAN Installing GAGEtrak The System Administra
212. edure Report Thru Gage DWS 8002 W000 A TEE Type Description DIAL BORE GA 2 4 N Vendor asdf Frequency 6 EOM Location Next Due Date 11 30 2001 Account No Labor Hours Reference No Labor Cost Material Cost Other Cost Sub report of procedures attached to each gage record Results Comments Link fields are very critical They must be of the same type they may not have the same name but should have the PROCEDURES EET Rm same content However here File Path we have made sure that fields 05 TESTINDICATORS of the same name have the same type of data Also primary key fields common fields with unique values used to link tables must have the same kind of content 20 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Calibrated By Approved By Sub reports are designed in a separate design canvas and then linked into the main report document You must make sure that it contains a least one field that is common with the table you are linking it to contents and type The beauty of sub reports is that they can be used over and over again in different reports so what you design once can be used many times Creating a Sub Report Creating sub reports is much like creating any other report click on Custom Reports under Setup then click on the Create New Report button to view t
213. edure for calibrating too You use Ca Pro a database of step by step calibration procedures that covers everything from gage blocks to micrometers and calipers Thanks to Ca Pro you don t have to waste time researching or creating calibration procedures You can simply import the procedures directly into GAGEtrak Using Ca Proalso helps your company comply with ISO 9001 2000 and QS 9000 quality standards INDEX OF CALIBRATION MAEDLIIES After lunch you spend the afternoon calibrating some gages yourself One of the gages you calibrate is the new electronic gage you received this morning The output from this gage is transmitted through one of the serial ports on your PC You re using the So tware Wedge program to capture this real time data and automatically insert the gage s measurements into GAGEtrak s Calibration Measurements screen Once you ve finished you use the GAGEtrak Calibration Label Kitto print out a calibration label for each gage These laminated durable labels are oil and water resistant and they re easy to print and apply to your gages GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software Quick Start Guide 7 Calibration Entry gt Calibration Measurements Procedures Labels Signature Attachments User Defined Calibration Scans Gage ID c 002 M Select Label Design Reportn ame Calibration Failed 1 2 x 3L Calibration Label 1 2W x 1L Calibration Label 1 2 x 2L Calibration Label 1 2 x 3L Calibration
214. een click the This Study button that s in the View section Use the Data Sheet buttons to print or preview a blank data collection sheet you can use to record measurements during the study 120 Chapter 12 MSA Entry If you want the two page report the second page is an analysis report that includes more detail place a check in the Include Analysis Sheet checkbox Generating Charts The GRR Module offers an extensive variety of charts to help you determine the causes of measurement error To generate a chart from your Average and Range study click the Charts button and the Gage R amp R Charts menu will appear BS Gage R amp R Charts i jo x Select a Chart Range Chart by Appraiser Part Whiskers Charts by Appraiser Part __ Range Chart by Part Appraiser __ x Y Plot of Averages by Size Error Chart a Comparison X Y Plots by Appraiser __ Run Chart by Part __ Scatter Plot es Average Chart by Part md Repeatability Range Control Chart j Normalized Individuals Chart by Part Appraiser ped Part Appraiser amp verage Control Chart n Normalized Individuals Chart by Appraiser Part fani Residual Plot by Size Normalized Error Histogram Chart by Appraiser Close Printing or Sending Charts Each chart has a button for Print and a button for Send as an e mail attachment We ll discuss each type of chart next Range Chart by Appraiser Part and by Part Appraiser Using a standard range chart this chart plots the ra
215. el 1 4 Inch Label n Cancel TO F F p 3 8 Inch Label 1 2 Inch Label 3 4 Inch Label 1 Inch Label cx N 1 1 2 Inch Label HRT ah ne Click OK then follow the steps listed below 1 Select Label Printer Select from a list of all available printers You should have a least one label printer In the absence of one the program will try to approximate the smallest possible printable size for your printer After you have made your selection go on to the next step by clicking on the Next button Select Label Printer Choose from printers list below CYBER MAINSHP LaserJet 4V ActiveT ouch Document Loader Brother PT 9200D Cancel Next gt gt 2 Select Label Size Select from a scrollable list of available paper sizes supported by your printer 4 GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 251 ti Label Designer Wizard Set Label Size Paper Size Paper Sizes zl VWidth 0 inch Height 0 inch Cancel lt lt Back Next gt gt This list is automatically taken from your printer information file Clicking on a size from the Paper Size list displays the size of the label in inches in the Width and Height fields located below the paper size list In the design stage you have to consider margins for your printable page For custom label sizes you must enter the dimensions of your label in inches in the Width and Height fields Once you have done this go on to the
216. elected all the columns you want visible click Close Hiding and Displaying Gridlines By default the program shows gridlines around each cell in Table view You can hide the gridlines by choosing Gridlines from the Format menu remove the checkmark for either horizontal vertical or both gridlines within the Gridlines Shown frame to remove the gridlines Changing the Row Height To adjust the height of all rows in a table choose Format Row Height The default row height is 10 5 The default row height will be retained if the Standard Height checkbox is checked Changing the Column Width Choose Column Width from the Format menu to adjust the width of selected columns in a datasheet The default column width is 18 8 The default column width will be retained if the Standard Width checkbox is checked 44 Chapter 2 Program Conventions To Freeze Columns To prevent columns from moving off the screen choose Format Freeze Columns to freeze selected columns on the left side of the window If you haven t selected any columns when you choose this command the program freezes the column that your cursor Is in GAGEtrak adds new frozen columns to the right of existing frozen columns A bold line separates the frozen and unfrozen columns To Unfreeze Columns To release frozen columns choose Format Unfreeze Columns When you unfreeze columns they remain in the same order they were in while frozen You can t unfreeze specific columns you can on
217. election from the Gage Frequency Adjusting Interval field Based on your selection GAGEtrak will automatically adjust calibration frequencies based on the A7or 43 method whenever you enter a new calibration record according to the rules you defined in the Adjustment Calibration Frequency Setting tables Please see the System Administrator s Guidefor more information Tip Do not make an adjusting method selection unless you fully understand this feature and decide that you want GAGEtrak to automatically adjust your calibration frequencies GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 63 Field Button Name Description Minimum Frequency This is the minimum value that GAGEtrak can recommend for a calibration frequency interval The default is 1 but you can change it according to the type of units you use for example perhaps 1 year is too long to be used as a minimum and 1 day is too short Maximum Frequency This is the maximum value that GAGEtrak can recommend for a calibration frequency interval The default is 123 but you can change it according to the type of units you use for example 123 years is a long time Skip Direction If the calibration date falls on a skip date this determines whether to move the calibration date forward or backward Select the default to use the skip direction setup in the Settings form Calibration Hours Enter the actual or estimated time it takes to calibrate the gage Est Calibration Cos
218. election or deselect one character to the left CTRL SHIFT LFT ARROW Extend the selection or deselect one word to the left CTRL C or Copy the selection into Windows Clipboard CTRL INSERT CTRL V or Paste text from Windows Clipboard SHIFT INSERT 50 Chapter 2 Program Conventions Datasheet Table Keyboard Shortcuts Press To TAB ENTER or RGT Move to the next field ARROW HOME Move to the first field in the current record Table view DN ARROW Move to the current field in the next record CTRL DN ARROW Move to the current field in the last record UPARROW Movetothecurentfieldintheprevousrecord _ CTRL UP ARROW Move to the current field in the first record CTRL HOME Move to the first field in the first record Menus and Commands The following is a summary of the various menus available from the menu bar including explanations of the available commands in each File Menu Command Description Close Use this command to close the current screen and return to the prior screen Save Record To save the current record choose File Save Record Output To Select this command to output the current record s to an Excel spreadsheet word processing RTF or ASCII text file Print Setup Choose File Print Setup to define your printer and settings Print Preview To see the current record as it would look if printed select this command Print This command prints the current record performs like a screen dump
219. ement Software System Administrator s Guide 259 Data Transfer Instructions for Version 3 Archive File Converting your archive file ARCH9731 MDB or ARCH9735 MDB Data Transfer Utility Wizard Data Transfer Utility Page 2 of 3 Source Database SEgiamere taka A Version 3 Archive 05 01 1998 Source Connection Inform Version 3 Data 05 01 1998 09 01 1999 11 01 2000 11 15 2001 j 04 28 2003 Version 6 0 New i 04 28 2003 Cancel lt Back gt Transter Data To convert Archived files do the following 1 Under Source Database select Version 3 Archive 2 Click the Browse button on the right of the Source Connection Information field to navigate to your ARCH9731 MDB or ARCH9735 MDB file 3 Select the Next button 4 The Destination Database selection functions the same as the Source Destination Click the small button on the right of the Destination Connection Information field to navigate to your GAGEtrak 6 database GTDATA60 MDBJ 5 Click the Transfer Data button All Versions Verify Data Transfer After you click Transfer Data you will be prompted with the following message Data Transfer Utility Bd AN Transfer Data Procedure This procedure will erase any data in the destination file Y ou may create a backup copy of your existing data for safety purposes Do you wish to continue x J ome If you select OK the transfer of data will begin and GAGEtrak automatically moves your data from the old
220. en your image file If GAGEtrak cannot find the image file in the Location stated in the file path you will be prompted to browse for the file Navigate to your certificate file through the Open File dialog box that appears You will be prompted to change the path in your GAGEtrak database to the selected file Choose Yes to update the file path and open the file Calibrations Export to PDA Import from PDA The PDA Personal Digital Assistant is a hand held computer with a special software utility for transferring your calibration data back and forth between your GAGEtrak program and the Palm Pilot and or iPAQ units GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 109 For information about the PDA s features or purchasing a PDA supported by GAGEtrak please contact CyberMetrics Corporation or your distributor If you already have the PDA please refer to the GAGEtrak PDA Software User s Manualtor instructions Calibrations Standard Group To enter calibration records select Standard Group from the Calibration menu Standard groups are defined using this menu This is the basis of the drop down list for Standard Group in the Gage Entry Standards section B Standard Group lel FS P standard Group Gage List Standard Group Digital Caliper 06 Group Description Digital Caliper 0 In to 6 In Resolution f001 Tolerance 001 Operating Range o to 6 Inches Tolerance 001 Standard ID Type Units Minimum Nominal
221. ence Limit for the Effectiveness score Effectiveness Percent of parts that consistently matched This number should be within the confidence bounds for the other appraisers 95 LCL A 95 Lower Confidence Limit for the Effectiveness score Miss Rate Analysis Tab Gage RR Attribute Risk Analysis gt Information Input Crosstabs Effectiveness Miss Rate Analysis signal Detection Study Date 11 01 2002 Co Part No Msa Gage ID 022EDigital Caliper 0 6 X Part No fi 0 221 1 M Miss Rate per Trial A B t Effectiveness per trial False negative False positive Total Miss Rate per Part System A B C System Effectiveness per part False alarm rate Miss rate per part Total Prefill Calc Print Record I 4 1 gt gt I gt gt of 1 The following fields compare each appraiser to the reference value from a variable gage The system column compares the appraisers as a group to the reference values from the variable gage GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 153 Miss Rate per Trial Field Button Description Effectiveness per trial The percent of trials that agreed with the variable gage False Negative The percent of trials that rejected when the variable gage accepted False Positive The percent of trials that accepted when the variable gage rejected Total All the percentages add up to 100 Miss Rate Per Part Field Button Description Effec
222. ent Software User s Manual 51 Command Description Replace To perform a Find and Replace operation explained on page 45 from the field in which your cursor is located choose Edit Replace View Menu Command Description Form Choose this command to see the record in Form view Datasheet To see records in Datasheet view select this command Format Menu Note These commands are active only in Datasheet view Command Description Font Use this command to change the Table view font doesn t affect Form view Row Height To change the height of all rows select Format Row Height Column Width Select Format Column Width to adjust the width of the selected columnI s Hide Current Column To hide the selected column choose this command Show Hide All Columns Use this command to show or hide all or several columns Freeze Columns You can use this command when you want to freeze the current column so that it is always visible even when you re scrolling to the right Unfreeze Columns To release any frozen column s choose Format Unfreeze Columns Gridlines Use this command to display or hide the horizontal or vertical gridlines Record Menu Command Description GoTo This feature allows you to navigate to first last next or previous records The New Record option will automatically create a new record Quick Sort Use this command to quickly sort by the currently selected field s by either ascending A Z or descending Z
223. epartments use them To check out or return a gage click the Issue Return button at the bottom of the Gage Entry Information screen The Issue Tracking Entry screen will appear 68 Chapter 3 Entering Gage Records Tip You can also issue and return gages by selecting Issue Gages and Return Gages from the Main Records menu However Issue Gages and Return Gages are designed for consecutive gage issues or returns for large batches of gages and to facilitate bar coded data entry Issue Tracking is designed for issuing or returning a single gage Please see page 89 for information on Issue Gages and Return Gages Cumulative Times Used P Gage ID png Issue Date 10 8 2003 Issue Time BAT AM Type Calibration Issued To BobSmith Issued Dept oc m PatNo inzii PO No FO Promised Date 4 24 2003 Issue Label RETURN Received Date 10 15 2003 _ Received Time 1 38PM Received From Bob Smith sts Cycles o Y Use Left 353 Notes Record I4 4 2 gt gt i p of 8 You must use Issue Tracking records for any gage whose calibration schedule is based on usage or cycles instead of elapsed calendar days These records track usage days and operating cycles they also update the next due date and or estimated due date of gages with these frequencies If you consistently use the Part No field you ll create manufacturing traceability For example if you find that a gage is out of tolerance you c
224. er a variable measurement for at least one part that was accepted twenty times out of twenty If you have more than three such parts enter the three smallest Upper Specification Tab Field Button Name Description USL Enter the Upper Specification Limit USL GRR Gage Repeatability and Reproducibility GRR for the Upper Specification Limit Attribute Gages may use different methods for upper and lower specification limits Therefore each has it s own GRR This will appear after you enter data and click on Calc USL Bias Bias for the Upper Specification Limit This will appear after you enter data and click on Calc 0 zero Enter a variable measurement for at least one part that was accepted zero times out of twenty If you have more than three such parts enter the three smallest 1 19 Enter variable measurements for six or more parts with acceptance counts between one and 19 out of twenty If you have more than three parts with the same acceptance count then enter them randomly 20 Enter a variable measurement for at least one part that was accepted twenty times out of twenty If you have more than three such parts enter the three largest Gage Performance Curve This chart shows how the probability of acceptance gradually changes in an f curve near the Specification Limits The horizontal width of the f curve is about six times the repeatability and the horizontal distance between a specification limit and the 50 point on the curve Is
225. ere To change this go to Setup GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 95 Field Button Name Description Settings Cal Options A3 Adjusting Calibration Frequency Setting Significance must be between 0 never change and 1 always change Gage Type Gage Types listed here have one or more gages specified in Gage Entry to use method A3 If a Gage Type has more than one Calibration Frequency in use it may appear more than once Cal Frequency Calibration Frequencies that were used to calculate a current due date are listed here for each listed Gage Type Recommended Change This is a new calibration frequency to be used for the next due date GAGEtrak will recommend a change if the Significance is below the Significance Threshold Significance Level The risk probability that the Recommended Change will turn out not to have been necessary Pre Approved Check here if you want to change the Calibration Frequencies in Gage Entry effective immediately This will not change the current due dates but will affect future due dates starting with the next calibration Since currently scheduled calibrations will continue at the old calibration frequency the Recommended Change will be updated in the future and could possibly revert to no change If that happens you will be asked during each calibration to approve the latest recommended change on a gage by gage basis You will also be asked in the event that you have not checked
226. ere gages and inspection equipment are checked out and then returned for storage By tracking this information you ll identify which gages your company uses the most and who uses those gages You ll also be able to locate any gage Another purpose of these records is to track gage usage times and cycles if you base the gage s calibration schedule on days used or cycles If you consistently use the Part No field you can create manufacturing traceability For example if you find that a gage is out of tolerance you can immediately generate a part recall report listing all parts that you might have measured incorrectly Note You can also issue or return gages one at a time via Gage Entry s Issue Return button however Issue Gages and Return Gages are designed for consecutive gage issues returns and to facilitate bar coded data entry Both screens operate in the same way To issue or return gages go to the Main Records menu and click on Issue Gages or Return Gages as required When you click Issue Gages this screen appears BJ Issue Gages BEE Gage ID CTG002 Past Due Issue Date 10 8 2003 Next Due Date Ref Standard Issue Time 843 AM Type caixaton Issued To Bob Smith l Issued Dept foc mj Pao jzii SY PO No 1 Promised Date 10 15 2003 Storage Location COMPOSITES Current Location COMPOSITES Received Date Received Time EE Received From INNEN Cycles e Notes Clear Form
227. erface If the scanning is successful the scanned image will be displayed in the Image View Control prompting you to save the image and include a description if necessary File Name 0000000004 ipg Folder Path C Temp Browse Description C 002 Procedure Note Verify that all users of this application have the ability to view the contents of this file This includes both access to the directory where this file is stored and having sufficient network security rights to open this file When you close this form a new record will be added to the Calibration Scans form noting the Scan Date Description and the file path Calibration Entry gt Calibration Measurements Procedures Labels Signature Attachments User Defined Calibration Scans Gage ID C 002 M Scan Date File Path Description E Scan New Record I 4 1 b gt t gt of 2 Record I 4 1708 gt i LEa of 62 If you click on the drill down button the application will look for the image and open it with the application that is registered for that file type in the workstation s registry Note If GAGEtrak cannot find the application registered for the certificate s file type you will be prompted to pick an application to open it with An Open With dialog box will appear listing all the applications installed on your computer Select an image viewing or image editing application it will launch and op
228. ertain Records To access only certain records you can use wildcard characters optional For example you might want to edit gage records that have descriptions exactly equalto Caliper In this case enter Caliper in the Description field in the Gage Entry filter In the same way if you want to find gage records with descriptions that start with Caliper such as Caliper 6 inch and Caliper Digital then enter Caliper in the filter as shown above The asterisk is a wildcard character that indicates in this example that you want all gage records that have a description startingwith the word Caliper GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 37 Likewise if you enter Caliper it tells the program that you want all gage records with descriptions endingin the word Caliper such as 4 inch Caliper Furthermore if you enter Caliper it tells the program that you want all gage records with descriptions containing the word Caliper 4 inch Caliper ana Caliper Digital You can specify as many filter fields as you need depending on how selective you want to be After you enter any filter values click the Find button to view the filtered record set To remove any filter information click the Clear Filter button Supported Wildcard Characters in Search Fields The asterisk question mark number sign exclamation point hyphen and brackets I are all wildcard ch
229. es from a single right hand page to two facing pages with mirrored margins Printer Settings By default the program follows the default settings of the printer These settings can be found in the Properties setting of the printer in the Windows printer setup For your report setup convenience we have added a facility within the report editor to modify these settings To access Printer Settings select the Printer Settings icon in Report Settings The window shown below will appear x PaperSize Default Printer Y m Preview Width vj Height r Orientation a 9 Portrait C Landscape Collate Printer Default m Duplex Printer Default E PaperBin Default Printer z Cancel Field Name Description Paper Size This list box shows the paper sizes your default printer can handle It is best to view your selection and set this option before you create a report to ensure that your report falls within the boundaries of your page setup Most printers have default margins or nonprintable edges Consult your printer manual to determine these settings Width and Width and height are specified in twips Divide this value by 1440 to convert to inches divide Height by 567 to convert to centimeters 240 Chapter 8 Customizing Reports Field Name Description Orientation If you select Printer Default check this setting in your Printer Control Panel The other settings are Po
230. escription Form Name Text defining the form in the title of the active window Form Caption The name that is visible on the top left corner of the form Cancel To exit this screen without saving your changes click the Cancel button Close If you want to save your changes click Close to return to the main menu Settings Form Tabs Main Menu The tabs within the main menu features can be revised to be more client expressive for example the Measurements tab can be revised to read Capacity in Calibration Entry 83 Settings Tee User Info General Cal Options Calendar Security Automatic Numbering Interface __ Custom Labels Gage Custom Calibration Custom Form Captions Form Tabs Main Menu Menu Bar Messages Form Mame Calibration Entry x Tab Name Tab Caption B MeasuemensTab Eaa s s m ProceduresTab Procedures E SignatureTab Bgentwe E UseDeTab o User Defined Record I 4 9 gt PLP Cancel Close The table below describes the fields on this form Field Button Name Description Form Name Select a Form Name from the list box of available editable forms Tab Name This is the default name of the tab within the select Form Name Tab Caption Enter the new caption for the tab within the select Form Name Cancel To exit this screen without saving your changes click the Cancel button 202 Chapter 4 Se
231. eseseaeseseacacseseseeees 114 Reproducibility Appraiser Variation cuite erro RET nd Were tra Le NEUE PLU TE HUE REDDE DE EQ tstists dies tasddedateGeidasaesaneissdasbiasteeveds 115 Appraisers Part ICSC To D ERR E Um 115 STET S AREE E EE A E E ETA E AAEE AE A EEE EA AE E N E AE AE EAT EE T E 115 CONSISTENCY aces ciet Pa ted at i CM Fav ENSE NIU a E Vin eO ev re Note RR OTERA EREE esae A EUREN 115 Variation Compolhens cd datei o ein eo nein Peli IE e AO ce LAUD Cro tad eet Dec cota dn raison GU DH vaa dac 115 PAS A pipe M aa 116 ORR MOQUE ee NM 117 UU V AUR PINE Oe TORTOR ERN 117 Iliforrnauo Ta Das oi aede sei eot Coi I ED bet eee Die t E b aba de Cdp tad cssc tuti ideo Ci eH Uds tue iced eiNdvad coe NL Iota bue Ios dud f eds 117 GRR Study STEENS Juste eh PRAE Ex laY EL vH cc ees Rud PE bo dase vance be COS EN EO MR Eas CUL de pH LER Gl esas ava p ER dees anes anos aaa 118 IntePpretallobi sro ond o ft Oe te der Coro E i tear p e TOES o EU ef eH Dc Tcu 119 Generating Charte eas aceasta or Po ri a i oat arre Diae i cca osten QE oa ose a Ne Eon oe CoU Co nite 120 Range Chart by Appraiser Part and by Part Appraiser sssssssssssssssssssssssssssscsssssesessssssescscsssesecsesesescsesesesesscsesesecscsenssesecsesesesecscaceesecscass 120 Er or C Pari NS 120 Run Chart and Average Chart t a ias aA aaie a ENRE A S TAa alana Se saat ave eee E A A A ta AAR 121 Normalized Individuals Chart by Part Apprai
232. est Entry from the Main Records menu and the main entry screen will appear Service Request Entry CA Request No ponnonn4 Type Calibration Request z Request Date 117 872000 E Service Supplier ACME GAGE amp TOOL Requester Administrator Status Opn mj Insurance Amt iino Completion Date 11 8 2000 IBI Comments Next Due Date Completion Date Insurance Amt Status a s Record I4 4 1 gt gt t rx of 3 Field Button Name Description CA Request No This field automatically generates a number to track your requests You can set up automatic numbering in Setup using your own format Request Date Enter the date or click the small button on the right of this field to automatically enter today s date Requester Select or enter the name of person requesting service Insurance Amt This field displays the total of all insurance amounts from the gages listed below The original insurance amount is derived from the Costfield in Gage Entry The field on this form is not editable but original Gage Entry costs can be modified below for insurance purposes Type Select the type of the document to use such as Calibration Repair Calibration amp Repair or Corrective Action Notice For directions on adding new documents and editing service request letters or corrective action request forms see your System Administrator s Guide Service Supplier Select the supplier code of the service provider
233. every section of this manual we discuss these conventions only in this section You ll find record specific information such as each record s individual purpose fields and special buttons in the parts of this manual that discuss specific record types GAGEtrak Help Go to the Help menu or press the F1 key to open GAGEtrak s on line Help Select a topic from the Contents or use the Help Topics function to browse an alphabetical list of topics Use the Back button and Bookmark listing to return to recent topics Click Print Topic to print any Help topic Record Filter Windows Some reports open with filter windows that you can use to select a subset of records that match the criteria you enter This may not seem useful at first but you will appreciate this feature later when you have hundreds or thousands of records from which to select GAGEtrak s Quick Filterand Advanced Filter commands may be used to find a subset dynaset of records that match the criteria you enter 35 36 Chapter 2 Program Conventions Quick Filter Command Use the Quick Filter command when you need to quickly find records based on a simple search Quick Filter is accessible from the right click shortcut menu the Records menu and the program toolbar Gage Entry Filter Description ef Next Due Date m Storage Location BH Current Location Clear Filter Close 4 4 4 4 After filling in the desired filter informa
234. evious record select this command New Select New to move the cursor to a blank record at the end of your form or datasheet allowing you to enter a new record Show All Records Command To display the most current records in a form or datasheet select Records Show All Records from the menu or select the Show All Records button from the floating toolbar This command removes a filter if you re currently using one including a sort created with the Quick Sort command queries the database to display the most current data and then moves to the first record GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 49 Deleting Records To delete records do the following 1 Goto the record you want to delete and click on the record s selector bar or button 2 Choose Delete from the Edit menu the Delete Record button from the floating toolbar or press the DELETE key 3 GAGEtrak will ask you to confirm the deletion sometimes twice In Table view you can delete multiple records by selecting more than one record Use the record selector buttons to select all the records that you want to delete then follow steps 2 and 3 Undo Changes to Fields and Records If you want to undo changes to a field and you haven t left the field either press the ESC key or select Undo command from the Edit menu If you change more than one field on a record and want to remove those changes select Edit Undo Current Record This will Undo the entire
235. ext 50 Time Required Double Repair Cost Double Repair Hours Double 8 CalFrequency Double 8 CalFrequency UOM Text 50 NextDue Date Time 8 Temperature Text 50 Humidity Text 50 Pressure Text 50 Other Text 50 CalibType Text 50 UserDef1 Text 50 UserDef2 Text 50 UserDef3 Text 50 UserDef4 Text 50 UserDef5 Text 50 UserDef6 Text 50 UserDef7 Text 50 UserDef8 Text 50 UserDef9 Text 50 UserDef10 Text 50 UserDef11 Text 50 UserDef12 Text 50 UserDef13 Text 50 UserDef14 Text 50 UserDef15 Text 50 UserDef16 Text 50 UserDef17 Text 50 UserDef18 Text 50 UserDef19 Text 50 UserDef20 Text 50 SentToPDA Long Integer 4 CalDiscrepancy Long Integer 4 FloatFixed Long Integer 4 Description Text 50 Gage SN Text 50 Est Calibration Cost Double 8 Calibration Hours Double Effective DF Double Coverage FactorK Double 8 Bill To Text 50 InCal_Freq Double 8 272 Appendix B Table Definitions Field List Data Type Length InCal_Freg_UOM Text 50 Table Name CheckBox Description Program table used for multiple choice list boxes Associated From Multiple Field List Data Type Length FS Type Text key 50 FS Order Long Integer key 4 FS Value Text 50 Text Text 50 Description Text 100 Table Name CMArchive Description Archived calibration measurements records Associated From CMArchiveViewfrm Field List Data Type Length Gage ID Text key 50 Calibration_Date Date Time key 8 Calibration_Time Date Time key 8 Gage Standard ID Text key
236. ey 50 GM_Type Text key 50 Part_No Text key 50 Table Name Proc Attachment Description Associated From Field List Data Type Length ID Long Integer key 4 Procedure Name Text 255 AttachPath Text 255 Description Memo 0 Table Name Procedure Link Description Procedure Link for a particular Gage Tasks Associated From Calibration Entry Procedures Gage Master Entry Procedures Field List Data Type Length Gage ID Text key 50 Procedure Name Text key 50 Table Name Procedures Description Maintenance procedure information Associated From Calibration Entry Procedures Edit Procedures Gage Master Entry Procedure SubForm Procedure Entry Field List Data Type Length Procedure Name Text key 50 Procedure_txt Memo 0 MediaPath Text 255 Author_Name Text 50 Rev_Number Text 50 Rev_Date Date Time 8 Table Name Procedures OLE Description Maintenance procedure file and image links Associated From Calibration Entry Procedures Gage Master Entry OLE SubForm Gage Master Entry Procedure SubForm Procedure Entry Field List Data Type Length Procedure Name Text key 50 Procedure OLE Long Binary 0 Table Name Program Msg Description Program messages custom form Associated From Messages Settings Interface tab Messages subtab Reset Original Messages Field List Data Type Length Msg ID Long Integer key 4 Msg Text Memo 0 Msg Flags Long Integer 4 Msg Title Text 100 GAGEtrak Calibration Management
237. ficate Standard Temperature Experience Difference Parallax Error Experience Details about each of these potential uncertainty contributors are given a few paragraphs below in Background on Uncertainty Contributors The Type A or Type B classification depends on whether you do a statistical study A or not B Thus if you estimate stability error without doing a study it becomes Type B instead of Type A Likewise if you do a statistical study to determine the uncertainty of temperature difference it becomes Type A instead of Type B The task of determining uncertainty for a calibration or a laboratory measurement involves deciding which uncertainty contributors are to be included and listing them on a form called an Uncertainty Budget or error budget This form combines all the contributors for you using RSS root sum square addition and calculates Expanded Uncertaintyfor use on certificates or test reports Uncertainty Setup Sub tab The function of this sub tab is to help you make decisions about which Uncertainty Contributors to include on the Uncertainty Budget GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 137 Bs Linearity Bias and Uncertainty mi x P Linearity Trials Bias Uncertainty EE Study Date 2052000 Co Part No Po Gage ID COMPARATOR zf Part No f10 221 3 a Gage Desc fia Kodak Optical Comparator Part Desc Bracket Fron 0 Uncertainty Setup Uncertainty Budget Type A Statistical
238. for the gage or instrument for when you measure this standard for example 0 999 When you enter the nominal measurement GAGEtrak automatically calculates the minimum measurement based on the gage s tolerance Nominal Enter the nominal value for the gage or instrument for when this standard is measured for example 1 000 Maximum This field contains the maximum acceptable value for the gage or instrument for when this standard is measured such as 1 001 When you enter the nominal measurement GAGEtrak automatically calculates the maximum measurement based on the gage s tolerance Ref Type Select the type of Reference Standard that will be used for this standard This list box will show the Gage Type of every reference standard in the database 16 Chapter 4 Entering Gage Records Field Button Name Gage ID of Standard Format Description Select from a list of available standard IDs The Ref Type field limits the list An empty Ref Type field would show all available IDs Select the numerical format that measurements will appear in on reports Note The format does not affect how measurements are shown in forms only in reports Gage Entry Calibration Schedule Use the Calibration Schedule tab to set up the calibration schedule for each gage Gage Entry gt Information Specifications History Standards Parts Procedures Calibration Schedule A amp R Schedule User Defined Auth Persons Attachments
239. formation Specifications History Standards Parts Procedures Calibration Schedule R amp R Schedule User Defined Auth Persons Attachments Events Gage ID OO Description es Status 1 gt Active Storage Location m Ref Standard NIST Nf J Current Location a Gage S N Service Date Asset No PO Retirement Date J ModlNo i Cs Supplier Code Hm Type m Cost sn Unit of Meas m Purchase Date s Notes User Defined Manufacturer Owner X issue Retum Clone Gage Graph Calibration Attach Standards Attach Procedures Record 14 4 1 gt gt i rs of 1 53 54 Chapter 3 Entering Gage Records Since you don t have any gage records entered yet the fields are blank After you enter your gage records you can use the Quick or Advanced Filters to narrow your record searches Click the Find button to go to the gage record window A more detailed discussion of filters can be found in Chapter 2 Program Conventions on page 35 Help are Advanced Quick Filter d 5 Vx VF vpzeTTIDTC RENE x N Find records that match these criteria B3 Gage Entry Filter x Gage ID Status WA Gage S N Description X Type New Search pen Search Save Search Next Due Date Define more criteria Storage Location M 3 Add to List n Field C
240. fter you save the Issue Tracking record GAGEtrak marks the gage record s current location as its storage location Chapter 7 Conclusion We hope that you re more familiar with GAGEtrak 6 now and that this guide has helped you understand more about how GAGEtrak can help you organize and document your gage and calibration records Please consult your User s Manualand System Administrator s Guide located elsewhere in this publication for detailed instructions on other entry screens reports program setup options and other features If you have any questions about or problems with your software please contact CyberMetrics Technical Support at 480 922 7300 27 GAGEtrak 6 Chapter 1 starting GAGEtrak Installing GAGEtrak The System Administrator s Guide contains detailed information about different ways to install GAGEtrak and set it up on a network including how to set it up for a client server environment However if you re planning to use the program on one PC and install it from the CD ROM follow these instructions 1 3 Click the Windows Start button then select the Run command Place the GAGEtrak Version 6 CD into your CD ROM drive D the drive may vary depending on your system setup and enter D SETUP EXE in the Open field in the Run box SS hh 21x ea Type the name of a program folder document or Internet resource and Windows will open it for you Open D SETUP EXE Cancel Browse
241. ful and fully understand the data table relationships Please consider this if you decide to use multiple databases If you do use multiple database files and later want to merge them please contact Technical Support for assistance there may be a small charge for this service 301 Appendix D System Maintenance and Troubleshooting Date Formats GAGEtrak supports all of the available numeric date formats within Windows For example you can represent the date of November 1 2003 as 11 1 03 11 01 03 11 1 2003 03 11 1 03 1 11 or 2003 11 1 Because GAGEtrak s reports use only numeric dates you can select only numeric date formats Therefore you can t use dates like November 1 2003 or 1 November 2003 As a precaution you may want to verify your date settings in Windows Control Panel Select Start Settings Control Panel then run the Regional Options The date formats that you enter into GAGEtrak must match the Windows date setting otherwise errors will occur while you re running the program The sample screen shows the most popular format used in the United States Regional Settings Properties 1 x Regional Settings Number Currency Time Date Calendar type Gregorian Calendar Short date CERE EPIRI SE ERIT EIER ERE DERE S Short date sample 09 30 1998 Shart date style MM dd w y Date separator po H T E Fan Sea ana Long date sample ednesday Long dat
242. fy that all users of this application have the ability to view the contents of this file This includes both access to the directory where this file is stored and having sufficient network security rights to open this file File Description Description of attached file type For example if the attached file is a Microsoft Word document the Description field will contain Microsoft Word Document View Print Button Select this button to open the selected file with that file type application Delete Highlight record indicator or click within the File field and select Delete from the floating toolbar Calibration Entry User Defined These fields can be used to store additional information and can be customized the label names changed and the data types altered in Setup Settings Interface Gage Custom GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 107 Calibration Entry Calibration Scans GAGEtrak provides the option of scanning in certificates from TWAIN compliant scanners that can be stored with the calibration records Note If a calibration has been signed the calibration scan feature will be disabled and the user will not be allowed to delete edit or create new scans The scanned page files still exists If a scanned record is deleted and you will need to delete this file yourself using the File Manager supplied with your operating system The user will however be able to view print scans Calibration Entry gt C
243. ge SMw 1 GO NOGO 051 055 SMw 1 GO NOGO 052 055 028 Step Gage 5 6 OD MIC 0001 MITUTOYO GAGE BLOCK SET 81 PC 21 22 Chapter 5 Entering Calibration Records To create a new calibration record click on the New Record button I then select the desired gage record from the Gage ID drop down menu near the top of the window After you save the record by entering information into this screen such as your department GAGEtrak automatically retrieves any standards you set up for the gage Calibration Entry P Calibration Measurements Procedures Labels Signature Attachments User Defined Calibration Scans Gage ID c 002 X Accounting Description DALIPERDIALT2INCH o Est Costs Gage S N 5N13803467 ss Costs fo 000 Calib Freq 6 Months Next Due 02719 2004 Hours O 2 Start Calibration Date 10 10 2004 Time 11 28AM AcomtNo Department jac By Default User x Certificate No 1 1 Calibration Type Calibration mj As Found Condition In M Results Pass Calibration Status Action Required 0 0 0 Interval Adjustment Method None Findings 2 Uncertainty LC Coverage Factor amp Deg of Freedom Temperature Pressure Humidity Other Status 1 v Active MSA Graph Certificate Gage Entry Record 14 4 1 gt rl gt gt of 5 Filtered The major fields in the calibration record window are described below Field Button Name Descript
244. ge ID Cancel lt lt Back Next gt gt The table and linked fields have drop down lists limited to your selected table and the fields of the table A relationship selection window is also provided to guide you F Join Properties 1 Only include rows where the joined fields from both tables are equal 9 nN Include ALL Records from Calibration Header and only those records from Gage Events where the joined fields are equal 7 co Include ALL Records from Gage Events and only those records from Calibration Header where the joined fields are equal i Cancel Table link fields Field Name Description Table 1 Name of the table in which all its records are to be reflected in the report All records may mean all records subjected to filter if any Links may also act as filters This field has a list box Table 1 Linked Field This is a field common in type and contents between the two linked tables The names and field sizes may vary but it will only link with exactly the same record This field has a list box Table 2 Name of the table linked with Table 1 Not all its records even if subjected to filter will be included in the report Table 2 Linked Field Same description as 7able 7 Linked Field Relationship There are three types of relationship as described in the illustration It is a good practice to use the conventions described for 7able 7and Table 2above
245. ge all occurrences of the word Bolt to Washer in a part description field To Replace Data in a Table 1 Display the table or form containing the information you want to replace 2 Selectthe field column in which you want to replace data unless you intend to search all fields 3 From the Edit menu choose Replace The Replace dialog box appears Find and Replace 21x Find Repae Find What c o02 Find Next Cancel Look In Gage ID Match whole Field Search fan Match Case Search Fields As Formatted 4 In the Find What box type the text you want to find Use wildcard characters to make your search more general If you use wildcard characters you might want to confirm text replacements to ensure that they re correct see below 5 In the Replace With box type the replacement text 46 Chapter 2 Program Conventions 6 Under Search In select Up Down or All Fields If you select Up the program searches for data from current record to the beginning of the database If you select Down in the program searches for data after the current record selection If All is selected the search includes a search on the entire database 7 Set other Replace dialog box options if necessary You can confirm each replacement or you can replace all occurrences without confirmation To Confirm Each Replacement 1 Choose the Find Next button to find the first occurrence of the text The program locates
246. ge issue history use this report History Report Gage Labels Use any of these reports to print a pre designed label Make sure the right printer cartridge is installed before selecting the print button Gage Listing by Select a report by specific report for viewing printing specific information 162 Chapter 13 Reports OPEN CALIBRATION REPORTS Report Calibration Due Listing by Calibration Schedule by Calibration Work Order Description Select a report by specific report for viewing printing specific Calibration Due Listing information You can sort the list by several different fields such as Gage ID Important The Calibration Due Listing report lists only gages that you assigned as Active status ID 1 in Gage Entry Also reports with a calibration frequency of Usage or Cycles that are not past due for calibration will present an asterisks to the right the Next Due Date denoting the date as an Estimated Due Date Select a report by specific report for viewing printing specific Calibration Schedule information If you have a large gage inventory with a variety of calibration frequencies it s difficult to plan your workload This powerful report makes this task easier by helping you predict calibrations that are due during a specific time frame It builds a temporary schedule for each gage and then summarizes the findings taking your skip days dates into account Use this repo
247. gin Since your users and groups have not been setup a logon User ID Default is provided so you can login Once you have logged in set up your users and groups first then delete the user ID Default Also the User ID is case insensitive where as the password is case sensitive User ID Default Password Change Password Cancel The first time you login to GAGEtrak you will see this message First Time Logon x e This is the first entry for user ID Default Enter a password Click OK enter your User ID then enter a password in the New Password field and enter the same password in the Confirm Password field GAGEtrak will require you to enter this password the next time you login User ID Default New Password Confirm Password p DK Cancel When you wish to change your password click on the checkbox labeled Change Password in the Logon window GAGEtrak will require you to enter your old password then enter and confirm your new password Main Menu Now you can see the entire main menu Note that the name of the currently logged in user is displayed in the lower left corner The full path to the attached database file GTWDAT60 MDB GTSAMP60 MDB if you are attached to the sample database is displayed in the lower right corner GAGEtrak s new Microsoft Outlook style interface is easy to learn and use with clean clear graphics and an intuitive approach that makes extensive training sessions and manu
248. gment and knowledge of the measurement method Items selected are designated as Type A which means derived from an MSA study or Type B which means some other source such as a certificate or an experience based educated guess Keep in mind that uncertainty is not an estimate of gage error it is the potential variability in gage error i e The extent to which gage error is unknown Here are some examples of potential uncertainty contributors and where they come from This is not an exhaustive list Uncertainty of Calibration Type AJ Uncertainty Where Available Contributors Linearity This Module Resolution This Module Repeatability or This Module GRR Stability of the Stability Module if the reference standard is a variable gage reference standard Consistency of Stability Module if the reference standard is a variable gage the reference standard Hysteresis This is a side study similar to linearity but easy to do manually Uncertainty of Measurement Type AJ These apply to working use of a gage after calibration for variable measurements Uncertainty Where Available Contributors GRR or its GRR Module components EV AV and INT Stability of the Stability Module gage Consistency ofthe Stability Module gage General Uncertainty Contributors Type B These may apply to both uncertainty of calibration and uncertainty of measurement Uncertainty Based On Contributors Reference Certi
249. goes in the function field Default Label Text If a field is to have a value at all time this is the value that the system will default to Normal or Bold The weight appearance of the font Report Label Options Select Open Normallyto show the user defined label text and use Open with default label textto show the default label text Cancel To exit this screen without saving your changes click the Cancel button Close If you want to save your changes click Close to return to the main menu The field names are in alphabetical order Scroll down the list to find the field name you want to change If for example you wanted to change Model No to Tool No in the Label Text area you would replace Model No with Tool No Once you change a field name here it will be changed on all entry screens filters and reports 200 Chapter 4 Setting Up GAGEtrak Settings Gage Calibration Custom Gage Custom is the same as Gage Entry User Interface it s your preference as to what method you d like to use in customizing the label text Although modifying the labels through this screen provides formatting options that can be applied to the labels 83 Settings User Info General Cal Options Calendar Security Automatic Numbering Interface Custom Labels Gage Custom Calibration Custom Form Captions Form Tabs Main Menu Menu Bar Messages Tab Caption user Defined Item Field Type Field Attribute oi Text
250. gular distributions combine to form a third distribution An example would be summing a pair of dice Choose this distribution when you believe a distribution is not quite Normal Enter the Plus or Minus value as one half the difference between the extremes GAGEtrak will choose a Divisor ofa f6 2 449 U Shaped Distribution This distribution occurs when a quantity is extremely sensitive to misalignment or mistuning An example would be static on an old radio Choose this when you believe that the extremes are more likely than values at the center Enter the Plus or Minus value as one half the difference between the extremes GAGEtrak will use a Divisor ofaf2 1 414 Background on Uncertainty Contributors The following are not complete lists Uncertainty of Calibration Type A Uncertainty Details Contributor Linearity Use the maximum residual as a Plus or Minus value This means the maximum of observed value minus the reference value minus any systematic error The Probability Distribution is Rectangular Bias Use the Standard Error of the Average Bias The Probability Distribution is Normal 1 Resolution Use the smallest increment by which a measurement with this gage could increase or decrease The Probability Distribution is Rectangular Repeatability or For Linearity amp Bias studies use the pooled standard deviation For Bias Only GRR Studies use the Standard Deviation of Bias The Probability Distribution is
251. h Persons Attachments Events Each tab selector contains an entry screen that stores a specific category of information In each tab you can edit or view information for the current record The tabs shown above are available in Gage Entry Minimize Maximize Restore Close Buttons ile Es is Minimize Button E Restore Button m Maximize Button x Close Button Use these buttons located in the upper right corner of the form to maximize the form s size to the largest size allowed or to minimize the form to an icon If you maximize the form then the Maximize button changes to the Restore button Click this button to return the window to its original size List Box Buttons List box buttons indicate that a field has a list of items available from which you can choose When you click the button it presents the list in a scrollable box Click on any item in the list to select it Example of alist box button Datasheet Table Views of Records Datasheet also called Table views allow you to see many records at once Because of this they can be amore efficient interface for adding or modifying your records Table views operate like spreadsheet programs Each row represents a record and each column represents a field In Table view you can add change and view records This format offers more flexibility in that you can resize column widths and row heights rearrange column positions and even hide columns GAGEtrak Calibratio
252. h as metrology lab or layout equipment to average several measurements Observed Reference Average Value Value A Bias Accuracy Linearity Linearityis the difference in the bias accuracy values through the gage s estimated operating range Observed Average High End Bias Observed Average Low End Bias Precision and Accuracy Below we ll use a bull s eye target to describe the difference between precision and accuracy Accurate but not precise Notice the readings are fairly well centered on the target but there is wide scatter Precise but not accurate You can see that the readings are all close to each other but are not centered on the target Precise and accurate In this the best condition the readings are all close to each other and centered on the target Precise and accurate are general qualitative terms that are not actually used in MSA studies Repeatability Equipment Variation Gage repeatabilityis the measurement variation that occurs when one appraiser uses the same gage to measure identical characteristics of the same parts GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 115 ia Repeatability Reproducibility Appraiser Variation When different appraisers use the same gage to measure identical characteristics on the same parts unexpected variation in the average of these measurements is known as gage reproducibility Observed Averages
253. has been assigned to Ada gt gt Button Select from the All Groups list and click this button to add the group or groups in which this user will be a member Remove Button Select a group or groups from the Member Oflist and click this button to remove user membership Security Group Permissions Modify group access permission to the different forms and reports of the program Security z Ot x __ Groups Users Group Admin v Select Object Select Form a Gage Entry M Form Control Select Control i m Gage ID M C Report Control C Functions Default Permissions Permissions exceptions to the default properties C NoAccess C Read Only Disabled C Read Only Enabled Read wiite The table below describes the fields on this form Field Button Name Description Group Select the group for which you want to establish permissions Selected Object Select the type of object to set permission rights for for example Forrn Reports Controls and Functions Select Form Report Dependent on what object was selected will be what is available for selection for Control or Functions example selecting Form Controlwill require you to select a form and then you will have to select a control within that form This action will have to be repeated in order to assign permissions to multiple controls for that form Permissions Select the permission to be assigned to the ob
254. hat the supplier is currently active and approved User Defined 1 Enter any other information that you wish to track on this supplier Be sure to use and 2 these fields consistently throughout your supplier records Gages This table lists all gages obtained from this supplier This table is not editable if you need to edit the gage information shown in this table you must do so under Gage Entry Chapter 9 Gage Issue and Return Batch Mode You can issue and return gages one at a time via Gage Entry click the Issue Return button to open Issue Tracking Entry For higher volume batch mode processing of gage issues and returns use Issue Gage and Return Gage Intended for use in a gage or tool crib this feature was designed for bar coded data entry but will also work with manual keyboard entry Issue Gages Gage iD ra 1 EZEEZZN Issue Date 10 7 2003 Next Due Date Ref Standard Issue Time 4 33PM O CO Issued To Bob Smith Issued Dept DEPTOIA PaNo iozyii x PON f Promised Date 10 13 2003 Storage Location COMPOSITES o Current Location COMPOSITES Received Date IEEE Received Time pesci Received From 000 0 MM Cycles CY Notes Clear Form Next Gage Issue Label Close The Issue Gages fields are as follows Field Button Name Description Gage ID Select a Gage ID of a gage available for issuance A red non selectable button labeled Past Due appears to the right
255. have any gage records entered yet the fields are blank After you enter your gage records you can use the Quick or Advanced Filters to narrow your record searches Click the Find button to go to the gage record window Quick Filter Advanced i Advanced Fiter x Find records that match these criteria Gage Entry Filter e 8 c og EZ Dm Description pe zl Next Due Date ec lr Storage Location i m Current Location 4 4 4 4 4 New Search Open Search Save Search Clear Filter Close Detine more T G C And C Or Add to List Field Condition Value 13 14 Chapter 4 Entering Gage Records Gage Information 83 Gage Entry P Information Specifications History Standards Parts Procedures Calibration Schedule R amp R Schedule User Defined Auth Persons Attachments Events Gage ID C 002 Description CALIPER DIAL 12 INCH Status 1 v Active Storage Location BIN 12 Ref Standard V NIST N sf Current Location Bopsmih7DEPTOTA Gage S N SNISB034E7 Service Date nans Asset No DOO i Retirement Date Poo Model No pooo Supplier Code Bened sts Type DME S Cost 2300 Unit of Meas NH m Purchase Date nans Notes FOR PRODUCTION USE ONLYI User Defined M Manufacturer STARRETT Owner COMPANY lssue Retun Clone Gage
256. he ANSI 2 540 requirements Cancel Close 43 Adjusting Calibration Frequency Setting ReliabilityTarget 80 95 Significance Threshold 0 3 Print Issue Label When Issuing Gage Ask To Print E Failure Notice Statement It is hereby stated that the above described instrument does not conform to the original manufacturer s specifications and has been failed based on accuracies that are traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology and are within the limitations of the Institute Calibration Services or have been derived from accepted values of natural physical constants or have been derived by the ratio type of self calibration techniques 194 Chapter 4 Setting Up GAGEtrak The table below describes the fields on this form Field Button Name Description A1 Adjusting Method A1 usually changes the calibration frequency every time you calibrate even Calibration Frequency X after the calibration frequency has achieved high end of period reliability Most Setting users will prefer less frequent changes and may not want the short calibration intervals that go with high reliability Method A1 is included for users who are familiar with it and wish to continue using it If you check the Auto Adjust Cal Frequencybox in Gage Entry for any gage whenever you enter a new calibration record for it GAGEtrak automatically adjusts its calibration frequency according to the rules you define in the Frequen
257. he current P Touch files for your operating system if you don t have Internet access please contact Technical Support to obtain these files Appendix E Training CyberMetrics Corporation offers training workshops for GAGEtrak on a regular basis throughout the year at various locations This one day hands on training workshop will take you step by step through planning preparation setup and successful operation of the GAGEtrak calibration software You ll learn how to save time avoid common mistakes and maximize the use of your software You ll also learn about advanced topics such as data import export data filtering system maintenance system security performance tuning and more Anyone involved in the implementation or use of GAGEtrak calibration management software Is encouraged to attend We keep class sizes small in order to provide individual instruction and assistance Attendees will receive a complete workbook detailing all of the training topics presented in the workshop On site training classes are also available For more information about our training program or to make your reservation please contact CyberMetrics Corporation or your distributor 307 index A ABOULU EO sonuit MM TUE Eder Lud Ea is 189 190 10 Pe NOS a odio dede onda eT ae RADI 102 FAN mel ge es NET EET 103 116 171 172 T Vere Res Tos CN nnega niu a audios 72 Action COMIN OG uoi bait orb N 101 AGING ReCOFGS aei tr reete as 42 48 49
258. he template List in Select Report Templates Select Blank Report and click on OK A new blank report designer canvas is now ready for your report Open a data source as described in Opening a Data Source on page 230 244 Chapter 8 Customizing Reports Select Report Template 1 1 2 Inch Label Label Vizard After setting the data source remove the page header it is not needed in a sub report because it should already be present in the main report To do this select the Page Header title bar right click and choose Delete Selection from the popup menu that appears Ks Bring to Front M Send to Back Er Align f wee Size Only the Details section will remain this is where the fields for the contents of the report will go Now you need a group heading The data field you use for this heading should be the field that you use to link with the master report It is not necessary to reflect the content of the data field in the heading but you must make sure to set the DataField in the Property ToolBox into the link field Design Preview E X Sm e Explorer E H MainReport GroupHeader 1 Detail GroupHeader 1 Name GroupHeader1 BackColor BackStyle 0 CanGrow True CanShrink False ColumnLayout True Selected GroupHeaderi Section You can add more groups to this report but make sure that the topmost group contains the link field When you are done save
259. henomenon Open E ditor Record I 4 1 b bl gt gt of 3 The table below describes the fields on this form 210 Chapter 4 Setting Up GAGEtrak Field Button Name Description Letter Type Name of the letter must be unique name Date Authored Date letter was written Authored by Name of person that developed the letter Body Body or main contents of the letter Open Editor Select this button to open the letter contents in the RTF editor Note This editor supports rich text therefore text defined in another word editor such as MS Word can be copied and pasted into GAGEtrak setup Status ID Entry Select this utility to enter the descriptions you want to appear in the Status drop down list in Gage Entry You must use the status ID 1 for current gages because the 1 tells GAGEtrak that the gage is active On Calibration Due Listings Calibration Work Orders and Calibration Schedules GAGEtrak includes only active gages those marked with status ID 1 Therefore do not delete status ID 1 Active The default Status Descriptions that come with GAGEtrak are Active n Active Out For Repair In Calibration and Lost You can change these descriptions or add additional Status Descriptions as required by your company for example you may need to add Aetired Sealedor Loaned Out Status ID Entry me x Status ID fi Status Description Active Record I 4 1 P gt i gt gt of 5 se
260. his can be done from the file menu option File Save or with the Save button located on the icon menu with a disk as an image 242 Chapter 8 Customizing Reports HF t Designer Gage Listing 2 s B C p Ha Wa 5 H MainReport ENE ad a ReportHeader ae H 5 PageHeader ER om H GroupHeader1 i f E L1 Visi i i a Pc ee Prag ar ERG UE TES Sa Ue Ei te Ri B UU RE er Z BackColor C BackStyle CanGrow True CanShrink False The other buttons are self explanatory we will discuss the other special buttons in greater detail as we go along Feel free to explore GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 243 Sub Reports A sub report is a report within a report each sub report pertains to a record in the main report Sub reports are very handy when you want to include details into your report but cannot include additional tables for the details in the main SQL statement A great deal of planning is needed when building reports and considering the addition of sub reports Sometimes you can include the data in your master data source SQL Query and just create sub groups for this data However when your report format requires large amounts of detail as in our example on the left sub reports can be designed separately and then linked to your main report Your Company Name Your Division Calibration Work Order With Proc
261. his operation the Microsoft Jet database engine searches the specified table or tables extracts the chosen columns selects rows that meet the criterion and sorts or groups the resulting rows into the order specified The minimum syntax for a SELECT statement is SELECT fields FROM table You can use an asterisk to select all fields in a table The following example selects all of the fields in the Supplier Master table SELECT FROM Supplier Master If a field name is included in more than one table in the FROM clause precede it with the table name and the dot operator In the following example the Department field is in both the Employees table and the 236 Chapter 8 Customizing Reports Supervisors table The SQL statement selects departments from the Employees table and supervisor names from the Supervisors table SELECT Calibration Header Gage ID Gage Events Gage ID FROM Calibration Header INNER JOIN Gage Events WHERE Calibration Header Gage ID Gage Events Gage ID Creating Your Layout Now that you have provided a source for your report you can now start creating your layout Note that the Fields frame is no longer empty It now contains a list of fields that you can drag and drop onto your report canvas H Report Designer Gage Listing with Standards i ni x File Edit View Insert Format Tools Help OshOR S049 74 ROBES fa dvURh CF Show B E s m Me Ys ooe Bt St il Design Preview Explorer
262. hree options Run Scripts this option is for users who have opted to use MSSQL to store their data When the Run Scripts utility is ran the utility will run the scripts needed to build the tables Transfer Data this option is used to migrate data from older versions of our software to upgraded versions e g GAGEtrak 5 0 to GAGEtrak 6 Update Add Reports this option is used to update older versions of reports and or add new reports Use this separate utility only once and only if you re upgrading to GAGEtrak 6 from an earlier version of GAGEtrak v5 59 or earlier requires a data transfer or if you re using a client server setup with Version 6 Note A data transfer is NOT necessary for current GAGEtrak 6 users Version 3 3means any GAGEtrak Version 3 or higher including GAGEtrak 97 and GAGEtrak Version 3 For GAGEtrak 97 32 bit the database file is DATA9731 MDB the archive file can be named either ARCH9731 MDB or ARCH9735 MDB For GAGEtrak Version 3 16 bit the database file is DATA30 MDB the archive file is ARCHIVE MDB Version 4 4 means any GAGEtrak Version 4 The database and archive are in one file GTDATA40 MDB Version 5 5means any GAGEtrak Version 5 The database and archive are in one file GTDATA50 MDB Version 5 5 5 5 means any GAGEtrak Version 5 5 The database and archive are in one file GTDATA55 MDB Running the DTU overwrites your GAGEtrak 6 database Running the DTU incorporates new fields tables an
263. i ete sete ct ede rigueur deed ele eed se Seide Ree r Ede 2 EAD n UM Pe RM A Ra Ene detente 70 Gage Entry Gira pin BUPOD 4o n oi oue e o Hio ead o i ED SM SO o qr EA ean EA ATL v LO A o Der CR 70 Gage Entry Calibratipm BUON ss dou e bn RO Eee M e EC Pd s Dh toT dL D STR FU Dl acs a podia PH E Id rer Ie E 70 Gage Entry Attach Standards BUttOD eocicit eet teet aere e RD cvi eate eO rh Re voc NI ROI Ped F e UON ES VE Td REIR e DR D va eR UTR eN ee neas 71 Gage Entry Attach Procedures Button sccisscescts seca ceacessetancsecececesescvissuchicceusten vues eadeics EEE A EET E E E 71 Chapter 4 Part RECON OS naue eto a e Si tree D ie recie Eod tee eii edic d minim e Tc P TO NS 73 Gage Requirement METTE CPP 73 Chapter 5 Entering Procedure Records 4 4 e eere rne ee eere eee ee en aenea ene sn ene sneseseesesseses 7D PROCCGUPE IRCCONGS eMe RN 75 Procedure Entry Procedure ML qur aiii 75 Copying Procedures from Another Windows Application e eere ee eese esee eee eee ee enero ento ate totns tasse enean ese sn ease seta enses tn ea sepe sn enses essen ne 76 CalProtaubration PFOGedUE 6S ooo de icon dc aede d Dv te Toc Oed dece amv LM and to emt acerbus C rad 76 Procedure EhtryesProcedulte mage ineunte e erede eite sass dete Put ee ves aaaea saa uoc tue Aaaa Aaaa eda T a aa a eae EE Pe ioa DE E Alaaa e ERES aaeanoa ENa Eanna 76
264. ibration Status MEE Qty Gage Types Total Cost Calibration 34 Attribute 4500 a R amp R ae Bore Gage Service Request Comparator i Totals al DIAL 235 00 Caan e DIGITAL 239 00 R amp R 0a DIGITAL FORCE GAUGE 0 00 Service Request 4 Digital Variable 150 00 Totals 80 Digital Variable 173 00 w GAGEtrak s Calibration Status window gives you a quick view of your work status At aglance the number of Past Due and Not Due calibrations R amp R studies and Open and Closed Service Requests can be viewed The window also displays the Total Cost of gage inventory by Gage Type use the scrollbar to the right of the form to view the complete list of gage types To get an up to the minute display click the Refresh button Chapter 10 E Gage Frequency Adjusting Interval This module applies only to gages where Method A3 has been specified for Gage Frequency Adjusting Method This is specified in Gage Entry on the Calibration Schedule tab GAGEtrak also offers method A1 These terms refer to methods that are outlined in Recommended Practice RP 1 Establishment and Adjustment of Calibration Intervals 3 96 RP 1 is a publication of NCSL International a professional organization for standards labs See www ncsli org Method A3 lets you specify a reliability target and requires a low risk of making unnecessary changes before recommending that a change in calibration frequency is necessary Reliability i
265. ield List Data Type Length Settings ID Long Integer key 4 Company Name 1 Text 50 Company Name 2 Text 50 Company Address 1 Text 50 Company Address 2 Text 50 Company City Text 50 Company State Text 50 Company Zip Text 50 Company Contact Text 50 Company Phone Text 50 Company_Fax Text 50 Company_Logo Long Binary 0 Calibration Cert Statement Memo 0 OpenToolPalette Long Integer 4 ToolPaletteOrientation Long Integer 4 ToolPaletteLocation Double 8 Skip_Sun Long Integer 4 Skip_Mon Long Integer 4 Skip Tue Long Integer 4 Skip Wed Long Integer 4 Skip Thu Long Integer 4 Skip Fri Long Integer 4 Skip Sat Long Integer 4 AutoCalDue Long Integer 4 AutoRRDue Long Integer 4 DefaultFormat Text 50 MaxUsers Double 8 AutoAdjust Long Integer 4 PassFactor Double 8 FailFactor Double 8 SkipDirection Long Integer 4 ysnAuditTrail Long Integer 4 strAuditLocation Text 50 strAuditEditor Text 15 strSerialNo Text 50 BGColor Long Integer 4 LineColor Long Integer 4 TitleColor Long Integer 4 HeadingColor Long Integer 4 DataColor Long Integer 4 FontNameHeadings Text 15 FontNameData Text 15 FontStyleHeadings Long Integer 4 FontStyleData Long Integer 4 LinesVisible Long Integer 4 PageNumbers Long Integer 4 GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 291 Field List Data Type Length AllowSaveReport Long Integer 4 ShowWideLogo Long Integer 4 BarCode Text 50 Terminator Text 50 CCNumberFormat Text 50 CCLastNumber Text 50 SRNumber
266. ile Table Name Export Filename Helpful Information Calibration Header CalHead Every calibration record will be present in the Calibration Header table Calibration CalMeas Not every Calibration Header record requires a corresponding Measurements Calibration Measurement record The Calibration Measurement table contains only calibrations that include actual calibration standards measurements One Calibration Header record may have many corresponding calibration records Gage Calibration CalStd This table links gages to their calibration standards Standards Saved Advanced Search This table stores all saved filter criteria from the Advanced Form Filters Filter Custom Field Labels Fields This table stores the text for form labels This table should not be imported into the database Gage Records GageMast All Gage Entry information is contained in this table Gage Part Links GageReqs In this table gages are linked with parts Gage RR Results GRR This table stores all of your gage R amp R studies and results Gage Issue Tracking lssueTrk All Gage Issue and Return information is in this table Service Request Letter The form letters you create for repairs service requests or Letters calibrations are stored in this table Service Requests SrvReq This table contains the service requests that you ve entered into GAGEtrak Part Records Parts In this table you ll find all of the Part Entry information Gage Procedure ProcLin
267. imit p545 Fail Value D Lower Limit 0 45 GRR 0 025 Bs not 2 Number Format prono OOOO Yd Percentage Format poo Comments Prefill Calc Print Record I 4 1 gt E gt gt of 1 The Information tab contains these fields and buttons Field Button Name Description Study Date This field defaults to the current date but you can change it Gage ID Select the ID code for the gage you re using in the study 150 Chapter 12 MSA Entry Field Button Name Description Gage Desc Once you select a gage ID the gage s description will appear in this field Study Type Risk analysis is already internal here You can t change it Pass Value Enter the code to be used for Pass like 1 or P letters and numbers are accepted Fail Value Enter the code to be used for Fail like 0 or F letters and numbers are accepted Number Format Select the format you want for calculations Comments Enter any comments such as the gage I D of a variable gage to be used for cross o y y yoek o Co Part No Enter your internal company part or job number Part No Select or enter the number of the part used in the study Part Desc After you select the part number its part description appears in this field Approved Select if study is approved Upper Limit The upper specification limit for the part If attribute data will be used for reference values enter a numerical code for pass Lower Limit The lower specificatio
268. inearity choices Bias corrected or Include unless it is not relevant not Resolution Include unless it is not relevant Repeatability or Include unless it is not relevant This would be GRR if there is more than one GRR appraiser For example if this study will apply to a family of gages you could use a different gage for each reference value Another example would use one technician for half the trials and another technician for the rest When your choices have been made click on Update Budget This will partially fill out the Uncertainty Budget 138 Chapter 12 MSA Entry Uncertainty Budget Sub tab BS Linearity Bias and Uncertainty b Linearity Trials Bias Uncertainty Uncertainty Contribute Type Plus or Minus t for 95 Confidence 1974904 Coverage Factor k 2 Iof xj Co Patt No Pait No 10 221 3 Pat Desc Bracket Front Probab ity Divece Sensitivity Uncertainty Disribution Coefficiert Contribution Prefil Cac Charts Print Record 14 1o gt t px of 2 Up to four rows will already have been filled in according to the choices you made in Uncertainty Setup You may edit these choices here and doing so will not change Uncertainty Setup To enter additional Uncertainty Contributors select from the drop down list in an empty row You may add to most of the drop down lists Just type an entry or modify an existing entry The added item will appear the next time you o
269. ion PUSS UL ea EE UE 171 MS STANIV OLOGY PE DER 171 Calibratiob ENV oec rera tert titm 103 104 165 Fron Gage ENY as aos tho aee NE DP UI Veit 72 Calibration Frequency icri resta eias 63 100 Anter 8 ee t de leues ER Ee ER 63 OSC esac ea at tee hl ake aed ale ME 63 eS N ET 63 Br Sine Acasa decrees 63 65 29 TES 63 RLST DIE Ae comici ie eL careers ance 63 65 Miss cT 63 65 MOSES nisse n e addito tah eiue P che 63 65 Calibration HIStory ieuisascto e baeo EHE MERE HUS EEUU 57 Calibration Hours essere 64 164 Calibration Labels eee 106 Calibration Label Kit 106 309 Calibration Standal dus RA eni 58 59 Calibration Status ettet epo tae tee Ra e esie 101 PaO aOR NRA aes stro m VE Eo RE EE in 102 Be Ee ate o RR RE 62 CalPro Calibration Procedures 78 Segre Ne 102 Certificates of Calibration 101 165 196 Change Level 56 75 Brice C See specific chart titles Cent Sel Vel ues oss m A ERU IU 9 31 177 84 MS SQL Installation 185 87 Client Server Versions eere 260 Cloning Gage Records esses 19 71 COLUNN O BERT 44 Comments page ENIN oO 55 Compact ibage Datdi ig e d oa FEE eti bh 224 Compact Repair Data etes 224 230 308 Con
270. ion Gage ID Use the drop down list box to select a gage ID Next Due Date This field stores the next due date for calibration based on the calibration frequency You must check the Pass checkbox field in order for GAGEtrak to show the next due date This is a calculated field you cannot edit it Calibration Date and For your convenience the date and time for a new record will default to the current Time date and time Enter in these fields the actual date and time of calibration These two fields are required Department Enter the name of the department that used the gage before calibration Action Required In this field enter any required action such as send out for repair As Found Condition Choose the condition of the gage before calibration or adjustment Select In for in tolerance Out for out of tolerance or New for a gage that hasn t been calibrated before Before calibration a test points of the gage must be within tolerance to have the as found condition set to In If you are using Auto Adjust the As Found condition will change the calibration frequency Pass Check the Pass checkbox if the gage passed calibration This will calculate the Next Due Date and update the gage records Note The calibration Status field will disappear and cannot be edited once the calibration record has been passed Calibration Status Select from the following options Passed Failed Repaired or Limited Interval Adjustment This is non edi
271. ipated this request and you ve already printed it so your first task of the day is finished almost effortlessly Next you pour your coffee turn on your computer and start up GAGEtrak to help you plan the rest of your day Your Automatic Calibration Due Listing report pops up on the screen showing all of the calibrations that are due today You print it out to use as a handy reference so that you can be sure that all of the required work is finished today Now it s time to organize the work for your calibration crew First you assemble the reports that you printed last Friday Because you have several calibration technicians and you have some gages that you must send off site for calibration you printed a separate Calibration report for each of these people or sites Along with each of these lists you include the Calibration Work Order for each gage that needs to be calibrated The Calibration Work Order includes a list of all of the Calibration Standards used along with the minimum nominal and maximum measurements for each standard You ve also been thorough enough to include the Calibration Procedures needed for each Work Order Now you re ready to send your technicians off to work One of them is going to a remote site and he ll be gone for several days so you download his calibration information to his PDA Personal Digital Assistant Now he ll be able to record all of the calibration results into the PDA When he returns on Thursda
272. ir use Please consult your systems administrator and or call CyberMetrics Technical Support prior proceeding Calculate All Due Dates If you need to re calculate calibration due dates select this utility For example if you change the calibration frequencies on all of your micrometers from 60 Days to 90 Days and you have 50 micrometer records it s easier to run this procedure than manually click the Next Calib button on the Gage Entry window for those 50 records You ll see the message shown below when you select this utility Calibration Due Dates x 2 This utility will recalculate due dates for all gages with calendar frequencies Do you wish to continue Click Yes to have GAGEtrak calculate the Next Due Date for every Gage Entry record based on Calibration Frequency and Last Due Date It deletes or overwrites any manually entered dates and dates calculated by issue tracking Utilities Edit All Tables This utility provides a direct interface for you to make changes to your records instead of going through GAGEtrak s normal data entry screens When you open it the Edit All Tables menu will appear you can choose from the following data tables Calibration Header Issue Tracking Calibration Measurement Part Record Calibration Result Codes Procedures Calibration Standards Search Criteria Field Labels Service Request Gage Master Service Request Letter Gage Procedure Links Skip Dates Gage RR Links Standard Group
273. irst few characters within a single field The Find box remains open during searches so you can find as many records as you want without repeatedly selecting the Find command If necessary drag the Find box out of the way so that you can see your records To Find Data 1 Display the table or form for the records you want to search 2 Select the field column in which you want to search unless you want to search in all fields However remember that searching a single field is faster than searching in all fields 3 Fromthe Edit menu choose Find The Find window appears Find and Replace 21x Find Replace Find What c o02 M Find Next Cancel Look In Gage ID Match Whole Field x Search Jal Match Case Search Fields As Formatted 4 Inthe Find What box type the text you want to find Use wildcard characters such as and to make your search more general 5 Set other Find dialog box options if necessary To find the first or the next occurrence of the text choose the Find Next button When you re finished close the form by selecting the X at the top right corner of form Replace Command While you re in either Form or Table view the Replace command is available via the Edit menu Within a database table you can search for and replace all or some occurrences of a specified text string including a phrase a word or part of a word For example you might want to chan
274. is based on elapsed calendar weeks Months this option bases the schedule on months DOM Day Of Month allows you to set what day of the month the calibration will typically be due on Set the calibration frequency to the number of months from the date of the last calibration When you set the frequency unit to DOM an unlabeled field will appear next to the unit control Enter the day of the month that you want for the gage to be due on For example you wanted the calibration to be due on the 10th of the month six months from the time it was last calibrated you would set the calibration frequency to 6 the unit of measure to DOM and the day to 10 Note DOM uses the skip dates and skip days feature so the gage may not always be due exactly on the day set If you enter a day that is not in every month such as 31 then the application will use the last day of the month for months with only 30 days EOM the calculated Next Due Date changes to End of Month in which the Calc Next Due Date occurred For example 6 EOM means every 6 months but the program extends the Next Due Dateto the end of the sixth month If you re using skip dates see the System Administrator s Guide GAGEtrak schedules the Next Due Date on the last working day of the month Years each year equals 365 days schedule is based on elapsed calendar years Each Use select this option if you calibrate the gage before or after each use you must manually enter yo
275. is information to each gage you re facilitating manufacturing traceability Before you can link a part to a gage you must enter the part s record in Part Entry see page 73 Gage Entry gt Information Specifications History Standards Parts Procedures Calibration Schedule R amp R Schedule User Defined Auth Persons Attachments Events Gage ID C 002 Description CALIPER DIAL 12 INCH T P Part No Description peration Drawing No E E 0 221 1 X Bracket Rt Hand Stamping 100 221 E 0 221 2 X Bracket Lt Hand Stamping 100 222 Record I4 4 3 gt PEPE of 3 Record MM bt bak of 46 Field Button Name Description Part No Select the part s ID number After you select the part number GAGEtrak will fill in the other fields with the information that you entered in Part Entry Part information on this form is read only Description The name of the part will appear in this field Operation This field stores the production operation or work center description such as Stamping or Machine 13 Drawing No The blueprint drawing number of the part appears in this field 60 Chapter 3 Entering Gage Records Gage Entry Procedures In the Gage Entry Procedures screen you can link calibration procedures to each gage Gage Entry gt Information Specifications History Standards Parts Procedures Calibration Schedule R amp R Schedule
276. it Entry ojx gt Information Required Gage Types Required Gages History Kit ID KIT D01 Description DOOR PANEL KIT Kit Issue and Return Events RETURN Time By F11 24 2003 10 50 55 Mf John Smith Production ff 11 25 2003 J 1051 17 AM Jomn Smith Gages Issued Returned For Each Kit Event Gage ID Gage Type Description Record KI 4 ll b gt i p Record I 4 1 gt E ES of 1 Record I4 4 1 gt gt i gt gt of 1 Kit Entry Reports Kitting reports list all or one specified kit and its associated Required Gage Types and Part To Be Measured To view or print the kitting report click Report from the main menu bar and select Kitting Reports Chapter 8 Entering Supplier Records Supplier Entry To begin entering supplier records go to the main menu then select the Main Records icon and click on the Supplier Entry button The Supplier Entry window will appear it is similar to the window shown below Supplier Entry Supplier Code Benet Phone 313555 21000 C Supplier Name Benett Gage Corp Fax 313 555 2121 Supplier Type Gage and Repair E Mail FO Contact Person JH White 7 Last Review 7 1572004 Salutation a LastRatingf 07 15 2004 Address 1245 Main Steet Last Received 01 12 2004 City sot Last Reject State M V Enabled zip 49555 User Defined 1 JOk to use Country USA User Defined 2 Ca
277. its title bar or the left hand side and drag it to its new location Resizing the Toolbar On its floating mode click one of the edges of the toolbar and drag it to the desired size Button Description New Record Use this button to add a new record Undo Current If you need to remove any changes to the current record click this button Field Record Delete Record Use this button to remove or delete record or records GAGEtrak asks for a confirmation to make sure you really want to make the deletion Cut Use this button to copy into memory and remove your selection when editing field entries Normally used when transferring words characters or phrases or images from one part of a paragraph or sentence to another e x 5 0 38 Chapter 2 Program Conventions Button m m E e Close Copy Paste Form View Datasheet View Find Find Next Replace Quick Filter Advanced Filter Show All Records Sort Ascending Sort Descending Close The Active Form Description Use this button to copy into memory your selection when editing entries Inserts into the field you are editing contents of memory clipboard Click this button to display your records in Form view the default presentation of your records In Form view you can see all of the fields for a record but you can see only one record at a time To display your records i
278. ject For available Permissions select a form or report first GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 207 Security Object Permissions This form is used to view a comprehensive list of objects and permissions for a selected form report control or function Security lel Ea Status Select Object Select Form Form Gage Entry E C Report C Report Control C Function Permissions p User No Access Issue Read Only Guest Read Only Calibration Read Only Admin Edit Add Delete Tolerance Text box Admin Read Write Tolerance Text box Admin Read Write AdjCalFreq Text box Admin Read Write Asset No Text box Admin Read Write Auto Adjust Calibral Check box Admin Read Write BtnLabel Command button Admin Visible Enabled P aAlHistoni SuhFarm SubRenc amp drmin ReadAsfrite The table below describes the fields on this form Field Button Name Description Select Object Select the type of object for which you would like to view permissions Select Form Report Dependent on what object was selected will be what is available for selection for Control or Function example selecting Formwill require you to select a form from the dropdown list box When the form is selected a comprehensive list of all Control Name and Type Groupand Permissionsare available for viewing Security Status The screen below shows the current security status of GAGEtrak g4 Security lel Fa _
279. k This table links gages with procedures Links Procedure Records Procs Procedures are stored in this table 222 Chapter 6 Data Tools Table Name Export Filename Helpful Information Calibration Results RsltCode The Result Codes table stores your Automatic Frequency Adjustmentfactors Skip Dates SkipDate This table stores all of the dates that the program skips when it calculates Next Due Datesfor gages Standard Group StdGroup This table stores the standards ID nominal etc values for each standard group One standard group may have no one or more entries in this table Standard Group StdHead This table stores the information for the standard group itself Header Each standard group will have one header record Gage Status Status The Status table contains all of your gage status options Supplier Records Supplier The Supplier table stores all of your supplier information After you ve selected one or more tables to export click the Export Table s button 84 Export Import _ O x Export Import Table s To Export Format to Export To Calibration Header Excel 2000 Calibration Measurements Gage Calibration Standards Saved Advanced Filters Custom Field Labels Gage Records Gage Part Links gt Export Table s The Export program automatically sends the file s to the directory where your program file resides When the export Is finished a message will tell you that GAGEtrak has successfully exported th
280. l approximately 1 long before printing This is a direct result of the design of these label printers The diagram below illustrates the mechanics of the P Touch printer Approximately 1 M Clear Laminate Q 9 At point A in the diagram the print head transfers ink from the ink strip to the back of the clear laminate Rollers bond the color substrate and the clear laminate together at point B The laminated tape is then fed out until it reaches the cutter at point C The cutter is approximately one inch beyond the print head along the path of the tape therefore at the beginning of the printing process about one inch of blank tape has already advanced past the print head This problem cannot be eliminated however it can be mitigated by printing labels in batches rather than individually since the printer will feed a blank strip only at the beginning of each batch of labels To previewa label select the View Label button The View Label button will open the report editor allowing for viewing or editing of the label prior to printing GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 167 Printing Labels from the Calibration Labels Report To print labels in a batch go to the main menu then select the Reports icon and click on the report group Calibration History Reports A list of reports will appear beneath this report group click on the Calibration Label report that corresponds with the label size you wish to print A
281. l Micrometers FEELER GAGE PERSONAL 0 200 LB S DIGITAL FORCE GAUGE OLIN WING SPAN GAGE 848 010 0 0 1 50 GPM LIQUID FLOWMETER Multimeter Results G 1230192 Digital Indicator n G 3862C 002 Temp Controller Action Required 41230196 Digital Scale Findings GNG 00013 Go NoGo Pin Gage GNG124 SMWO1 GO NOGO 051 055 GNG125 SMWO1 GO NOGO 052 055 2 Uncertainty 4 4565 20 028 Step Gage M MSA5G 5 6 OD MIC 0001 MITUTOYO MSGB1 GAGE BLOCK SET 81 PC Humidity Status M Active MSA Graph Certificate Gage Entry Record 14 4 61 gt i gt of 61 Each calibration record contains the following fields Field Button Name Gage ID Use the drop down list box to select from a list of available Gage IDs Description Tip Once you ve selected a gage to calibrate do not change this field After you save the calibration record you can t edit this field If you want to enter another calibration record for this gage or for another gage click the New Record button first Description GAGEtrak looks up the gage s description from its Gage Entry record and displays it here you can t edit it in this screen Gage S N This field displays the gage s serial number you can t change it here Calib Freq After you mark the gage as having passed calibration GAGEtrak displays the calibration frequency that you entered in Gage Entry If you need to edit this value do so in Gage Entry Calibration frequencies
282. lear Click the Add button to add a criterion Select a criterion from the list and Buttons click on Remove to delete the selected criterion The Clear button deletes all criteria Or Button By default criteria are linked with the AND connector Select the OR button before adding a criterion to use OR instead of AND Ok Button Click OKto apply the changes you have made to your criteria Cancel Button Click Cancelto discard the changes you have made to your criteria Adding a Bar Code Bar codes of Gage IDs can be created by adding the terminator character at the beginning and end of the Gage ID and formatting the resulting character string in a bar code font Since the Gage IDs are taken directly from the field data it s easy to do this automatically to all your Gage IDs without altering your database One way to do this is to modify the SQL statement for your data source and add a new field containing the terminator characters and the Gage ID field giving it an alias such as BCode H Report Designer Gage Listing with Barcode Fe lal xl File Edit View Insert Format Tools Help DERRY Behean cos m db je Sp gero St St S AQ Design Preview Jr amp Ba ie e s B E MainReport H ReportHeader fj cee eee soe Se UE Se PageHeader j Detail H 5 PageFooter El 5 A o o Boro ae ee nt ami qM 15 x
283. lease write down any error messages and call Technical Support at 480 922 7300 for further instructions Repairing Data Files Although GAGEtrak has been designed to be as trouble free as possible error messages may appear because of occurrences like power outages accidental resetting of your computer network disconnects and other mishaps In these cases you might need to repair and compact your data file GTDATA60 MDBJ You can do this by selecting the Compact Repair Data utility from the Data Tools menu Depending on the size of your file this may take several minutes to complete Network users should make sure that no one else is running GAGEtrak when someone is performing this operation If you cannot open your GAGEtrak database click the Windows Start button select Programs choose the GAGEtrak 6 program group and run Compact Database If the error message persists when you re trying to run the program contact Technical Support immediately at 480 922 7300 for additional instructions Duplicate Value Error Message An error message may appear if you enter two records with the same key field values IBIITeI Te CER ET Uo m B x Gage ID can not be duplicated The Gage ID must be unique Enter a unique Gage ID or select Edit Undo You ll receive a similar message if you enter wo gage records with the same gage ID wo calibration standards with the same name for the same gage wo procedures with the same proced
284. lect Label Type window will appear Select Label Type Calibration Label 1 2W x 2L Calibration Label 1 2W x 3L Calibration Label 1 4W x 1L Calibration Label 1W x 1L Calibration Label 1wW x 2L Calibration Label 1W x 3L View Print Close Select an appropriate label size for the gage being issued When you click on the View button you will be prompted to select a label printer once you have done so the Custom Report Editor will open to show you a preview of the selected label Close the Custom Report Editor to return to Select Label Type click Print to print the issue label or Close to close Select Label Type and return to Issue Label The printed label shows the predicted Next Due date for a gage based on the frequency set for the gage unless the frequency was set to Usage or Cycles then the st Due date will appear on the label Received Date and These fields track the date and time at which the gage was returned Click the small Received Time button next to Received Dateto insert the current date and time Received From In this field enter the name of the person who returned the gage Cycles Enter the number of cycles performed by the gage usually 1 GAGEtrak adds this number to any previous cycles for the gage It uses that number to calculate the Next Due Date for gages that calibrated according to cycles Use Left The value in the Use Left field is a decreasing value based on how many times you hav
285. lected file with that file type application Calibration Entry Labels Calibration Entry gt Calibration Measurements Procedures Labels Signature Attachments User Defined Calibration Scans Gage ID c 002 X Select Label Design ReportN ame Calibration Failed 1 2 x 3L Calibration Label 1 4w x 1L Calibration Label 1 4w x 2L Calibration Label 1 4w x 3L Calibration Label 1 x 1L Calibration Label Tw 2L Calibration Label 1 x 3L Inactive Gage Label 1 2W x 1 1 2L No Calibration Gage Label 1 2 x 1 1 2L View Label Print Label Edit Label Tape Record I 4 1 gt gt i gt of 62 In the Labels tab you can print a calibration label for the current record Just select the name of the label you wish to print in the Select Label Design drop down menu You can use this feature only if you ve installed the optional GAGEtrak Calibration Label Kit printer and software shown below The Calibration Label Kit prints durable laminated cut to length calibration labels It includes a printer that attaches to your PC s serial or USB port so it won t interfere with your default printer It also includes label design software fonts clip art and bar codes features that let you use it for many other quality control and production labeling applications For more information about the kit please contact CyberMetrics Corporation or your distributor If you have purchased the Calibration Label
286. led calibrations will continue at the old calibration frequency the New Calibration Frequency form will appear when new record is selected that will contain a recommended change based on what was selected for the Gage Frequency Adjusting Method under Gage Entry The recommended change will be updated in the future and could possibly revert to no change If that happens you will be asked during each calibration to approve the latest recommended change on a gage by gage basis If there are multiple recommended changes because more than one frequency is in use you will be asked to confirm that GAGEtrak is suggesting the right one When you are asked you will also have the opportunity to manually enter a calibration frequency 97 98 Chapter 11 Entering Calibration Records B3 New Calibration Frequency x New Calibration Frequency x Dropdown listbox on this Form shows suggested new frequencies You may change the frequency for this gage or select from the list to apply the suggested frequency Ok Cancel ZS Calibration Entry x P Calibration Measurements Procedures Labels Signature Attachments User Defined Calibration Scans Gage ID C 002 CALIPER DIAL 12 INCH Description Gage S N Calib Freq Calibration Date Department Calibration Type COMPARATOR CTGO02 DB S N 1 14 Kodak Optical Comparator SUNDSTRAND THREAD GAGE 0001 NO 3 Dial Bore MITUTOYO 0001 ELEC DROP IND Digita
287. lib Services Gages GageID Gage S N __ 022E Digital Caliper SN 137678 Caliper 5i SN198034674 Digital Indicator pie Record I 4 1 gt i rx of 2 To create a new supplier record click the New Record button at the bottom of the window Each supplier record contains the following fields Field Button Name Description Supplier Code Enter a unique supplier ID or code for each supplier Supplier Name Enter the company name of the supplier Supplier Type Use this field to categorize your suppliers by the type s of goods sold Contact Person Enter the name of the contact person for this supplier company Salutation Enter a salutation for the company contact to be used for written correspondence such as Mr Ms or Mrs Leave this field blank if you don t want to use a salutation i e Joe Smith vs Mr Joe Smith Address City State Enter the complete supplier address including phone and fax numbers Zip Country Phone and Fax E Mail Use this field to store the contact person s e mail address Last Review Enter the date of the last quality review and last quality rating for this supplier and Last Rating Last Received Enter the date on which you last received a shipment from this supplier and the date and Last Rejected on which you last rejected a shipment from this supplier 87 88 Chapter 8 Supplier Records Field Button Name Description Enabled Check this box to indicate t
288. libration status Passed Failed Repaired or Limited Findings Use this memo field to describe any other pertinent information such as visual inspection notes You can scroll through this field if you need more room for text Note Your certificates of calibration will include this field 2 Uncertainty This field is for the Uncertainty sum input by user Coverage Factor k This multiplier is used to convert Combined Uncertainty to Expanded Uncertainty Deg of Freedom This is also called effective degrees of freedom If input on the Calibration form this value will appear on the Certificate of Calibration and on the Failure Notice reports Environmental Enter the relevant environmental conditions for the calibration Humidity Conditions Temperature Pressure or any other factor that may affect results Status The indicated status of the gage at the time of calibration will reflect as 1 Active 2 In Active 3 Out for Repair 4 In Calibration 5 Lost Note The calibration Status field will disappear and cannot be edited once the calibration record has been passed Est Costs Projected calibration cost Cost To track your costs enter any expenses related to this calibration such as internal labor material costs or outside calibration service costs Hours There are two fields for hours The gray Hoursfield will display the estimated hours that you entered for this gage in Gage Entry The white Hoursfield applies to this particular calibra
289. luding descriptions and uses R amp R REPORTS Report Description R amp R Due Listing by Select a report by specific report for viewing printing specific R amp R Due Listing information These reports lists gages that are due for R amp R studies Reports for each R amp R study may be printed from Gage R amp R 164 Chapter 13 Reports MISCELLANEOUS REPORTS Report Description Audit Log Detail Lists all user activity including audit ID date time user object action data key and field old and new values Supplier Listing This report lists your suppliers Check Enabled to see only active suppliers To see both active and inactive suppliers uncheck Enabled Procedure Listing To see a list of calibration procedures choose this report Check the Summary Listing By Gage IDbox to include the gages linked to each procedure Corrective Action Service Use this report for a list of open or closed corrective action or service Requests requests For each request the report lists the date supplier requester gage ID type of request and status Group Permissions and This report prints a complete listing of group permissions and users and Users their access permission on the forms reports and controls of the program Access to this and all other reports can be limited through Security MSA Summary Report At a glance MSA V2 and MSA V3 study type totals STAFF REPORTS Report Description Gage Authorized Users This report lists yo
290. ly release all frozen columns at once Other Commands and Functions Output To Command for Records The Output To command for records from the File menu allows you to transmit records to Rich Text Format RTF MS DOS Text TXT Microsoft IIS HTX IDC Microsoft Excel XLS Microsoft Active Server Pages ASP and HTML HTM HTML If you save a record in RTF format and then open that record file in a word processing application such as Microsoft Word your data will have the appearance and formatting of the GAGEtrak datasheet that you exported If you output to a text file all of the data will be present but the formatting will be lost Output to an Excel spreadsheet is the best option to select when you wish to export records created from Datasheet view see the description for Output To for reports under A eport Commands and Functions beginning on page 161 The following is an example of the output selections for the Gage Master Entry datasheet Output All and Selection options are not available with the Output To option Output To Fa E Select Format Rich Text Format rth ext Ext icrosol htx idc Cancel Microsoft Excel xls m Output C al gt Selection Microsoft Active Server Pages HTML htm html Send Command E mail Reports The Send command from the File menu allows you to send datasheets to Microsoft Outlook or any MAPI compatible mail program The output include
291. may not apply to you Copyright CyberMetrics Corporation All Rights Reserved aping uelis YND Table of Contents CC PA RECIDIID e 1 Chapter 1 riso Rer P MX IBI RIAM OO hit 3 Measurement and Calibration cccccccccscccssscssssssssssscsccccccccccccscccccccccccccccccccccscccccccccccccccccccccesccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccceccscsscsssesess 3 enuen S J SN Chapter 2 How Does GAGEtrak Work sosoesosocoosocoesosoesosocsosocoosocoesosoecosoccosocoosocoesosocsosocsosocoesocsososoesosoesessesese 1 A Typical Day in the Calibration Laboratory udi EEEE ee aie IN 5 EIAS TL E m EAE EE 8 Chapter 3 Installing and Running GAGEtrak 4 4 4 eren rene eee enero rn eno sn ene eneeenesaess Qj Chapter 4 Entering Gage Records 4 4 4 4 rene rene eere rere rn eno en ene en ere en een enesaesesseseeseseesesees 13 oade EDIDI or OLANDA REA I UR NENT oe Re nee CN NUDO Ten Ont 13 Gage IBformallon danti an ce HIA Tai do d d ain sb Taranto OA 14 Calibration Standards EU easi oisi odora ER OS Meno ao EO vt Fo D B cae i Dae besitos E e uon eid bee ftese e UD DE tu DR UD iiee 14 Gage Entry Calibration Schedule RI RR PR PT PP 16 Gage R amp R Repeatability amp Reproducibility Schedule cccsssesssscscsesssssesessssssss
292. mbined uncertainty df combined effective degrees of freedom k coverage factor U expanded uncertainty u P xc ED ian A a U 2 a GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 143 U u xk offor uncertainty of linearity are not specified in the usual literature GAGEtrak uses the dffrom d row1 1as a reasonable estimate The following Weibull approximation of affrom d row 1 1 is used for gm 20 gm 3 df gm 1 x E i Stability and Bias When we choose a calibration frequency of say every 6 months it is in the assumption or hope that the gage calibration will remain stable for that length of time A Stability Study verifies this assumption to see if it is true Plotting a control chart of calibration for a particular reference standard does this For example we could check a 1 inch gage block 3 times and do this once a week for 25 weeks or once every two weeks for 50 weeks Automotive requirements call for a minimum of 25 data points to establish stability During the study adjustments are not usually made unless there is an instability signal Instability signals include 1 point out of limits 2 points out of 3 beyond 2 3 of a limit or 7 points in a row on the same side of the central line some industries use 8 or 9 points in a row See one of the references on statistical process control SPC for more information The X bar or X chart detects changes in bias If these charts are s
293. me Gage Entry in the above example Click the title bar to drag the table window to a new location Menu Bar The menu bar located above the title bar typically has menus for File Edit View Format Records Bookmarks and Help To select a menu click on the menu title and a list of menu commands will appear Some menu items may not be available they will appear gray Control Menu Icon Click on this icon located to the left of the title bar to change the table window s size and location You can also use it to close the window Record Selector Buttons S3 Gage Entry m CTGODZ Record selector buttons are small rectangular buttons located on the far left side of each row Use them to select the entire record for copying or deletion You can also use them to store any changes made to the record if you change any fields an icon of a pencil will appear on the button click on the button to write your changes to the database You can select multiple records by clicking and dragging your mouse pointer over the desired records To select all records between two records first click on the first record then hold the SHIFT key while you click on the last record This operation selects all records between the first and last records A selector button that has an asterisk on it indicates that a row is a new record position it will always be located at the bottom of the table Record Selector Bar Symbols gt Current Re
294. me and prevents the mistakes that you can make when you manually assess your measurement systems You ll soon find that it s an essential tool for analyzing and managing your MSA studies This feature was designed for calibration technicians metrologists inspectors and other quality control professionals who need a convenient easy to use method for documenting tracking and performing measurement systems analysis The software Is based primarily on the techniques described in the AIAG MSA guide and other industry publications for more information see the reference list that begins on page 158 Before starting SPC capability studies or any type of repetitive measuring use MSA to make sure that your measurement system can give you reliable measurements Instructions for performing studies on your measurement system are given throughout this chapter About the Manual Software and Technical Support The purpose of this guide is to help you learn how to operate the software It s not meant to be an authoritative guide on conducting analyzing and interpreting your gage MSA studies Although this manual describes MSA study procedures they are simply the views as documented by various industry publications The software is simply a tool used to store data calculate results and generate printed reports and charts It does not determine whether a measurement system is good or bad As the user this determination is your sole responsibility I
295. measuring 81 82 Chapter 7 Kit Entry Kit Entry Required Gage Types Enter the following information about the gages and parts to be measured When selecting a Required Gage Type it Is not necessary to select gages of that particular gage type under Required Gages because when a gage type is selected under Required Gage Types you are essentially telling the application that the kit will include one or more gages of that type Likewise when you select a gage in Required Gages you are telling the application that that kit will include that exact gage So there is no need to pick a specific gage when you have already specified that a gage of that type would be included in the kit Refer to scenarios after Required Gages Kit Entry P Information Required Gage Types Required Gages History KitID KIT 001 Description DOOR PANEL KIT Gage Type Quantity Record I4 4 1 0 MES of 1 Record i 4 Il 1 P rtr of 1 Record I4 4 1 gt gt i gt gt of 1 Field Button Name Description Gage Type Gage Type Unit of Measure Size select the types of gages that are used in the kit These fields can contain an unlimited number of gages types units of measure size Quantity Total per Gage Type Parts Measured with Select the parts that will be measured with each gage type Using this feature helps you keep track of gages and parts by automatically linking parts to gages when a kit is checked out The information i
296. mp MR Note Despite the name Individual Chart when the subgroup size is greater than 1 averages are plotted Histogram This chart is used to show the central tendency spread and shape of the distribution Example Histogram Frequency Measured Values Calculated Control Chart Fields These are calculated from the data unless you specified to use historic values for X bar and Sigma Field Name Description UCL Upper Control Limit for mean or range etc AVG Average mean or average range etc LCL Lower Control Limit for mean or range etc GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 147 Control Chart Formulas m subgroup size number of observations in sub group g number of subgroups X individual sample measurement X reference value R Range X subgroup average s subgroup standard deviation O repeatability standard deviation SE standard error of bias A A B B4 C do D D control chart constants based on value of 7m as shown in the table below m amp A oe a amp B 2 rarer zese o 327 omms 0 3267 m swo o 2sm osse of 256 4 072660 naso o 222 osmme of 2266 8 ose 1799 o 2ws osmp of 2o89 6 o4Bps 12678 o 200 oss omo 19m T oxigen mewe oo 9 oss99 omB 1 882 espsi sowow ons 8 og soo ores ims 9 oxwo see oa se ogan oza i7 oss osso 0223 77 osme ozsa ue X amp R Charts X
297. mportant The technical support available for this software is limited strictly to the operat on of the software We cannot provide advice or support on interpreting results or charts If you have interpretation questions please consult your customer a statistician or other qualified professional Validating the Software This software has been tested validated and deemed suitable for release Calculation validations were conducted using test data with known results However you should still conduct your own validation tests using data with known results those that you calculate by hand or proven published values When comparing the software results to your manually calculated results remember that you may find differences due to rounding errors The software uses up to 17 significant digits of precision in all intermediate calculations rounding only the final results Terms and Definitions Before using the GRR Module you may want to familiarize yourself with these terms 113 114 Chapter 12 MSA Entry Bias The difference between the observed average of measurements and the reference value is known as bas sometimes called accuracy however accuracy is a qualitative term that should be avoided when referring to bias The reference value accepted reference value or master value functions as an agreed upon reference for the measured values You can determine a reference value by using a higher level of measuring equipment suc
298. n Stores data for uncertainty calculations Associated From Uncertainty Studies Field List Data Type Length GRR Results ID Long Integer key 4 Setup LinBiasPlusMinus Single 4 Setup OnlyBiasPlusMinus Single 4 Setup UncorrectedPlusMinus Single 4 Setup LinBiasDF Single 4 Setup OnlyBiasDF Single 4 Setup UncorrectedDF Single 4 Setup LinBiasInclude Integer 2 Setup OnlyBiasInclude Single 4 Setup UncorrectedInclude Single 4 Setup BiasCorrectedPlusMinus Single 4 Setup ResolutionPlusMinus Single 4 Setup GRRPlusMinus Single 4 Setup BiasCorrectedDF Single 4 Setup ResolutionDF Text 50 Setup GRRDF Single 4 GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 297 Field List Data Type Length Setup_BiasCorrectedInclude Single 4 Setup ResolutionInclude Single 4 Setup GRRInclude Single 4 Budget Uncert Rowl Text 50 Budget Type Row1 Text 50 Budget PlusMinus Row1 Single 4 Budget Prob Row1 Text 50 Budget Divisor Row1 Single 4 Budget SensiCOE Row1 Single 4 Budget UncertCont Row1 Single 4 Budget DF Row Text 50 Budget Uncert Row2 Text 50 Budget Type Row2 Text 50 Budget PlusMinus Row2 Single 4 Budget Prob Row2 Text 50 Budget Divisor Row2 Single 4 Budget SensiCOE Row2 Single 4 Budget UncertCont Row2 Single 4 Budget DF Row2 Text 50 Budget Uncert Row3 Text 50 Budget Type Row3 Text 50 Budget PlusMinus Row3 Single 4 Budget Prob Row3 Text 50 Budget Divisor Row3 Single 4 Budget SensiCOE Row3 Single 4 Budget UncertCont Row3 Single 4 Bu
299. n Management Software User s Manual 41 Since the program automatically presents records in Form view you must manually switch to Table view use the toolbar button or select Datasheet View from the View menu Sample Datasheet View of Gage Records Gage Entry jai x SN19803467 Comparati GONOG Bore Gaq SUNDSTRANL 0001 NO 3E MITUTOYO 01 Digital Microme FEELER GAGE 0 200LB S DIC OLIN WING SF 0 0 1 50 GPM FMM 00003 Multimeter G 1230192 Digital Indicato 3 3852C 002 Temp Controlle G A1230196 Digital Scale f DROP INI Digitala FEELER DIGITALI FIXTURE FLOWME Fluke 73 Diaital a jannnananangsnanananananananaan Digital a E EM Digital va 8510 Digital a Attribute PLUG GA PLUG GA Step Gaq MICROME GAGE BL MICROME MICROME MICROME MICROME MICROME MICROME PLUG GA PLUG GA PLUG G PLUG GA gt GNG 00013 Go NoGo Pin GNG124 SMW01 GO N GNG125 SMW01 GO NI L44565 20 028 Step Gat MSA56 5 6 OD MIC MSGB1 GAGE BLOCK MSM12 MSM23 Ht Tt ttt tt LEE LLL I I I SDIO2 2515G SDI02 2515 G Record 14 Tb rt rese or 46 Elements of a Table View Window All Table view windows have the following elements Title Bar Located at the top of each table the title bar contains the table s na
300. n Text 50 Industry Experience Text 50 Related Experience Text 50 Management Experience Text 50 Salary Double Comments Memo SupervisorlD Long Integer SpouseName Text 50 EmrgcyContactName Text 50 EmrgcyContactPhone Text 50 Seniority Text 50 Shift Text 50 Crew Text 50 SkillLevel Text 50 User1 Text 50 User2 Text 50 Staff Photo Long Binary 0 Overwrite Warning Long Integer Table Name Staff User List Description Staff and security user cross reference table Associated From Staff User List Field List Data Type Length UserlD Text key 150 Employee ID Text key 50 Table Name Standard Group Description Contains attributes of a particular standard group Associated From Standard Group SubForm Edit Standard Group Field List Data Type Length Standard Group Text key 50 Standard ID Text key 50 Minimum Double 8 Nominal Double 8 Maximum Double 8 Units Text 50 CS Type Text 50 GT Format Text 50 GM Type Text 50 Comments Memo 0 CM Calibration ID Text 50 294 Appendix B Table Definitions Table Name Standard Header Description Contains attributes of a particular standard Associated From Standard Header Field List Data Type Length Standard Group Text key 50 Description Text 50 Resolution Text 50 Operating_Range Text 50 Plus Tolerance Text 50 Minus Tolerance Text 50 FloatFixed Long Integer 4 Table Name States Description State region province information Associated From States Field List Da
301. n a tabular format click this button Table views allow you to view many records at a time available only in certain record entry screens Use this command to search for specific information Place your cursor in the field containing the category by which you want to search then click this button The Find window opens and you can enter the information that you want to locate After you ve closed the Find window click the Find Nextbutton to locate the next instance of the information for which you re searching Place your cursor in the field containing the information you want to replace The Replace window will prompt you for Find Whatand Replace With You can replace any or all occurrences of the same information Use this filter to quickly find records based on a simple search Use this button to open the Advanced Filter window You can then filter for a group of records that match the criteria you enter You can also open previously saved criteria for use and create and save new criteria Use this button to clear any filter and show all records Select this button to sort all of your records in ascending order numbers show before letters Click this button to sort all of your records in descending order numbers show after letters Select this button to close out of the current form and to return to the Main Menu Pop Up Calendar for Date Fields You can enter dates by choosing them from a pop up calendar instead of manuall
302. n calibration measurements for every calibration header Data Type Long Integer key Text Date Time Date Time Text Text Long Integer Date Time Date Time Long Integer Length 4 50 8 8 150 50 FP oo A Associated From Calibration Measurement SubForm Calibration Entry Measurements tab Edit Calibration Measurement Field List Data Type Length Gage ID Text key 50 Calibration Date Date Time key 8 Calibration Time Date Time key 8 Gage Standard ID Text key 50 CM Before Double 8 CM After Double 8 Minimum Double 8 Nominal Double 8 Maximum Double 8 Uncert Double 8 CM Calibration ID Text 50 LimitUse Long Integer 4 Units Text 50 CM_Type Text 50 GM_Type Text 50 Comments Memo 0 GT_Format Text 50 StdDueDate Date Time 8 StdLastDate Date Time 8 Table Name Calibration Procedure Link 270 Appendix B Table Definitions Description Links and lists calibration information for a particular gage Associated From Calibration Entry Procedure tab Field List Data Type Length Gage ID Text key 50 Calibration Date Date Time key Calibration Time Date Time key 8 Procedure Name Text 50 Table Name Calibration Scans Description Contains calibration scan records Associated From frmSubCalibration Scans Calibration Entry Scans tab Field List Data Type Length Gage ID Text key 50 Calibration_Date Date Time key 8 Calibration Time Date Time key 8 File Path Text key 255 Scan Date
303. n limit for the part If attribute data will be used for reference values enter a numerical code for pass GRR If the variable gage has a known GRR for this part characteristic enter it here Percentage Format Select the format you want for calculations Input Tab B Gage RR Attribute Risk Analysis mi x P Information Input Crosstabs Effectiveness Miss Rate Analysis Signal Detection Study Date 1101 2002 Co Part No Mss Gage ID ozztDgisCaeroS J PatNo iozzi x Appraisers 4 Randy B JAllan C Danny Decision E Code pire qp T iTi Ti oe eser fms RR ETT i i i E scons fi s o o fo o o o Pon poses oat e spo po 27 o s s ite pseersz ain f spo To fo o o o te psr fates Ja s 1 Ti fo i o i p sees esr cc Bnn 1 o i ie paes fi ied sp T Ti 1 i i e fesses fn f spo To fo o s s ite per pe 5 TENEN EN 1 i ae psss fen up 1 i a paes finn amm fo fo fo a o i s o3 psss fades faked Boo 1 i i lim poer near je wp Te CCE pepe Eu sess eim jud Prefill Calc Print Record I4 4 ll 0b gt i gt gt of 1 The Input tab contains these fields and buttons Field Button Name Description Appraiser A B and C In these fields enter the name of each appraiser Appraiser 1 50 Enter the appraiser s measurement results in these fields Decision 1 50 The Pass or Fail Decision made by the Reference Value will appea
304. n the gage usage even if you enter a calibration record for the gage When you issue the gage GAGEtrak calculates a predicted estimated due date based on the remaining number of usages days You must use the Issue Tracking records for this to work Cycles similar in principle to the usage days method but it tells the program to schedule calibration only when the total number of cycles equals the calibration frequency value You must use the Issue Tracking records for this schedule to work Bef Use select this option if you calibrate the gage before every use you must manually enter your due dates Aft Use select this option if you calibrate the gage after every use you must manually enter your due dates Gage Frequency If you want GAGEtrak to change this gage s calibration frequency according to its as Adjusting Interval found condition before calibration make a selection from the Gage Frequency Adjusting Interval field Minimum and The lowest and highest frequency a calibration can be adjusted to when Auto Adjust Maximum Frequenc Calibration Frequencyis checked Average Cycles Usage Enter value for cycles or usages per day This field will not become available unless Per Day Cycles Usages is selected for Calib Freq Skip Direction If the calibration date falls on a skip date this determines whether to move the calibration date forward or backward Calibration Hours In this field enter the actual or estimated time it take
305. n the selected menu You can customize field values in the Menu Bar Custom Namefield by entering a new value text in this field for example changing amp File with amp Options will display Options on the menu bar instead of File Default option names available under the main menu default name for example File as a main menu option will contain additional options such as Close etc You can customize field values under the Menu Bar Custom Namefield by entering a new value text in this field for example changing amp Copy with amp Duplicate will display Duplicate as a selection on the dropdown menu for Edit To exit this screen without saving your changes click the Cance button If you want to save your changes click C oseto return to the main menu GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 203 Settings Messages The tabs within the main menu features can be revised to be more client expressive for example the Measurements tab can be revised to read Capacity in Calibration Entry ES Settings RT FEY User Info General Cal Options Calendar Security Automatic Numbering Interface Custom Labels Gage Custom Calibration Custom Form Captions Form Tabs Main Menu MenuBar Messages Message Test Message Title P You must have a printer installed before viewing Graph fe Tre folowing enor occuned amp Enor ooo There is no select
306. n these fields is optional and you only need to use this feature if your company is required to keep track of all parts that are measured by your gages Part No Description Part identification Kit Entry Required Gage Select the specific gages to be used in this kit Kit Entry gt Information Required Gage Types Required Gages History KitID KIT 001 Description DOOR PANEL KIT Gage ID Description Current Location CALIPER DIAL 12 INCH 14 Kodak Optical Comparator SUNDSTRAND THREAD GAGE MITUTOYO 0001 ELEC DROP IND Digital Micrometers FEELER GAGE PERSONAL 0 200 LE S DIGITAL FORCE GAUGE OLIN WING SPAN GAGE 848 010 0 0 1 50 GPM LIQUID FLOWMETER Multimeter Digital Indicator Temp Controller Digital Scale Go NoGo Pin Gage SMW0O1 GO NOGO 051 055 SMWO1 GO NOGO 052 055 028 Step Gage 5 6 OD MIC 0001 MITUTOYO GAGE BLOCK SET 81 PC 1 2 OD MIC 0001 MITUTOYO Record I4 4 1 gt gt i gt gt of 1 Scenarios Gage ID Gage Type Aoo1 Type A Aoo2 Type A A003 Type A GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 83 If you wish to issue Gage ID A001 select the Required Gages tab and select Gage ID A001 When this kit is issued you will be issuing Gage ID A001 f you wish to issue either Gage ID A001 A002 or A003 select the Required Gage Types tab and select Gage Type Type A When this kit is issued you will be issuing Gage ID A001 A002
307. n to compare the actual before and after measurements of the gage with the standards that you use to calibrate the gage You will use these fields in the Measurements screen Field Button Name Description Standard ID GAGEtrak copies the Standard Ds from the Calibration Standards table that you defined in Gage Entry see page 57 Type Two types of calibration standards available Variable Vor Attribute A Select Variable for those standards that have a value that you actually measure such as 0 502 inches Select Attribute for pass fail or visual types of checks Selecting Attribute does not calculate accuracy of particular standard GAGEtrak copies it from Gage Entry if entered or you can select it here Units The program also copies the units of measurement from Gage Entry Minimum Nominal GAGEtrak copies the gage s Minimum Nominal and Maximumvalues from Gage and Maximum Entry GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 101 Field Button Name Description Ref Type Enter the type of the reference standard being used as to Attribute or the specific type of the reference gage Format Specify the format for the numeric display Before Enter the actual measurement observed before you adjust the gage The button to the right of this field brings up the Calibration Formula Listing for more information see Calibration Formula Listing on page 101 After Next enter the actual measurement observed after you adjust
308. n users using this screen Security Sil ka User ID Default User M Name eit Jones pen Form X Add Delete Password All Groups Member Of Admin Calibration Add gt gt Remove The table below describes the fields on this form Field Button Name Description User ID Select the user you wish to view or enter a new user name Note If a User ID is the same as a retired User ID in 21 CFR Part 11 the retired user ID cannot be duplicated Name Full name of this user Open Form Select the form that you want this user to see when the application starts Add and Delete Button Add or delete a user from the current user listing Note If 21 CFR was selected upon installation and the Default account with Admin rights is deleted a new Default User will be created upon re login If Standard was selected upon installation and Enable Security was enabled after an Admin user was added and then deleted the application will automatically open without login restrictions and Enable Security will still be activated Password Button Select this key to add or change the current users password 206 Chapter 4 Setting Up GAGEtrak Field Button Name Description All Groups List Box When a User ID is entered in the User Dfield the default or added Groupnames become available in the All Groups list box and are available for user to be a Member Ofassignment Members Of List Box Group selected user
309. nd a button for Send as an email attachment We ll discuss each type of chart next X bar amp R charts Average and Range Charts These charts will be familiar to many users because they are used extensively in manufacturing They work best for small subgroup sizes and are not recommended for subgroup sizes of 9 or 10 They do not work for a subgroup size of 1 146 Chapter 12 MSA Entry Example Stability Control Chart Averages 11 21 2003 11 21 2003 11 21 2003 11 21 2003 11 21 2003 11 21 2003 11 21 2003 11 21 2003 11 21 2003 11 21 2003 11 21 2003 11 21 2003 11 21 2003 11 21 2003 11 21 2003 Ref 6 010000 UCL 6 296320 Avg 6 020600 LCL 5 744880 Ranges a p 3 iw UCL 1 010970 Avg 0 478000 LCL 0 000000 X bar amp s Charts Average and Standard Deviation Charts These charts work well for subgroup sizes of 2 and up They do not work for a subgroup size of 1 X amp MR Charts Individual and Moving Range Charts These charts work for a subgroup size of 1 and up Control Limits are based on variation between subgroups rather than variation within subgroups The ability to use a subgroup size of one allows use for destructive or non replicable measurements See Chapter 4 of Measurement Systems Analysis Third Edition MSA3 for more information and other applications For subgroups sizes larger than 1 the other charts are usually preferred but if their limits seem too tight or too loose then use X a
310. ndard Group DotalCaipergE Standard ID Type Units Minimum Nominal Ref Type Gage ID of Standard Format I Block 0 Inch x V E Inch 0 001 o 0 001 GAGE BLOCK S T MSGB1 z 000 T J 2 Block 1 Inch M bd finch 0 23 1 023 1 001 GAGE BLOCK S X MSGB1 bd 4 000 X 3 Block 2 Inch M X finch 1 399 2 2 001 GAGE BLOCK S M wsae1 4 000 M PreFill Record I 4 T 1b bl rs of 46 58 Chapter 3 Entering Gage Records Calibration Standard Records Use these records to define the list of standards or test parameters that are measured when this gage Is calibrated Later when you enter a calibration record for the gage GAGEtrak automatically copies this list to the calibration record It sorts and displays your calibration standards in ascending order based on the standard IDs You can enter as many calibration standards as you need The Calibration Standards table contains these fields Field Button Name Standard ID Type Units Minimum Nominal Maximum Ref Type Gage ID of Standard Format Standards Prefill Entry Description Enter the name or ID of the calibration standard or checkpoint for example Gage Block Each standard ID that you enter for the gage must be unique If you need to use the same name for multiple standards number or letter each name For example if you re using CMM Check in more than one standard ID number the name for e
311. ng the bar coded labels on each gage A second scan across bar coded department identification completes the gage return information Because you expect your auditor to arrive tomorrow you print the Calibration History with Measurements report for the last three months for all of your gages You also print the Standards Traceability report which shows all of the reference standards associated with your calibration standards for every calibration Now you have documented proof as to exactly which instrument or standard you used to calibrate each gage If your auditor asks for more information about your reference standards you can quickly generate reports showing each one s NIST number uncertainty calibration schedule calibration history calibration certificate numbers and even the exact calibration measurements since you ve entered this much detail into your GAGEtrak records It s time to go home now and you re ready to go As you leave you try to remember what your workday was like before you had GAGEtrak How did you ever manage 8 Chapter 2 How Does GAGEtrak Work Benefits As you can see using GAGEtrak and its accessories saved you a lot of time effort and stress Let s list these benefits by what feature of the program they used 1 2 You easily and quickly generated an accurate Calibration Schedule You also easily generated an Automatic Calibration Due Listing report that told you what you had to do for the day Plus
312. nges of each appraiser s readings including the average range and control limits You can choose to plot the data grouped by part or grouped by appraiser Example Range Chart Appraiser Part 0 1280 0 0280 xa amp o28o2moxado o3mgosmosumos mGos dsmGo C6 AT AIO B10 C10 UCL 0 1254 Ava 0 0383 Range Chart Interpretation The Range chart can help you determine both statistical control in regard to repeatability and homogeneity of the measurement process among appraisers for each part Neither chart should show patterns in the data relative to the appraisers or parts Out of control points on this particular chart usually indicate typos or measurement mistakes The suspect data will be flagged on one of the Appraiser tabs Error Chart The Error chart shows the individual deviations from the accepted reference values GAGEtrak calculates the individual deviation or error for each part according to the following formula Error Observed Value Average Measurement of the Part Before you do any other statistical analysis you should thoroughly screen the deviations for clear causes of variations that you can ascribe to specific factors Look for any uniform patterns in your Error chart including the following one appraiser s second or third set of readings is consistently higher than his first one appraiser s average is higher than the other appraisers averages and or one part standing out as more difficult to measure c
313. niques References GAGEtrak includes the basic measurement system analysis MSA techniques These rely on proven statistical tools such as Confidence Interval Determination Control Charting Performance Curve Plotting and ANOVA For more information on how the tools work see especially NIST SEMATECH Duncan or Box in the list below To view the studies in GAGEtrak see AIAG chapter 3 To see alternative or special purpose applications for MSA see AIAG or NIST SEMATECH For examples using uncertainty to summarize MSA studies see EA 4 02 and NIST SEMATECH where websites are referenced the publications can be freely viewed online downloaded or both We used the following publications as references in developing MSA studies we recommend them to expand your understanding of measurement system analysis AIAG MSA Measurement Systems Analysis Reference Manual Third Ed DaimlerChrysler Ford General Motors 2002 highly recommended to order a copy call AIAG at 248 358 3570 and ask for document number MSA ASTM Special Technical Publication 15D Manual on Presentation of Data and Control Chart Analysis 1976 BOX G E P Hunter W G Hunter J S Statistics for Experimenters John Wiley amp Sons New York 1978 DUNCAN A J Quality Control and Industrial Statistics Fourth Ed Richard D Irwin Inc Homewood Illinois 1974 EA 4 02 Expression of the Uncertainty of Measurement in Calibration 1999 www european acc
314. no passed calibration records This field will not become available unless Cycles Usages is selected for Calib Freq These two fields are only made available if in Calib Freq Usage is selected as the Calib Freq The value in the Usage Used field is an increasing value based on how many times a gage has been used The value in the Usage Left field is a decreasing value based on how many times you have left to use the gage before it is due for calibration Tothe right of the calibration scheduling you can see the next three anticipated calibration dates To calculate these three dates click Next Cal b GAGEtrak automatically updates them based on the current calibration frequency whenever you add a new calibration record for the gage Gage R amp R Repeatability amp Reproducibility Schedule Use the R amp R Schedule tab to set up the repeatability and reproducibility schedule for each gage Gage Entry gt Information Specifications History Standards Parts Procedures Calibration Schedule R amp Ri Schedule User Defined Auth Persons 4 Gage ID fc 002 Description CALIPER DIAL 12 INCH M R amp R Freq 45 Days M Projected R amp R Schedule R amp A Skip Direction Defaut Skip J 02 05 2005 Last R amp R Date 11 07 2004 03 22 2005 LatRtRResut Ne amp R88 05 06 2005 Next R amp R Due Date 1272272004 Record I4 4 1b gt I rs of 44 Field Button Name R amp R
315. ns Attachments Events Gage ID c 002 Description CALIPER DIAL 12 INCH M Drawing No oe Resolution or Drawing Date rc Tolerance 000 Change Level 1 1 Tolerance O00 Change Date Il Uncertainty D Operating Range toBlnches Print Issue Label When Issuing Gage Rm Record I 4 1 gt gt i gt of 46 Gage Entry Specifications records contain the following fields Field Button Name Description Drawing No and If applicable enter the gage drawing number and date of the original drawing usually Drawing Date for custom designed gages fixtures or templates Otherwise use this field to store other information Change Leveland Enter the current change level ID of the current gage drawing and the date of the most Change Date recent drawing change level Resolution Use this field to store the resolution of the gage This is the smallest or least count unit of motion that the gage is capable of measuring and displaying For example 0 001 is the resolution on a typical dial caliper 4 Tolerance Use this field to store the ugpertolerance for the gage as published by the manufacturer GAGEtrak later uses this information to calculate the maximum value for calibration standards To enter this value as a percentage of the nominal enter the value followed by the percentage sign for example enter 1 Tip Check the placement of decimal points for example 1 equals one percent
316. nt unauthorized signatures if it is not activated GAGEtrak will automatically record the currently logged in user as the signer when the Sign or Unsign button is clicked 106 Chapter 11 Entering Calibration Records Logon GAGEtrak Electronic Signature Authentication User ID Password If a biometric security device is attached please activate it now Cancel When Security is disabled you cannot use electronic signatures Calibration Entry Attachments This feature allows the attaching of many different file formats for Calibration Entry The application will use the registered application for that extension to determine what application will be opened Calibration Entry gt Calibration Measurements Procedures Labels Signature Attachments User Defined Calibration Scans Gage ID C 002 M File File Description B WAC 002 Instructions doc E Microsoft Word Document B w C D02 Procedure doc m Microsoft Word Document zi Record 14 4 2 gt L rx of 2 View Print Delete Record 14 4 1 gt gt i LEa of 62 The table below describes the fields in this area Field Button Name Description Gage ID The ID of the selected gage will appear in this field File Path of file attachment Selection of files is made easier by selecting the drilldown button to the right of the file field that brings up a Locate File To Attachdialog box for file selection Note Veri
317. ntry Field List Data Type Length MDR No Text key 50 Requester Text 50 Gage ID Text key 50 Ins Amt Double 8 Status Text 50 Completion Date Date Time 8 Comments Text 250 Next Due Date Date Time 8 Table Name MDR 6Gages Archive Description Archived MDR Gages Records Associated From Service Request Entry Field List Data Type Length MDR No Text key 50 Requester Text 50 Gage ID Text key 50 Ins Amt Double 8 Status Text 50 Completion Date Date Time 8 Comments Text 250 Next Due Date Date Time 8 Table Name Meas Uncertainty Description List necessary information for calculating uncertainty measurements Associated From Uncertainty Field List Data Type Length Gage ID Text key 50 Calibration Date Date Time key 8 Calibration Time Date Time key 8 Uncert_Contributor Text key 50 Type Text 50 Estimation Double 8 Distribution_Type Text 50 Distribution Factor Double 8 Degrees_Of_Freedom Text 50 DF Factor Double 8 Table Name Menu Names Description Lists names and identifications of every menu Associated From Form Menus GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 287 Field List Data Type Length Menu ID Long Integer key 4 Default Name Text 100 Custom Name Text 100 Table Name MenuBarNames Description File menu bar custom names Associated From MenuBarNames MenubarNamesSubMenu MenuBarNamesSubSub Field List Data Type Length MenuBarName Text key 50 MenuDefaultNam
318. o conserve memory paste your logo into GAGEtrak as a BMP file even if you created it in a graphics program Pasting your logo as a bitmap image uses less memory If you can view your logo in the Settings window but it doesn t appear on your reports you don t have enough memory for the logo size in bytes that you ve used Tip Generation of reports that contain a company logo will generate more efficiently if the logo size is within the 1KB range Click Cancelto return to the main menu without saving your changes To save your changes and return to the main menu click the C ose button Reports Enable Automatic Gage Due Listing Start frequency o Days M Floating Tool Bar Open Automatically End frequency o Days T Include Past Due Report Logo Setting Email Options bd Email Method SMTP Settings Workstation Specific E SMTP Server mail servername com From Email Remote Port 25 v Use Authentication yourname yourdomainname com User Name yourname Cancel Close Test Email The table below describes the fields on this form Field Button Name Enable Automatic Gage Due Listing Report Start Frequency End Frequency Include Past Due Description Check this box if you want the Calibration Due Listing by Due Date Report to automatically pop up when you initiate GAGEtrak This report shows gage IDs that are due or past due You can print the report or close it t
319. o continue into the program A message will appear if you don t have any gages due for calibration This field sets the start date of the Automatic Gage Due Listing Report The start day will be calculated to before the current date using this frequency So if this frequency is 7 days and the current date is 10 8 2002 then the start date will be 10 1 2002 Usually this will be 0 Days since you want to show all the calibrations due starting from today This field sets the end date of the Automatic Gage Due Listing Report If you want to know what calibrations are due for the next month select 1 Month Check this box if you want to show calibrations that are past due This will show every calibration due till the end frequency GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 193 Field Button Name Report Logo Setting Description Affects how the logo will be displayed on reports m Normal 1 440 x1 440 twips 7 Wide 2 880 x 1 440 twips Custom user defined A twip is 1 20 of a printer s point 1 440 twips equal one inch and 567 twips equal one centimeter These measurements designate the size an object will be when printed Actual physical distances on the screen vary according to your monitor s size and resolution Email Method Email transmission setup Email Method select protocol for sending email between servers SMTP Server insert name of server From Email insert your email address
320. od for If you wantthis option select Yes from the drop down list Otherwise GAGEtrak uses Bias standard deviation Number Format Choose desired format from the drop down list Percentage Format Choose desired format from the drop down list Part Reference Values Enter three to five Part Reference Valuesfor Linearity amp Bias Enter one for Bias Only 1 5 required Studies Trials 1 12 or 1 60 Enter 5 to 12 for each reference value or 5 to 60 for Bias Only studies required Linearity Analysis Fields Field Name Description Average BiasperPart Average Bias for each reference value Click the calc button to see this Predicted Bias The Bias predicted by the regression line Click the calc button to see this Goodness of Fit A measure of how well the regression line fits the data points on a scale of 0 to 1 Values near 1 fit well Values near 0 fit poorly In case of poor fit the data must be evaluated graphically rather than numerically Intercept A coefficient of the regression equation equal to predicted bias when the reference value is zero assuming the gage were capable of measuring zero Slope A coefficient of the regression equation equal to the change in bias per unit of change in reference value Coefficient Both Intercept and Slope are called Coefficients of the regression equation Predicted Bias b a x Reference Value Where a Slope and b Intercept DF Degrees of Freedom sample size 2 used
321. om Text 50 Notes Text 50 Return Cycles Long Integer 4 Part No Text 50 Issue Tracking Type Text 50 PO No Text 50 ExpReturnDate Date Time 8 Kit ID Text 50 Table Name Kit Issue Tracking Description Contains usage and issue records of a particular Kit Associated From Kit Issue Kit Issue Kit Return Field List Data Type Length Kit ID Text key 50 Issue_Date Date Time key 8 Issue_Time Date Time key 8 Issued_To Text 50 Issued Dept Text 50 Received Date Date Time 8 Received Time Date Time 8 Received From Text 50 Notes Memo 0 Issue Tracking Type Text 50 ExpReturnDate Date Time 8 Table Name Kit Master Description Lists attributes both primary and non key fields of every Kit Associated From Kit Entry Kit Issue Kit Return Field List Data Type Length Kit ID Text key 50 Kit_ Description Text 50 Kit Storage Location Text 50 Kit Current Location Text 50 Kit Procedure Memo Returned Long Integer 4 Table Name KitGageLink Description List identification and description of a particular Kit Associated From subKitGAGE Field List Data Type Length Kit ID Text key 50 Gage ID Text key 50 Table Name KitGageTypeLink Description List the type and number of gages belonging to a Kit Associated From KitRequiredGageTypes Field List Data Type Length Kit ID Text key 50 GM_Type Text key 50 Quantity Long Integer 4 284 Appendix B Table Definitions Table Name KitGageUseList Description Records us
322. ompact Repair Data from the Data Tools menu Data Tools Export Import For your convenience GAGEtrak includes an automated export program To export or import data from the menu select Data Tools Export Import This screen will appear GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 221 B4 Export Import i ol x Export Import Table s To Export Format to Export To Calibration Header Text Calibration Measurements Gage Calibration Standards Saved Advanced Filters Custom Field Labels Gage Records Gage Part Links gt Export T able s Exporting Data From the left side of the Export screen highlight the table s you want to export and from the right side of the screen choose the Export Jofile format B4 Export Import i P x Export import Table s To Export Format to Export To Calibration Header Calibration Measurements Gage Calibration Standards Saved Advanced Filters Custom Field Labels Gage Hecords Excel 2000 Gage Part Links Text Each table that you can export has a corresponding filename so you don t need to name your export files The filenames are based upon the destination source tables plus the appropriate extension for the file type For example a text file from the Parts Master table will be named PARTS TXT the same file sent to an Excel file will be named PARTS XLS The Export utility places these files in the same directory as your program f
323. ompanies follow the Automotive Industry Action Group AIAG rules If GRR as a percentage of Total Variation or 96 of Tolerance whichever is more difficult is Under 10 the system is acceptable Between 10 and 3096 you might need to further analyze the system to find the cause of the error use the Average and Range method Long AIAG or ANOVA to learn most about the problem Over 30 the system Is not acceptable You should perform further analysis on the system to find the cause of the error If you use Long AIAG you will be able to view EV AV and PV for clues as to what should be done If you use ANOVA You will be able to view EV AV INT and PV for clues as to what should be done It is important to also view the charts No consistent rules exist Each industry will have its own criteria For example number of distinct categories nad is a bigger the better statistic that may be used in place of GRR of TV Industries who use nac consider less than 5 undesirable For comparison GRR of TV 30 corresponds to ndc 4 48 Printing the Study To print the study click the Print button and a Print menu will appear as shown here 83 Print Gage R amp R Study Bl x Select Print Option PRINT This Study Data Sheet VIEW This Study Data Sheet Include Analysis Sheet Close To print the study report click the This Study button that s in the Print section To preview the study report on scr
324. on can be an AutoCAD drawing or a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet The table below describes the fields in this area Field Button Name Description Events List box of Eventsare actions taken within the system that trigger an occurrence for example receipt of an email when a gage status has changed Parameter If an email Eventis selected a recipient email address needs to be included in the parameter field Replace send to email address here with a valid email server address The preceding texts are defaults for the email subject and body identification To include a revised Subjectand bodyidentifier for the email follow the email address with a semicolon and an email subject description Application The Application drill down button can be used to load a file that needs to be run when an event is triggered For example a review of a comprehensive Microsoft Word document on a specific Calibration Procedure can be reviewed if a gage failed calibration Additional gage events can be established in Setup Gage Events Using Gage Records Issue Return Tracking Records When you need to issue a gage to a different location or department you can record the issue in GAGEtrak This feature is particularly useful in a gage crib situation where gages and inspection equipment are loaned out and then returned for storage and safe keeping By tracking this information you ll know which gages your company uses most often and which employees or d
325. on its before and after measurements compared to its calibration standards Check this box to indicate limited use for it for specific operating ranges GAGEtrak doesn t automatically update this field Gage ID of Standard This field stores the gage ID of the reference standard which is important for traceability back to a specific standard You can manually enter the standard s gage ID or select from a list of available standards by clicking the small button on the right of this field The list shows only those gage records that have X s in their Gage Entry Ref Standard checkboxes Note Reference standards cannot be past due for calibration Uncertainty If you select the reference standard from the list the uncertainty value will automatically display If you manually enter the standard then enter its uncertainty value here You can obtain this value from the manufacturer it s expressed in units such as percentage 0 5 proportion 0 005 or measurement 0 0001 inch You must enter units of the same value Other Calibration Entry Options Like the Gage Entry options we ll talk about each of these Calibration Entry options in the User s Manual Tab Button Name Description Procedures Use this screen to view the procedures that you use to calibrate the gage The program copies these procedures from Gage Entry Procedures Labels From this screen you can print a calibration label for the current record only if you have the
326. on to switch to the Gage Entry record for the current gage Calibration Timer Button Use the Start button next to the Hours field to time your calibration it works like a stopwatch When you re ready to calibrate just click the Start button Its name will change to Stop When you re finished click Stop and GAGEtrak will automatically calculate the hours for you The timer is cumulative This allows you to temporarily stop the timer and do something else Just click the Stop button to stop the timer then when you re ready to resume click the Start button again The time is expressed in decimal hours the smallest unit of time is 0 01 hours which equals 36 seconds Example 1 0 25 hours 0 25 x 60 minutes 15 minutes Example 2 0 01 hours 0 01 x 60 minutes 0 6 minutes Calibration Entry Measurements 83 Calibration Entry x P Calibration Measurements Procedures Labels Signature Attachments User Defined Calibration Scans Gage ID c 002 M Standard ID Type Units Minimum Nominal Maximum E Ref Type Format Before Accuracy Limited Gage ID of Standard Std Due Date Uncertainty After Accuracy Use fiINCHGAGEBLOCK Ye ff E oas f sy R5 7 a LE U NNWWWwWWwNM J2INCHGAGEBLOCK Aoo fi 199 22 20 000 E E A E OOOO l BEEN INCH GAGE BLOCK ANo o Mo T eas af 3o o fo OE OOO i O EESN Record I 4 17 gt i gt gt of 28 You can use this scree
327. ondition Value Current Location z O 1 MI M Clear Fiter Close Find Close Searching or Filtering Records If you want to search for a particular gage and don t know its ID then select the list box button it has a downward pointing arrow next to the Gage ID field A list of all available gages showing both gage ID and description will appear Similarly for the other fields you can select from the list box if one is available or type in information that applies only to the particular gagels you want to find In any of the list box fields after you type in one or two characters the first option that begins with those characters will appear in the field To save time if this is the selection you want you can instantly go to the next field instead of entering the rest of the characters If there is filter criteria in the Quick Filter and you don t want to enter any filter information select the Clear Filter button and click the Find button GAGEtrak will present a of your gage records At first you ll probably use this method more than the search options Gage Entry Information 83 Gage Entry el EW P Information Specifications History Standards Parts Procedures Calibration Schedule R amp R Schedule User Defined Auth Persons Attachments Events Gage ID pono Description HM Status 1 v Active Storage Location m Ref Standard NIST Nf J Current Location Gage S N
328. one diskette the program will ask you to insert another disk select 0K If you do not want to continue with the manual backup select Cancel When the backup is finished you ll see this message Successful Operation Ed Operation completed successfully Your data is now backed up For future reference clearly label the backup diskette s with the date or day of the week and diskette number The resulting backup files will be compressed in the industry standard ZIP format This means that you can use other utilities such as PKZIP PC Tools WinZip or Norton to restore your backup file Manual Restore To restore your database file place your backup disk in the drive and click the Manual Restore button under the Manual tab of the Data Backup window If your backup used more than one disk insert the ast disk of the set first A dialog box will appear highlight the file you want to restore unzip and click Open 218 Chapter 6 Data Tools Choose the Zip File d x Look in 5 3 Floppy A 53 ck E3 _ 20031001 2IP Pj History a Desktop ee dal File name 20031001 ziP 3pm Files of type ZIP zip x Cancel v Open as read only AL My Network P Now choose the drive and directory you want to restore the backup ZIP file to Browse for Folder sc Select the folder where the restored files wil be placed Desktop 24 My Documents E i My Computer al 3
329. ong Integer 4 RequireEntry Long Integer 4 EntryValue Long Integer 4 Table Name Group Gages Description Not Used Associated From Not Used Field List Data Type Length Gage ID Text key 50 Group ID Text key 50 Gage SN Text 50 Description Text 50 GM Type Text 50 Unit of Meas Text 50 New Field Text 50 Table Name Group Master Description Lists attributes of a particular group Associated From Security Field List Data Type Length Group ID Text key 50 Description Text 50 Group_Type Text 50 Table Name GRR_Results Description Contains Gage R amp R Studies Results Associated From Risk Analysis Stability Study Edit GRR Results Header Edit GRR Results Measurement Gage RR ANOVA Gage RR ANOVA Chart Gage RR Anova Chart_MSA2 Gage RR Attribute Gage RR Attribute Analytic Gage RR Avg Chart Gage RR Avg Chart_MSA2 Gage RR Comparison XY Chart Gage RR Comparison XY Chart_MSA2 Gage RR Error Chart Gage RR Error Chart_MSAz2 Gage RR Form Gage RR Form MSA2 Gage RR Linearity Gage RR Linearity Chart Gage RR Linearity Chart A3 Gage RR NI Chart AP Gage RR Part Appraiser Avg Chart Gage RR Part Appraiser MSA2 Gage RR Range Chart AP Gage RR Range Chart AP_MSA2 Gage RR Repeatability Range Chart Gage RR Repeatability Range Chart MSA2 Gage RR Residual Plot Chart Gage RR Run Chart Gage RR Run Chart MSA2 Gage RR Scatter Chart Gage RR Scatter Chart MSA2 Gage RR Stability Gage RR Stability Chart Gage RR Stability GAGEtr
330. only one PC a single user setup If you have a multi user license of GAGEtrak you and your other GAGEtrak users can install the program from the CD or from a network location If you want your users to install from a network location copy all of the files in the root directory of the CD to the same network location then instruct users to run SETUP EXE from that location To install GAGEtrak follow these instructions 175 176 Chapter 1 Installation 1 To begin installation click the Windows Start button and select the Run command Click the Browse button to navigate to your CD ROM or network drive then select SETUP EXE The sample screens show a CD and a network installation Run Mi Type the name of a program folder document or Internet Type the name of a program folder document or Internet resource and Windows will open itfor you resource and Windows will open it for you Open DAsETUP EXE Open I GAGETRAK SETUP EXE Cancel Browse 1 Cancel Browse 2 Next you ll see the Welcome screen Make sure that you ve closed all other programs and then click Next Welcome to GAGEtrak 6 Setup program This x program will install GAGEtrak 6 on your computer It is strongly recommended that you exit all Windows programs before running this Setup Program Click Cancel to quit Setup and close any programs you have running Click Next to continue with the Setup program WARNING Thi
331. onsistently GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 121 Example Error Chart 0 1305 0 0305 _ 0 0695 0 1934 0 0934 0 0066 0 1066 Run Chart and Average Chart Run Chart by Part This chart plots the averages of each appraiser s various readings using part number as an index The Run chart shows part variation and can detect reproducibility and appraiser x part interaction error Example Run Chart 4 B c If the patterns are not at the same height there is a reproducibility error If the patterns are not the same shape there is an appraiser x part interaction error Average Chart by Part The Average chart is much like the Run chart except that it also calculates the overall average and control limits From this chart you can determine the measurement system s acceptability Example Average Chart N AA Ca TENAN a ff KF M UCL 0 8796 Avg 0 8075 LCL 0 7354 The three zigzag patterns show the pattern of Part Variation PV as measured by three different Appraisers These patterns vary a lot more than the control limits which is good the control limits show the variation expected due to Repeatability EV as if we always measured the same part The three patterns are not close in 122 Chapter 12 MSA Entry height which is called Reproducibility AV error The three patterns are not close in shape which is called Appraiser x Part Interaction I
332. ope m subgroup size g number of subgroups V predicted bias R goodness of fit SE standard error of linearity df degrees of freedom 2 Xy E z gm xy gm sez Z a z gt gm gm 2 TE Ey b y a xy gem 2 x df gm 2 a tStat g SE IS x x 1 t Stat 2 SE x l Tes sm b3 x x 1 y b axx confidence bands for x btaxx tomo o 025 X SEX Bias Formulas y observation x SEs standard error of bias Oo repeatability Avg Bias y EM yen gm df gm 1 GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 141 142 Chapter 12 MSA Entry SE pr Confidence Bounds Bias SE 5 X ty os when range method is specified for bias df from d table Confidence Bounds d a 2 Bias x SE p X ty 0 025 2 m d Table g 1 row is of g 2 row is d aj b k b je j je b j h j 4 ss e y zz fe 12 nun 3 3501 22 3 30463 3 28931 na 147 353 42 328163 m S2 wsos 173887 200 225781 256260 2729 2870 299192 209808 _ 319235 2701 325846 6 ez fos n3 no e 29 u4 1 2 3 42378 3 49116 3 55333 3 66422 3 71424 3 76118 3 80537 d2 3 33598 3 40676 3 47193 3 53198 3 58788 3 64006 3 68896 3 73500 Uncertainty Formulas p plus or minus value d divisor c sensitivity coefficient u individual uncertainty contribution df individual degrees of freedom u co
333. operations while using the Report Editor such as selecting and moving formatting and aligning controls in your report Note For complex custom report design users must have knowledge of basic VB Scripting and of Data Dynamic Objects variables and report events in order to successfully program with the Report Editor Using Custom Reports Custom Reports is a new utility in the Setup section of GAGEtrak 6 To start click on the Custom Reports button the window below will appear amp Custom Reports x Create Edit Report Import Export Delete Report 1 Inch Gage Barcode Label 1 2 Inch Gage Barcode Label Calibration Cost and Labor Report Calibration Due Listing by Calibrator Calibration Due Listing by Calibrator w Cal Stds Calibration Due Listing by Calibrator w Cal Stds and Proc Name Calibration Due Listing by Calibrator w Proc Name Calibration Due Listing by Current Location Calibration Due Listing by Current Location Detailed Calibration Due Listing by Current Location w Cal Stds Calibration Due Listing by Current Location w Cal Stds Detailed Calibration Due Listing by Current Location w Cal Stds and Proc Name Calihrati ieh alibration Nua Listina hu Currant ocshon 7 Cal Gide and Prac Mama Natailed Create New Report Edit Selected Report Create Edit Report The Create Edit Report tab displays a list of all available reports From this tab you can open the report editor in one of two ways you
334. optional GAGEtrak Calibration Label Kil Signature If the security feature is activated and users have been setup with a user ID and password they will have the ability to sign a calibration entry as Calibrated or Approved By Attachments Allows you to attach files to a Calibration Entry User Defined These fields can be used to store additional information and can be customized the label names changed and the Data Types altered in Setup Settings Interface Calibration Scans Allows you to scan in certificates from TWAIN compliant scanners Scans are to be stored with the calibration records MSA Button To enter a Gage ID specific MSA study such as GAR Linearity Bias amp Uncertainty Stability Attribute Risk Analysis or Attribute Analytic Method click this button Graph Button If you want to see an accuracy chart for the current record click this button Certificate Button If a gage is passed this button allows you to view or print a detailed or summary Certificate Calibration for this gage If the gage has not been passed you will have the ability to view or print a Certificate Failure Notice Gage Entry Button This button takes you directly to the Gage Entry form Chapter 6 issuing and Returning Gages Issue Gages and Return Gages With Issue Gages and Return Gages you can track each time you loan out a gage or send it out for calibration or repair and when it is returned This is particularly useful in a gage crib wh
335. or A003 fyou wish to issue more than one of a gage type of any Gage IDs such as A001 A002 or A003 select the Required Gage Types tab and select Gage Type Type A and enter a quantity of two 2 When issuing this kit you will be issuing any two combinations of A001 A002 and A003 for example A001 and A002 or A001 and A003 etc Example Create a kit and select a gage type of Caliper If you were then to pick a gage of Caliper 001 then the issue of the kit would include two gages Caliper 001 to satisfy the Required Gage list and a second Caliper to satisfy the Required Gage Type List Since it is unlikely that this is the way a kit would be issued the gages are hidden in the Required Gage list that match types in the Required Gage Type list This makes it so the user cannot accidentally select that a kit will include two gages Note If the user really does want to issue Caliper 001 and a gage of type Caliper have them pick the Gage first then pick the Gage Type Issuing a Kit A kit E only be issued if gages or accessories are complete GAGEtrak with its kitting feature provides several advantages by allowing you to ssueall gages in a kit ssue gages based on several selected criteria and established rules Identify gages that are not issued and Detect gages with up to date calibration BJ Kit Issue zl Kit ID KIT 001 Issue Date 11721 2003 Issue Time 4 06 PM W
336. ossible area your chosen printer can handle An error message may come up just click OK and the canvas will appear and you can just go on making your label For now you can ignore this message the report editor is simply telling you that it does not have a proper label size to use Create your label as you would a report You may notice that the designer canvas only contains a Details section that is because it is the only section required for developing labels 250 Chapter 8 Customizing Reports Fx Report Designer New Report Ee x File Edit View Insert Format Tools Help Dc HB SD v xB mI IRA al gg E CF E ER a d le S m ge Ws ove Bt St BURG Design Preview JIre E amp Bs x e E v pvul EZsE E xplorer erg 4 gB g MainReport EDetal W a rs pres pees Property ToolBox Detail Name Detail BackColor C BackStyle 0 CanGrow True CanShrink False ColumnCount 1 Selected Detail Section A Label Wizard The Label Wizard takes you step by step through the process of building your labels You will have to choose your label printer from the list of all available printers the label size the table to use and the fields to include in your label To open the wizard click the Create New Report button and select the Label Wizard icon from the template List Select Report Template xi a wo gx lt Blank Report Standard Report Custom Lab
337. ost common units schedule is based on elapsed calendar days Weeks each week equals seven days schedule is based on elapsed calendar weeks Months the schedule is based on months Years each year equals 365 days the schedule is based on elapsed calendar years R amp R Skip Direction If the gage R amp R date falls on a skip date this determines whether to move the schedule date forward or backward Default Skip will move the schedule date forward Last R amp R Date When you first enter the gage record enter the gage s last R amp R study date As you add new R amp R records for the gage as long as you use an R amp A Frequencyvalue other than zero GAGEtrak automatically updates this field Last R amp R Result This field shows the last gage R amp R study results usually this is the gage error GRR expressed as either a percentage of TV or a percentage of tolerance Later it will be automatically updated as you add new R amp R records for the gage as long as you enter an R amp R Frequencyvalue other than zero Next R amp R Due Date This field tracks the next gage R amp R due date GAGEtrak automatically updates it whenever you add a new R amp R record for the gage or you can manually enter a date into this field If the today s date is past the next due date you ll see a Past Due message Tip To calculate this date immediately click the Next R amp R button only if you ve entered an R amp R frequency and a last R amp R date
338. ou are unsure of any of these settings please consult your GAGEtrak administrator DSN use the drop down box to select a Data Source Name that is currently available This field is required No others show up GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 263 Field Button Name Description File DSN Check this box to use a file Data Source Name Selecting this check box will disable the Database Field and enable the fields below Note if you are unsure of any of these settings please consult your GAGEtrak administrator File DSN type a location for the file Data Source Name or click the Browse Button to locate it on your hard drive or the network This field is required No others show up When you have located your database click the Test button to ensure connectivity Upon successful connection click the OK button to close the dialog box and the OK button to close the Open Database Window Once located and loaded GAGEtrak will scan the new database and compare it against the existing reports in the current database Transfer Report Data Ea Destination Connection Information E EAGTW6 GTSamp60 mdb A Available Reports for updating Report Name Your Version Curr Version Action New Report Name 1 1 2 Inch Gage Barcode Label 2 2sip 4 1 1 2 Inch Label 1 dgiship zm 1 Inch Gage Barcode Label 2 2 sip zd J 1 Inch La
339. ou are restoring File Exists Fa The file GTSamp60 mdb already exists Do you wish to rename this file lf you select No the zipped file will not be extracted no cme Click Yes enter the new name of the file in the dialog box that appears and click OK to extract the file GAGEtrak will not permit you to overwrite your current database you mustrename the file When extraction is complete you ll see this message Successful Operation X Operation completed successfully Note After completing the Automatic Restore operation you must attach to your restored renamed database You can do this by selecting Open Database from the File Menu and browsing to the new database file it should be in the same directory as the database file you backed up 220 Chapter 6 Data Tools Data Tools Merge Utility The Merge Utility lets you merge elements from different databases for example you can merge a single gage record into another database This can be archived by selecting the Merge Utility from Data Tools Merge Utility Wizard Merge Utility Page 1 of 2 Source Database Version 5 0 Data X Source CGTWENGTD ataB0 mdb 5 Destination Database Version 6 0 Data X Destination CAGTWENGT Samp60 mdb A Cancel Back Next gt This screen lets you merge data from another GAGEtrak database into your current database The Source Database is the database where data Is being retrieved from
340. ou expect the gage to be returned to you Storage Location This field shows where the gage is stored when not in use You cannot edit this field Current Location Show the current location of the gage You cannot edit this field Clear Form This button clears all fields in the form Next Gage If you have other gages to issue click this button to issue the gage ssue Label Allows you to print a Select Label Type for the gage being issued Note A label printer must be installed to accommodate this request Select Label Type Select Label Type Calibration Label 1W x 3L View Print Close The printed label shows the predicted Next Due date for a gage based on the frequency set for the gage unless the frequency was set to Usage or Cycles and the gage is not ready for calibration then the Est Due date will appear on the label Close Click the Close button to save the record and exit the screen GAGEtrak uses the following rules to manage Issue Tracking records 1 When you issue a gage GAGEtrak inserts the current date and time as the issue date and time It also changes the gage s Current Location field to a description that consists of Issued To plus Issued Dept for example 675 Job 7512 Final Assy GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 91 Return Gages BJ Return Gages Gage ID pop a ast Due Issue Date 9 1 2003 Next Due Date Issue Time 6PM Type Cabin 1 Issued To
341. ou select Procedure Entry from the Main Records menu the Procedure Entry window appears It contains four different tabs Procedure Text Procedure Image Attachments and Gage List Procedure Entry Procedure Text In this screen you can copy or enter the text of each procedure B3 Procedure Entry ISI E V Procedure Text Procedure Image Attachments Gage List Procedure Name CP22E Revision 12 01 99 Procedure DIAL DIGITAL AND VERNIER CALIPERS awww iso org gt Calibration Frequency 12 months can be modified according to stability purpose and usage 1 0 Scope This method describes the calibration of calipers inside and outside dimensions up to 72 inches 1800 mm and depth dimension up to 12 inches 300 mm Instrument resolution 0 001 or 0 0005 inch 0 02 or 0 05 mm 2 0 References This document is based on the DOD procedures 3 0 Definitions TI Test Instrument DOD Department of Defense 4 0 General Requirements Remove Environment Temperature Change should not exceed 2 deg Fehr 1 deg Chr Open Editor Humidity Mo excessive humidity gt Record I 4 1 gt gt I gt gt of 5 This screen contains the following fields Field Button Name Description Procedure Name Enter a unique title for each procedure If you try to create two procedures with the same name GAGEtrak prompts you that you can t have duplicate index values If this happens enter a unique proce
342. ow close a measurement instrument comes to an established standard precision is how consistent that instrument is when measuring the same item several times Therefore we calibrate our instruments to adjust them to the proper standard This is where GAGEtrak comes in Every day you have to test and calibrate gages to ensure their accuracy and precision In order to ensure quality and provide for a ready analysis of a single gage s performance over time you have to document each calibration that you perform on that gage Now you could do this on paper but then you have stacks of paperwork to keep organized This paperwork is easily lost and you often don t have backup copies for it We developed GAGEtrak for this reason By giving you a paperless easy to use tracking system GAGEtrak makes the job of managing your gages and test equipment easier and ensures that your calibration records are accurate and up to date Chapter 2 How Does GAGEtrak Work To answer this question let s look at how your calibration lab might use GAGEtrak on a typical day Please note that this story is merely hypothetical it s not meant to be prescriptive You ll notice that all of the program s features and reports are in bold print and all of the optional accessories are in talic print A Typical Day in the Calibration Laboratory It s Monday morning and it s time to plan the day The QC manager asks you for the weekly Calibration Schedule You antic
343. ow that allows you to select a specific group of records for the report There are a few reports such as the Calibration Due Listing report that are time based which allows you specify a Fromand 7odate range for selected criteria All reports were designed using standard Windows True Type fonts Report Commands and Functions Viewing Reports You can preview any report by clicking the View button in the filter After the report appears you can use the vertical and horizontal scroll bars to view different parts of the report or use the page navigation buttons to view multiple pages of the report Use the Zoom In or Zoom Out buttons on the menu to view more or less of the report Report Preview Toolbar GAGEtrak s Report toolbar contains common commands that you can use for reports Each toolbar button is described below Pint 5 agda afo 1 Send Button Description Eint Print To print the current report click on this button You may also print by using the keyboard shortcut Ctrl P 159 160 Chapter 13 Reports Button Description Copy To copy the current report as formatted text click on this button 0 Single Page To view the current report one page at a time click on this button Multiple Page To view the current report more than one page at a time click on this button X Zoom Out To view the current report at a smaller size click on this button Zoom In To view the current report at a larger size click on
344. ow the structure of your tables and the types of the fields in these tables You cannot create links using two different kinds of fields e g a text field displaying the gage ID number cannot be linked to a date field showing the calibration date These linked fields should be common to both tables If you are not sure about this ask your database administrator about the properties of your tables In the Select Query Type window select the Advance Query button and click on Next Advanced Query Display multiple fields from multiple tables in the database using uzer defined table relationships used for Reports with multiple source tables and summary queries Selecting Tables and Fields Follow step 2 just as you did with the Simple Query to select your table name and field names Once you have selected fields from one table you can choose another table and add fields from that table to your Selected Fields list Select report fields Which fields do you want in your query You can choose multiple fields from multiple tables listed below In the Selected Fields listing the string of characters before the period indicates the table name the string after the period indicates the Tables Gage_Events X Available Fields Selected Fields field name Take note that you have two different tables for the Selected Fields list Calibration Header and Gage Events Gage Events Gage Gage Events E venit ID Cancel
345. owever choose not to apply any particular order on your records within the Selected Fields list box if you do not your report will display them as they appear in your original records You must also set the Sart Orderto Ascending or Descending If no setting is specified the application default is set to Ascending Click on the Next button and view the SQL statement summary on the next window The following summary screen will show you the actual SQL statement that will be used to open your data source The SQL Statement This text box contains the actual SQL statement the program will use to get the data source for your report Finish Below is the summary record source for your report You can modify edit the existing query through the text box below Select Gage ID Calibration Date From Calibration Header ORDER a BY Calibration Header Gage ID ASC Cancel lt lt Back Finish You can modify the query by editing the text in this window if you know the right syntax for creating SQL statements however if you do not do this correctly an error message will appear We recommend that users do not edit the SQL statement displayed in this window When you are done click on the Finish button Advanced Query When creating reports using multiple tables use this query type You will be able to use the fields from different tables you select the tables are connected by links you create or specify It is very important that you kn
346. p If your number of standards is between one and nine your standard ID names will be numbered like this 1 Name 2 Name If you have from ten to 99 standards their names will Look like this 01 Name 02 Name Type Select the type of standard Variable or Attribute Select Variable for those standards that have a value that you actually measure such as 0 502 inches Select Attribute for pass fail or visual types of checks Ref Type Select the type of Reference Standard that will be used for this standard This list box will show the Gage Type of every reference standard in the database Gage ID of Standard Select from a list of available standard IDs The list is limited by the Ref Type field An empty Ref Type field would show all available IDs Units In this field enter the unit of measure that the standards share Format Select the numerical format that measurements will appear in on reports Note The format does not affect how measurements are shown in forms only in reports End Value GAGEtrak calculates the end value for you depending on the Numberof Standards the Start Value and the ncrement Value Fill After you ve entered the information click the button and GAGEtrak will fill in the information The Minimum and Maximumvalues will be calculated from the Toleranceand Tolerancevalues Gage Entry Parts Use these records to define the parts and operations for which you ll use the gage By linking th
347. p R repeatabilitv amp reproducibility RR R amp R lower control limit RR c R amp R sum square RR R amp R upper control limit S sum square SS appraiser x parts sum square SS appraiser sum square SS Gage error sum square SS parts sum square TV total variation TV total variation sum square UCL upper control limit TotalDF n xk xr 1 3x10x2 1 60 1 59 Gage Error Totpe Apr Mr Abe 59 2 9 18 30 Sum All Readings 16 55 15 35 16 55 48 45 Sum Square All Readings 273 90 235 62 273 90 783 42 10 4 00 16 00 Correction Factor for ANOVA CF SumReadings n k r 48 45 10 3 2 39 123 Appraiser Sum Square SS SSReading n r CF 783 42 10 2 39 123 0 048 Appraiser Mean Square SSpp DE 0 048 2 0 024 pp Parts Sum Square SS PartsSum Square k r CF 247 08 3 2 39 123 2 057 Parts Mean Square MS SS DE 2 124 9 0 2286 App x Parts Sum Square SSp Sum Square T otalReadings r CF SS SS 82 668 2 39 123 2 057 0 048 0 106 App x Parts Mean Square MSp SS DE 0 106 18 0 0059 Gage Error Sum Square SS SumSquareAIl CF SS 58 S amp y 41 373 39 123 0 106 2 057 0 048 0 039 Gage Error Mean Square MS SS DFerr 0 039 30 0 0013 GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 129 130 Chapter 12 MSA Entr
348. part use either the customer s or your internal part number Description Enter the name of the part or a description that includes the name Operation Use this field to track the production operation or work center description that uses or installs the part such as Stamping or Machine 13 Drawing No Use these fields to record the blueprint drawing number and drawing date and Drawing Date Change Level In these fields enter the blueprint change level also called engineering change and Change Date level and the change date Part User1 Use these fields to track additional information on the part and 2 Inspection Procedure Enter instructions for checking the part Gage Requirements Field Button Name Description Gage ID Select the Gage ID of the gage you will use to inspect the part Description GAGEtrak will automatically enter the description of the gage you selected in the Gage Dfield Dimension In this field enter the dimension or characteristic that you will check with the gage 73 74 Chapter 4 Part Records Field Button Name Description Control Method Enter the control method such as Inspection Sheet or Control Chart Freq Specify frequency in which the part will be inspected with this gage such as 5 per Shift or 10 per Day Comments Record any notes about the dimension or characteristic that you re checking Chapter 5 Entering Procedure Records Procedure Records When y
349. pected 086 Count Expected is Prefill Calc Print Record I 4 ll 1 gt gt i gt gt of 1 Appraiser vs Ref Value Select this sub tab to compare each Appraiser to the variable gage Gage RR Attribute Risk Analysis gt Information Input Crosstabs Effectiveness Miss Rate Analysis Signal Detection Study Date 11 01 2002 Co Part No usa Gage ID 022EDigital Caliper 0 6 M Part No fi 0 221 1 M Appraiser vs Appraiser Appraiser vs Ref Value a Ref Crosstabulation B Ref Crosstabulation C Ref Crosstabulation E Ref Fail Pass Total Fail Count Expected A gt ARef Pass Count kappa Expected Total Count Expected Prefill Calc Print Record I 4 1 gt Ld gt gt of 1 Crosstabs has these fields and buttons Field Button Description A Crosstabulation Select which pair of Appraisers you want to evaluate Count The number of times the two selected Appraisers voted a particular way For example suppose there were 6 times A said Fail and B said Pass Expected The number of times we would expect a particular vote combination to occur based on the totals Totals The totals for each column and row Kappa The Kappa statistic measures agreement on a scale of zero to one Over 0 75 is considered good under 0 40 is considered poor 152 Chapter 12 MSA Entry Effe
350. pen this module Column Uncertainty Contributor Type Plus or Minus Probability Distribution Divisor Sensitivity Coefficient Uncertainty Contribution DF Description Select the type of measurement error to be included or type in a new one Choose Type A if the Plus or Minus value will be based on statistical observations Choose type B if this is based on certificates or experience Enter the Plus or Minus variation caused by this contributor Select a Probability Distribution from the drop down list or key in a new one See Background on Probability Distributions below GAGEtrak will fill this in if it recognizes the Probability Distribution You may change it See Background on Probability Distributions below If the Plus or Minus value is in the proper units and applies directly then use the default value of one If the units must be converted or adjusted insert the proper multiplier here For example the Plus or Minus value might be in temperature units and you wish to use length and the coefficient of thermal expansion for this material to convert to millimeters This is the standard uncertainty or standard uncertainty times the Sensitivity Coefficient It will appear when you click on the Calc button You cannot change it For Type A items insert the Degrees of Freedom here If unknown you may leave it blank blanks will be treated as infinite Degrees of Freedom for Type B items are Infinite
351. ployee has completed Use the scroll bar at the bottom of the screen to see the different fields Field Name Description Description Enter a brief description of the training Start Date and Beginning and ending dates of the training End Date School Enter the name of the school where the employee attended training Cost Enter the cost of the class Status Use this field to indicate whether the employee has finished this particular class Certification If this training was for a particular certification enter the type of certificate Cert Expiration Date If the certification is good for only a specified length of time enter the expiration date in this field Hours Enter how many hours the training was worth or how long it lasted CEUs Continuing In this field enter the number of credit units earned for the training Education Units Comments Enter any other relevant information for this training or certification Staff Entry Photo B3 Staff Entry lel x E Information Training Photo Authorized Gages Issued Gages Employee ID 7781 Name Stan Smith Insert Object Paste Photo Record I 4 1 b E rx of 6 Click this tab to attach a personnel photo for more information see nsert Object and Paste Logoon page 192 for more information 214 Chapter 4 Setting Up GAGEtrak Staff Entry Authorized Gages 83 Staff Entry In this screen you can add a list of
352. predefined icon color selections that can be mixed with your desired color selection for backfill color icon text color and icon text backcolor E Settings Iof x User Info General Cal Options Calendar Security Automatic Numbering Interface Custom Labels Gage Custom Calibration Custom Form Captions Form Tabs Main Menu Menu Bar Messages Menu Colors Menu Colors Back Fill Color Transparent f Transparent z Preview Icon Text Color Black z Icon Text Backcolor Transparent 7 Transparent Icon Color ereen 1 oen xis _Reset to Default to _Reset to Default The table below describes the fields on this form Field Button Name Description Back Fill Color Fills in color behind the icon and text in the menu icon bar 204 Chapter 4 Setting Up GAGEtrak Field Button Name Description Icon Text Color Changes the color of the icon identifier text Icon Text Backcolor Creates a solid rectangle in color selected around the icon text Reset To Default Select this button if you want to return the interface color selection to GAGEtrak s Button default color selection Cancel To exit this screen without saving your changes click the Cance button Close If you want to save your changes click Close to return to the main menu Note The color selection will be registered when the close button is selected and the new color selection will be apparent when thi
353. proven editable procedures that you can automatically import into your GAGEtrak database or use separately as documents For information about purchasing CalPro please contact CyberMetrics Corporation or your distributor Procedure Entry Procedure Image In the Procedure Image screen you can attach a picture or map to each procedure To do so double click in the OLE box B4 Procedure Entry BR ET E P Procedure Text Procedure Image Attachments Gage List Procedure Name CP22E Revision 12 01 99 OLE Double Click in OLE box to insert object Record I 4 1 gt bl rx of 5 OLE stands for Object Linking and Embedding This means that you can link any valid Windows object such as a graph picture or digitized movie into this field When you double click in the OLE field the Insert Object box appears and you can select the program in which you created or will create the object GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 77 Note The list of object types varies depending on which programs are on your computer Insert Object 21x Saadia Create New Bitmap Image Cancel Cc Image Document Create from File Microsoft Clip Gallery Microsoft Excel Chart Microsoft Excel Worksheet Microsoft Graph 2000 Chart Display as Icon Microsoft PowerPoint Presentation x Result Inserts a new MEDIA_CLIP object into your P document Use the scroll bar to sel
354. pter 2 MS SUL Installation 0s00000s0sososococoosososososososososososocoosososososososososososocsosososososososososososoeseseseseseses 183 Create Data Source Name DSN for MS SOU rnicca EEN EN A A AN A AACR 183 x Table of Contents Chapter 3 Running GAGEtrak cccsscscssssccecsccecssssccecsscecsssecescsccocsccecessecescsscocsssecesssccacsscecessececcsccecescecesces 187 Nee p PAAA 187 eis go NUMDE E M 187 AEST RB ART Re 188 Chapter 4 Setting UD GAGEU AK oreet eset beste Ee ema ES Sueno Seo er ash be es Un E eo PR evo Pene ros soos eet ve iod bosses vi esos ss eeoesest 101 Setangs User Infor MaU oca on ps e n ne ORE EE E Ur dn ED E oer Vc D bu ein en Vt 191 Set hgs General sii eene edo d oco opera HELM UO EE RH CEU ma cue wes Suc ees anes acacia UD UN ALD GET NNI TED DOT RN E C UR ct EUG REN eee AERE Red 192 Set ligsss Cab OPTIONS 2 nite ede cake cae t Ec HR ONSE vet bc UN T TA A dre DOT SP nO CUR De d M IL oed e PUR 193 Se t rigs Calebdal 5n etse enc cs NA 195 Setlirigs SSecUurlby caos bi Gh ode von e RR HER atado Lad tc ad bn tU DU Fr do DG utut tu a 195 Settings AutOmMatic NUMDEMING ER DOCE 198 Settings Custom LADE bL 199 Setings G3gE Calibration CUSEOTTI eiin R N 200 Settings Forms Capo aaee E
355. pts has been exceeded Restrict Issue To If the Restricted Issue To Authorized Users checkbox is checked the application will Authorized Users control the persons authorized to Issue gages If in Gage Entry Auth Persons Restrict Issue is blank or if Program Default is selected the application will check whether or not Restrict Issue to Authorized User is checked in Settings installation default for this feature is unchecked if it is the Issued To field in Issue Gages will list only the authorized users that were entered on the Gage Entry Auth Persons for that gage If Restrict Issue to Authorized is not checked all staff will be listed in the Issue To in Issue Gages form Enable Audit Trail If you want to record actions users perform in the program such as record modifications and deletions make a selection from the nable Audit Trail list box The Basic Audit Trail lists basic user and action information The Advanced Audit Trail lists basic user action and Old and New Value information To view the Audit Logging select Audit Log from the Utilities menu The Advance Audit Trail is automatically permanently enabled if you have installed the 21 CFR Part 11 compliant version of GAGEtrak This is not an editable option Remove Audit Trail Enter how many days worth of audit trail records you want to keep GAGEtrak will Records automatically purge and delete actions older than this value For example enter 7 to keep a week s wo
356. r To install into 4 different folder click Browse and select another folder You can choose not to install GAGEtrak 6 by clicking Cancel to exit Setup Destination Folder CNGTWEB Browse Cancel 5 Unless you re using the program with an MS SQL database the installation program will now let you select a location for the GAGEtrak database If you are using GAGEtrak in a client server environment skip to step 6 If you are using the program on a single workstation select the default directory CAGTWe If you have a network license of the program and are using it with an Access database click the Browse button and select the network directory where you will store your database If you are running the setup from a network drive the path to the SETUP EXE file will be the default database location If the folder you have selected has already been created a message window will appear to confirm that you wish to install to that directory anyway Click Yes to continue installation IMPORTANT Database Location The nest form allows you to specify the default database location for GAGEtrak 6 Any database files will be installed to this directory 1 Select the browse button to specify the desired shared database location 2 f you are installing a stand alone workstation and will not be sharing any files with other workstations click Browse and select a local drive All GAGEtrak 6 databa
357. r Minus value DF Degrees of Freedom Think of DF as the effective sample size of the Plus or Minus value This will be less than the actual sample size depending on the method of calculation The Uncertainty Budget will use DF to determine a t Statistic Select Yesor Noto determine whether an item is to be included in the Uncertainty Budget This is the only column you can change Include The question of when to include an Uncertainty Contributor in the Uncertainty Budget is discussed in the table below Row When to include Linearity with If Linearity was unacceptable use this estimate Even if you will not actually make a Linearity and Bias correction This estimate has been corrected for systematic error You may use this corrected choice at all times but the next two choices are also available Linearity with Only f Linearity was acceptable and Bias was unacceptable you may substitute this Bias corrected estimate for the first choice Even if you will not actually make a correction This estimate has been partially corrected for systematic error and is more conservative than the first choice Linearity If Linearity and Bias were both acceptable you may substitute this estimate for the Uncorrected first choice This estimate is not corrected for systematic error and is more conservative than the first choice Note If you believe Linearity error is negligible and not relevant you may select No for all three L
358. r after you click the Calc button Reference Value 1 50 Enter measurements from a variable gage or rating system If variable measurements are not feasible you may substitute numerical codes like 0 and 1 from attribute decisions by an authority the customer for example Code 1 50 If GRR was entered for the variable gage parts too close to the limit for consistent decisions are coded near limit after you click on the Calc button Appraiser Signal Parts that appraisers made mixed decisions about are coded mixed after you click on the Calc button Prefill You can use the Prefill feature to fill all measurements with the code for Pass or Fail if convenient Calc After you enter all of the measurements click this button to see the results of your study Print If you want to print the study click this button GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 151 Crosstabs Tab Appraiser vs Appraiser These tables compare appraisers to each other two at a time using a method called Crosstabulation B3 Gage RR Attribute Risk Analysis mi x gt Information Input Crosstabs Effectiveness Miss Rate Analysis Signal Detection Study Date A404 72002 Co Part No Msa Gage ID izba capros J Pait No fio 221 1 a Appraiser vs Appraiser Appraiser vs Ref Value A B Crosstabulation B C Crosstabulation A C Crosstabulation B Fail Pass Total Count Expected pen Count kappa Ex
359. rak select the Update Add Reports option and click the Next button This will bring up the Transfer Report Data window g4 Transfer Report Data Report Name Your Version Curr Version Action NewReportName Transter Data Select the Destination Connection Information and then click the drill down button to set the parameters for the update 262 Appendix A Data Transfer Utility Database C GTVV6 GTSamp60 mdb Use ODBC Use DSN Use File DSN T Schema Owner Database Required Fields Driver Server o 2 c Service Name luc uuu Database Attribute J cul Application Attributes pe Prefetch Count E E Transaction Option ss Translation Library Name ee en E OK Test Cancel Click the Browse button to search your hard drive for the new GAGEtrak database The file selected should have an mdb file extension designating it as a database You can also select other sources from which to update your GAGEtrak database These include Field Button Name Use ODBC Use DSN Description Check this box to use a Microsoft ODBC data source Selecting this check box will disable the Database Field and enable the fields below Note If you are unsure of any of these settings please consult your GAGEtrak administrator Database Name specify a name of the database This must be the same name as specified in your operating system as an ODBC data source Thi
360. re System Administrator s Guide 237 You can also use the Insert menu from the main menu bar and select Insert Report Header Footer Ex Report Designer New Report File Edit View Insert Format Tools Help DEHE 5 Page Numbers Date and Time Q E ipi ait Insert Report Header Footer 4253 Insert Page Header Footer 33 Insert Group Header Footer Design zi 3 MainRepo X Delete Section PageHeader Detail A new section on the canvas will appear a group header and a corresponding group footer appropriately labeled E El GroupHeader1 The default labels are GroupHeaderN and GroupFooterN where N is an integer from 1 onwards The name and other properties of the group can be changed in the properties frame on the left after selecting the data field you will group on If you know the name of the field you can type it directly in the field or choose from the drop down list of available fields It is also advisable to change the group header and corresponding group footer name to the name of the field you group on This change will be reflected in the header and footer names on the canvas You can add as many groups as you wish Design Preview E B MainReport PageHeader StudyID st EventiD GroupFooterl Select footer and change properties as with group header They GroupHeader 1 should have the ge m same name StudyID BackColor BackStyle 0 Can
361. reconfigure your G CONECT INI file follow these guidelines Note The brackets x contain instructions about the information you should enter after the equal sign on each line Database dbType fora Microsoft Access Database 1 for a client server database UseDSN for No 1 for Yes used only for client server UseFileDSN for No 1 for Yes used only for client serverj File Name of the database file used for Microsoft Access DatabaseJ Path Path mapped drive or UNC to the database file used for Microsoft Access Databasej DSN Data Source Name for the database used for DSNJ FileDSN Name and path mapped drive or UNC of the DSN file used with FileDSNJ Driver Driver name only if not using FileDSN or DSN Server Name of the server used for Microsoft SQL Sever Database Name of the database used for client server UID User D used only for client server PWD Password lused only for client serverj APA Application Attributes used only for client server not required DBA Database Attribute used only for client server not required PFC Prefetch Count used only for client server not required TLL Translation Library Name used only for client server not required TLO 7ranslation Option used only for client server not required Install InstallCode nstallation Code found on software package and CD envelope sample Configuration The following sample is for a single user Ac
362. reditation org pdf EA 4 02ny pdf GRUBBS F E rrors of Measurement Precision Accuracy and the Statistical Comparison of Measuring Instruments Technometrics Vol 15 February 1973 HICKS C R Fundamental Concepts in the Design of Experiments Holt Rinehart and Winston New York 1973 ILAC 617 2002 ntroducing the Concept of Uncertainty of Measurement in Testing in Association with the Application of the Standard ISO IEC 17025 2002 www ilac org ISO Guide to the Expression of Uncertainty in Measurement 1993 Revised 1995 NIST TN 1297 Guidelines for Evaluating and Expressing the Uncertainty of NIST Measurement Results 1994 www nist gov public affairs pubs htm NIST SEMATECH e Handbook of Statistical Methods wwmw itl nist gov div898 handbook WESTERN ELECTRIC A7 amp 7 Statistical Quality Control Handbook Charlotte NC Delmar Printing Company 1984 Chapter 13 Reports GAGEtrak includes a large variety of standard reports To generate reports go to the main menu and select the Reports icon The window below will appear Main Menu EA Your Company Name Division Name Listings and Reports Report Queue Gage Reports Open Calibration Reports Calibration History Reports Part Reports R amp R Reports Miscellaneous Reports Staff Reports Kitting Reports Main Records E satone Rd rr rn YES C Program Files GT WB05 GTS amp60 mdb Each standard report starts with a filter wind
363. restore the database to a specific location Manual Backup Manual Restore From this window you may choose Manual Backup or Automatic Backup by clicking on the appropriate tab Manual Backup Choose Manual Backup if you wish to specify the name of your backup file or to back up a database other than the one you are currently using To start the backup procedure click on the Manual Backup button You will be prompted to insert a diskette now the dialog box shown below will appear Choose a name for the Zip File 2 x Look in cls 3 Floppy et amp met E3 E EL History amp Desktop My Documents rw L Poot s Lue 20031001 ga File name X Open s Files of type ZIP zip Cancel My Network P Open as read only 7 Select the drive and enter a name for the backup ZIP file If you ll be saving not reusing the diskettes use the current date as your filename in this format YYYYMMDD ZIP For example save October 01 2003 s backup as 20031001 ZIP Tip The drive that you are backing up to must be removable media such as floppy disks or Zip disks You cannot back up onto your hard drive using the GAGEtrak Backup utility but you can copy your database to a network drive that is backed up daily GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 217 Alternate your backup diskettes so that you always have at least your last two backups available
364. riability in these materials can affect your measurements and calibrations suppliers often give you data on the test materials variation Gages or Gauges This term applies to many measurement inspection devices including fixed limit attribute or go no go and variable actual numeric measurement gages Usually your company calibrates this type of equipment internally using either working or precision standards You can calibrate fixed limit gages by using working standards or dimensional layout For simplicity throughout this manual we use the term gage to refer to all measurement equipment Inventory and Classification To begin your gage control system take an inventory of your gages During this initial inventory usually the most difficult determine origins locations types and calibration schedules then assign identification numbers and collect additional information to classify your gages In the past companies manually recorded this information on gage record cards that s where GAGEtrak comes in Instead of sifting through hundreds of cards to find gages due for calibration GAGEtrak automates the task letting you selectively create a list of these gages Calibration Schedules You usually determine calibration schedules by the gage s classification You can establish initial calibration schedules by expected usage engineering judgment and bargaining As you gather actual calibration information you might need to adjus
365. ripts remove the check from the Install MS SQL Script box Setup will install the MS SQL database scripts in the following folder To install into a different folder click Browse and select another folder v Install MS SQL Script Destination Folder C AGTWE Scripts Browse Cancel 10 Now the program will ask you to select the Program Manager group to add GAGEtrak s icons to We recommend that you select the default GAGEtrak 6 Enter the name of the Program Manager group to add GAGEtrak B icons to GAGEtrak 6 Accessories Administrative Tools ConfigS afe Customerworks 5 CyberboardT ray Faciliworks 5 Faciliw orks 6 FileZilla IV Create Desktop Icon 11 Click Next and this screen will appear You are now ready to install G amp GEtrak 6 Press the Next button to begin the installation or the Back button to reenter the installation information 180 Chapter 1 Installation 12 Click Next to begin the installation When it s finished you ll see this screen Installation was successful 1 Database Location 2 Demonstration Installation 1 Database Location The setup will prompt the user for a default location for the database If the file G Conect Ini is in the same directory as the Setup Exe the settings in the Ini file will be used for the database location If you purchased a multi user license each user should select the same datab
366. rity on the group level Five groups come with GAGEtrak 6 Admin Calibration Guest Issue and User you can add more groups as needed When you add a new group you can copy the permissions from another group then go to Group Permissions for the newly defined group and set up the necessary permissions The table below describes the fields on this form Field Button Name Description Group Select the group name you want to view or enter a new group name and click Add Addand Delete Adds or removes the group to or from the current listing in the Group dropdown list Buttons box All Users List Box When a user is defined in the Userssection of this module the default Group names are available for individual assignment Therefore if an existing Groupname is selected the users assigned to the Group name will be visible in the All Users list box on this form If the Group name is a newly defined group the administrator will have the opportunity to copy permissions from other groups Group Members List List box comprised of users belonging to a selected Group name Box Ada gt gt Button Select a user or group of users from the A Usersfield and click the Ada gt gt button to add to the Group Memberlist box of the currently selected group Remove Button Select a group member or members from the Group Membersfield and click the Remove lt lt button to remove the selected groups from the list box Security Users Add and remove applicatio
367. rked by the red dotted line running from the top to the buttom of the page The basic report format has three sections Page Header Detail and Page Footer The Header and Footer sections You can select multiple elements and change common properties such as font all at once To do this either drag the cursor while holding the left mouse button on the canvas to highlight your selection or simply hold the control button while clicking on the items you want to include in your selection appear on every page of your report while the Detail section contains the body of the report Grouping Your Data Some reports require grouping of data common record information is printed on one row and rows below include other varying details of the records For example in creating a report on the studies done on gages a group header would contain the ID number of the gage and the rows beneath would contain the type of studies done for the particular gage To create a group right click anywhere in the designer canvas and select Insert Group Header Footer from the popup menu a X Delete Section a ves Pres Reorder Groups ce ERE Cy ee ee Le IK c R ememmemmem y L1 jj17 1j e eee leccrtt nt ng n ng edes eis wae Gri ERES FROT EAE TE MRece cteceteiete RE rc Cin Ab db Cd d RA dde DDDIDDDIL MEME Devererxiieew wee esters enerere ave GAGEtrak Calibration Management Softwa
368. robability distribution occurs so frequently that it is named Normal When a quantity is influenced by a large number of variables as is usually true the pattern of variation will tend to be Normal The Plus or Minus variability of this distribution is expressed as some multiple of the standard deviation such as 16 26 or 3o When entering these Plus or Minus values choose Normal 1 Normal 2 or Normal 3 and GAGEtrak will select the appropriate Divisor to be used to convert to a standard uncertainty 1 6 When you run into something different like 1 96 c just enter Normal for Probability Distribution and 1 96 for Divisor When you run into total variation like 66 or 5 156 you can enter Normal and specify a divisor of say 5 15 You could also divide by two before entering the Plus or Minus value and enter a Divisor of 2 576 Note that GAGEtrak currently displays and prints GRR value as 1 o but other software or old printouts of GAGEtrak GRR studies may have been using 5 15 o Rectangular Distribution This is the distribution of choice when you have no idea what the real distribution is This distribution occurs when something varies between limits from one extreme to the other An example would be temperature as controlled by a thermostat Enter the plus or minus value as one half the difference between the extremes GAGEtrak will select a Divisor ofA 3 21732 Triangular Distribution This distribution occurs when two Rectan
369. rom the variable gage sorted in ascending order and the corresponding Appraisal Signal Crosstabulation Formulas OC observed count EC expected count A gt OC row x 2 OC column 7 Y OC all je OC agree EC agree EC disagree 154 Chapter 12 MSA Entry Attribute Analytic Gage theory tells us that a gage with no bias should have a fifty fifty probability of accepting a part that was made exactly on a specification limit That is true of both attribute and variable gages It is also true for both types of gages that because of repeatability problems parts just inside the limit will have a probability of acceptance that gradually increases to 100 and parts just outside the limits will have a probability of acceptance that gradually decreases to 0 A chart called a Gage Performance Curve shows how this works for both attribute and variable gages Gage Performance Curve Probability of Accepting 11 000000 12 000000 13 000000 14 000000 15 000000 16 000000 17 000000 18 000000 19 000000 21 000000 fH 22 000000 Reference Values The chart shows how the probability of acceptance gradually changes in an S curve near the Specification Limits The horizontal width of the S curve is about six times the Repeatability and the horizontal distance between a specification limit and the 50 point on the curve Is Bias With the data for making this chart GAGEtrak is able to calculate Repeatability and Bias for
370. rr Service Date fo Asset No Retirement Date I 1 Model No Supplier Code HM Tye zx Cost 0 00 Unit of Meas oo mj Purchase Date I 1 y Notes User Defined v Manufacturer v Owner z Issue Retum Clone Gage Graph Calibration Attach Standards Attach Procedures Record I4 4 48 b bl gt gt of 48 To enter a new gage record click the New Record button it looks like a blank sheet of paper on the floating toolbar or click the New Record button at the bottom of the screen Use your mouse cursor or TAB key to move between the available fields in the gage record window Press the F2 key to edit existing field information Gage Entry Information records contain the following fields GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 55 Field Button Name Description Gage ID In this field enter a unique alphanumeric identification code for each gage In order to save the gage record you must enter an ID For consistency and efficiency you ll need to develop your own gage ID numbering system Tip Avoid using the characters and in your gage IDs or other fields as these are considered wildcard characters in GAGEtrak It is also recommended that you do not use or for gage IDs If you must use these characters such as in Gage 1 then you must place brackets around the wildcard character whenever you want to search or filter your records for example you wo
371. rt as a labor and cost planning tool After you enter any filter values click V ewto view the schedule Tip Don t use too wide of a date range such as a 10 year span as it can take a long time to generate If the schedule takes too long press CTRL BREAK to stop it then try a smaller date range Schedule report options include Include days with no activity lf you want your report to include complete time frames check this box to include days on which calibrations aren t scheduled For example suppose you wanted to create a schedule for January through March and no calibrations were due in February If you left this box un checked your report would show January and March but not February If you checked this box the report would include February Default Hours GAGEtrak uses this value for gages that don t have an estimated calibration length i e their Calibration Hoursfields are blank For example if you enter 0 5 GAGEtrak assigns a half hour of time only to those gages If you entered Calibration Hoursfor your gages leave this field blank Schedule Type Use this field to select how to summarize your schedule by day week month quarter or year Select By Day With Detailsfor a comprehensive listing Tip You can print more than one schedule type without having to re generate the schedule each time Use these forms to gather calibration data and document work assignments for your personnel GAGEtrak Calibration
372. rth of Audit Trail data Enter 0 if you want to keep a comprehensive audit trail record If you have installed the 21 CFR Part 11 compliant version of GAGEtrak all audit trail records are retained permanently in this case this option is grayed out to show that you cannot change it Electronic Signature Check this box to require users to login before signing any record Login If you have installed the 21 CFR Part 11 compliant version of GAGEtrak electronic signatures are automatically permanently enabled this option is grayed out to show that you cannot change it Do Not Archive The selection of these options dictates how calibrations are to be archived If the Do Unsigned or Not Archive Unsigned Calibration checkbox is NOT checked then the Do Not Archive Unapproved Unapproved Calibration checkbox should be unchecked You can however just archive Calibration Unsigned Calibrations Likewise if the Do Not Archive Unapproved Calibration checkbox is checked the Do Not Archive Unsigned Calibration checkbox should be checked an approved calibration can only be archived if the Calibrated By and Approved By Signatures have been created for that calibration entry 198 Chapter 4 Setting Up GAGEtrak Settings Automatic Numbering GAGEtrak automatically generates a number sequence for your Calibration Certificates Service Requests Gage ID Calibration Scan File Name and Path Option numbering and Gage Numbering Schemes for cloning records
373. rtrait and Landscape In portrait orientation the page is oriented vertically in landscape it is oriented horizontally When you change these settings the page preview icon will change to give you a visual representation of the result Collate Select Collate when you are printing several copies of a multi page report to print each report sequentially When Don t Collate is selected all copies of page 1 will be printed then all copies of page 2 will be printed and so on Duplex If your printer offers duplex printing you can choose this option to print automatically on both sides of the paper Not all documents need to be printed in this manner so we have included this setting to be activated only when printing reports Paper Bin If your printer has more than one paper bin you can use this option to select a specific paper bin You might use this option to print on paper of a different size than the printer s default or to print on letterhead as opposed to blank paper Grid Settings The tiny dots you see evenly distributed over the designer canvas are the grid which is intended to give you guidance in the design and layout of your report The dots will not appear on your printed report The spacing of the dots in rows and columns is defined under Grid Settings By default there are 16 dots to the inch both horizontally and vertically Report Settings x v Align Controls to Grid Grid columns fi 5 Grid rows 15
374. rts with multiple source tables and summary queries C Direct SQL Query Allows you to manualy enter the Report s SQL Report Source directly for Advanced Users Cancel Next gt gt The first two selections use a query wizard guiding you easily through the process For the third selection you must know the syntax used to create SQL commands Simple Query If you only have one data source that is only one table to use for your report choose Simple Query First identify the table you wish to use as your data source To do this click on the list box on the right hand side of the Tables field and select from the list of available tables in your database if you know the table name you can type it directly into the provided field GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 231 Select report fields Which fields do you want in your query You can choose from any of the tables below Tables METER Rs ed Y patane epo Table nnn Calibration Header Calibration Header Siq Calibration Measurement Calibration Procedure Link Calibration Scans Calibration Standards CHArchive CheckBox Cancel lt lt Back Next gt gt Selecting a Table and Choosing Fields When a table has been selected in this case the Calibration Header table the list of available fields for the table will appear on the Available Fields list box You can now select the fields you want to appear in your repor
375. s associated with the current procedure can be selected from under Procedure Attachment and then by selecting this button Delete Click this button to remove the procedure from this gage When you click this button a dialog window will appear to tell you that in Gage Entry you can only remove the procedure from the current gage record To remove the procedure click Yes If you want to delete or remove a procedure from all gages you must do so in Procedure Entry see page 75 Remove Procedure 2 Do you want to remove this procedure from this gage This procedure will be removed from only this gage To remove a procedure from all gages Click Remove in Procedure Entry Adding Procedures To link another calibration procedure to this gage use the navigation buttons at the bottom of the Procedures window to add a new procedure record Again select the name of the procedure from the list box You can choose only procedures that you ve entered in Procedure Entry see page 75 Gage Entry Calibration Schedule In this screen you ll set up the calibration schedules for each gage GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 61 Gage Entry gt Information Specifications History Standards Parts Procedures Calibration Schedule R amp A Schedule User Defined Auth Persons Attachments Events Gage ID C 002 Description CALIPER DIAL 12 INCH T Initial Times Used 0 Projected Calibration Sched
376. s defined as the probability that a gage will still be in tolerance at the end of the calibration interval GAGEtrak estimates the current reliability by combining the calibration histories of all gages with the same gage type and same calibration frequency Then based on the reliability target GAGEtrak calculates the probability that a change is not needed called significance If significance is below the significance threshold then GAGEtrak suggests a recommended change When a change is found to be necessary method A3 uses formulas that optimize the calibration frequency in fewer steps than Method A1 93 94 Chapter 10 Gage Frequency Adjusting Interval When Method A1 Is chosen as opposed to Method A3 the calibration frequency usually changes every time you calibrate even after the calibration frequency has achieved high end of period reliability Most users will prefer less frequent changes and may not want the short calibration intervals that go with high reliability Method A1 is included for users who are familiar with it and wish to continue using it Method A1 does not make use of the module we are discussing but does use parameters that can be changed in Setup Settings Cal Options A1 Adjusting Calibration Frequency Setting Settings User Info General Cal Options Calendar Security Automatic Numbering Interface 1 Adjusting Calibration Frequency Setting Frequency Adjustment Factors
377. s field is required User ID enter the User ID that is required to access this ODBC data source This field is required Password enter the password that is required to access this ODBC data source This field is required Driver use the drop down menu to select an ODBC driver The type of driver you will use is dependent upon the type of data source i e Microsoft Access file This field is required Server enter the ODBC server name This field is required Service Name a string that a server application responds to when a client attempts to establish a conversation with the server Database Attribute Application Attributes Prefetch Count if the database engine supports this this property sets the number of result set rows to be prefetched when executing a query the purpose of which is to minimize server round trips and maximize the performance of applications Translation Option value controlling translation functionality value of which depends on the database engine being used which is specific to the translation DLL being used The translation DLL contains the required functions that the driver loads and uses to perform tasks such as character set translation Translation Library Name this is the name of the translation DLL to be used in the Translation Option property Check this box to use a Data Source Name Selecting this check box will disable the Database Field and enable the fields below Note If y
378. s form is closed setup Report Control ID Entry If your company needs to comply with ISO 9000 or QS 9000 Document Identification and Control requirements you can identify each GAGEtrak report with a unique document control number To set up this feature select Report Control ID Entry from the Setup menu and either enter a new record defining a new Report Name or edit the existing entries The document control ID the Control Text field will appear at the bottom of reports Use the navigation menu at the bottom of the window to cycle through the reports Report Control ID Entry EE Control ID Number 99 Report Name a3 Frequency Adjusting Report Control Text a3 Frequency Adjusting Report Record I 4 1 gt bl gt gt of 96 Tip If your company doesn t require a form number on reports use this area for your company s address and telephone numbers Setup Security From the Security menu you can assign different rights to the program for each user Users belong to groups and inherit the security rights of each group they belong to Security Groups You can add or remove user groups and members using this screen Security el Ea Users Group Permissions Object Permissions Status Group Guest Add Delete All Users Group Members Add gt gt Remove lt lt GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 205 It is easiest to set up secu
379. s predefined label templates a custom label designer and even a label wizard GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 249 Select Report Template xi OK EM Cancel 1 1 2 Inch Label Label Vizard Setup is just like report setup design your individual labels and the program does the printing for you To print labels you must have the GAGEtrak Calibration Label Printer As with designing a report you open up a data source and drag fields and field labels to the label you are creating as needed You can add bar codes too the process is the same as the process of adding bar codes to any other report Custom Label When you select this option you will first be prompted to set up your label printer Print Setup ea xr Printer Name Brother PT 9200D Properties Status Ready Type Brother PT S200D Where PTUSB PT S200DX M24388343 Comment Paper Orientation Size 36 mm Portrait Source Normal C Landscape Network Cancel You must specify the label printer and the size of the label you will use correctly If your default printer is not a label printer and you choose to use it anyway a dialog box will appear asking if you wish to continue using that printer cReport2D esigner 0 x P Selected printer doesnt appear to be a label printer e Use it anyway The program will attempt to set the canvas to the smallest p
380. s program is protected by copyright lav and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under law Cancel 3 Inthe next screen enter the install code for your copy of GAGEtrak You can find this code on the CD envelope that came with your software package Tip If you don t have an install code leave this field blank J3 Enter Install Code x Trial Installation Leave the Install Code blank to install the 45 day trial evaluation copy of this software Permanent Installation If you have purchased this software please enter the Install Code number located on the outside of the CD envelope that came with your package Install onee 4 Nowthe installation program will tell you that you will be choosing the location for the program on your hard drive Since this location is specific to each workstation do not select a network location We recommend using the default directory C GTW6 Program Location 4 The next form allows you to specify where the A GAGEtrak 6 0 program will be installed Do not specify a network location It is recommended that you accept the default location C GTWw B GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 177 Setup will install GAGEtrak 6 in the following folde
381. s subforms and subreports The file format and appearances are the same as those described above for the Output To command see the description for Send for reports under Report Commands and Functions beginning on page 161 You can send GAGEtrak information in the following formats Output All and Selection options are not available with the Send option Send l E Select Format Selection Select Record Command Use the Select Record command from the Edit menu to select highlight the current record which allows you to work with it as a whole For example you can select a record you want to copy to the Clipboard Select All Records Command You can use the Select All Records command from the Edit menu to select highlight all open records so that you can work with them as a group For example you can select all the records in one table and copy them to a spreadsheet or word processing document GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 45 Find Command mu While you re in Form view or Table view you can use Edit Find or the Find button LA to search through your records for specific information For example you could search the database for gages located in a certain department or for gages you purchased last year You can search for any text string including a phrase a word or part of a word You can also use wildcard characters to make the search more general For faster searches search for the f
382. s suse C LONE OR 53 Searching OF FIMERING ee Rr OS QU 54 Gage Entry Informatie citet dudo Petrus tcia tai tia dee as cod boe bn ted T P ek EM Puta eM b A Rio nin eA LE DAE HT Sate 54 Gage EN thy SSC INCA ONS ooi ied endi te tete unti Oaertn iO nen neat Gute E tese cH 56 GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual vii Gage Entry HIStOEY anon oce oma ee coa aS Adae M UD Lp scam EI UNA 57 Gage Entry Standardsa ou iunt reir ro od ica Pee dive a eT d UAE RETE even Tne REE E Ru via odo eU adv ERE Ev Ree dobuld 57 Standards Prell ENUY srusen voit aser ae SERERE FER EREMO PD mee et vm nV One Mi e MEO m e 58 GAGS EMMY FACS E AAEE EAN E AAA E A AO 59 Gage Entry Procedures snini a R 60 Gage Entry Calibration Schedule ion eter Ro aa Ee ERE NS de CE eH Sd a a aaneen EEE ERORA 60 Gage Entry Re Schedules ies en uti haic ted ote bed iNT nner nary on edu dits RE ouv dO rtv s mrt ete 64 Gage Entry User Defined ioc enn te e e ei io diu Pet o oi do Qr avers ut ec dte t o m WC CP AE 65 Gage Entty Authorized Persons cvs eai eet eo ca tUa oni nne e RO Doe ete enden Mete OD hr M DR ee RU det vv in AURI DUE Ras 65 Gage Entry Alttachmelites eedem ute DEED nas wren Isa EUER EROR E E brmu REIR ERA ERUNT 66 GaGe Ent y inicr 67 Using Gage RecOLOdS ooi E de oe on la td cM al a a a ia 67 lesue Returri Tracking RecoFus i ctriietetei E pee nte tesob tels ue Suites ups Dep secs R 67 Cloning Gage Recortls xx
383. s to calibrate the gage Est Calibration Cost Enter in this field an estimate of the calibration cost as to labor and other resources that were used Last Cal Date Enter the last calibration date for the gage GAGEtrak automatically updates this field whenever you add a new calibration record for the gage Next Due Date The next calibration due date is automatically updated when you add a new calibration record for the gage Next Due Date Calibration Date Freq You can also manually enter a date into this field If today s date is past the Next Due Date you ll see the message Past Due on the right of this date Tip Click Next Cal b button to calculate this field immediately only if you entered a calibration frequency and last calibration date This button is useful if you want the program to calculate the next due date but don t want to enter a calibration record for the gage 18 Chapter 4 Entering Gage Records Field Button Name Estimated Due Date Usage Used Left Projected Calibration Schedule Description Whenever a gage that uses Usage or Cycles is issued returned calibrated or has the Last Calibration Date Calibration Frequency Calibration Frequency UOM changed or the user clicks on Next Calib button the Estimated Due Date will be calculated based on Calib Freq and Average Cycles Usage Per Day If the gage has no passed calibration records if the gage has a passed calibration record or if there are
384. sc bw edn essed eal doc E rien vie De T tM LU UA Aer Eres c D Aut CUL E be fe epu iD tO 39 Datasheet Table Views of RECOrdS cccccsccsscsscssccsscsscsscssscsscsscssccsscsscsssssscsssssssccsscsssssscsssssssccsssssssccssssessecssssssssscsessssssacsessoesees 40 Elements of a Table View VV ING OW isseire er eve vog vr EET SEEN EDEN EET WIDE E EDU Up dese VE aer Es 41 Other Commands and PUNCHONS Acer La ee eee cob t al aia ver rt WR EROR E ie E DN TE I E EE 44 Dutput To Command Tor Records 25 mating i Ep cond tei oe P VER EI CETUR EON AR DUE EID UL VERA Ha PURSE UE UE Va Sn 44 Send Command E mail Reports TR X X P 44 Select Record Compiantd stesse dnd e OE adiit oo UE NR a e a e E Eu E SED E a as 44 Select All RECOrds COmiinianie PET E 44 Find OF VII AIAG a a a raaa case lous saavs tas aa a AANE TAE EEEE aE E vad oda sanussansbenned E E a a a a i a 45 keplace Command ora on ba c ero bs ba hc vis de dnos EE E A a 45 Remove Unwanted Information from Dropdown Lists sssssscscssssssecsssescssssseccscsscsscnseasessacsasessasenssssecessaseececsaceecaceaseecaceasessaceasecsacsasacsasess 46 Quick Sort Comitiabidaassish e rod ER IR ERI TUE HI a E ERN WEE Et indes UEM ME 47 Adding ING We FROG ON No NE D T DOSE 48 Dodo CORINNA ee ses oer cor A o6 cos utt OE de L S CA C EM D CD E 48 Show Al Records Comtabgz scc t aes cas estricto ei evo mbi oci eva endete e EL C 48 Deleting Records eset sates ists pe
385. se files will be installed to the following directory If you will be sharing databases with other workstations you will need to select a network drive If vou will not be sharing databases you may select a local drive If your administrator has set up a network directory browse to that directory You can choose not to copy the GAGEtrak B setup by clicking Cancel Destination Folder CAGTWEB Browse Cancel 178 Chapter 1 Installation 6 7 8 Next GAGEtrak will ask if you want it to create backup copies of all of the files that it overwrites on your system We recommend that you select Yes and use the default location C GTW6 BACKUP This installation program can create backup copies of all files replaced during the installation These files will be used when the software is uninstalled and a rollback is requested If backup copies are not created you will only be able to uninstall the software and not roll the system back to a previous state Do you want to create backups of the replaced files Yes C No Please select the directory where the replaced files will be copied Backup File Destination Directory C GTWB BACKUP Browse Select the version of GAGEtrak that will be installed fyour company is not required to comply with 21 CFR Part 11 select the radio button labeled Standard Application This is the default installation fyour company is require
386. se the screen Note Datasheet formatting is retained within the program file in the current application installation new application installations default to latest datasheet layout Printing Tables of Records You can print records in both Table and Form views To do so select Print from the File menu You can also select Print Setup and Print Preview from the File menu These commands combined with the Filter Sort command will be useful when you re designing customized reports Hiding and Displaying Colurnns You can temporarily hide columns while in Table view This feature helps you remove nonessential data from the screen and reduce the report s width when you re designing a custom report To Hide Columns 1 Select the column selector button you want to hide located at the top of the column To hide multiple columns drag across multiple column selector buttons When all desired columns for hiding are selected 2 Select Format from the menu and choose Hide Current Column To Display Hidden Columns 1 From the Format menu choose Show Hide All Columns Unhide Columns 20x Column Close Status JV Ref Standard Iv v NIST No v Gage S N M Asset No M Model No Description Type Unit of Meas v Drawing No Drawing Date v Change Level M M M M V Notes 2 Inthe Unhide Columns window check the checkbox of the column name you want to show 3 When you ve s
387. sed a Study Type that cannot calculate a particular row Row Name Description EV Equipment variation Repeatability AV Appraiser Variation Reproducibility INT Appraiser x Part Interaction GRR Combined variation for EV AV and INT PV Part Variation not to be confused with Process Variation Part Variation will be estimated using 6 sigma process variation if it was entered other wise it will be estimated from the parts in the study TV Total Variation an estimate of Process Variation TV will be estimated from 6 sigma process variation if it was entered other wise it will be estimated from the parts in the study R bar The overall average range relates to repeatability UCL R Upper Control Limit for the range control chart If the range chart is out of control there will be flags on the appraiser tabs to indicate likely typos or measurement mistakes Number of distinct Also called nd this is an alternative statistic to GRR of TV used in some industries categories It is the ratio of PVto GRR multiplied by 1 41 Column Name Description Standard Dev Standard deviation 10 not 5 156 This is used for uncertainty calculations Contribution Proportion of Total Variation This helps put things in perspective of TV Percent of Total Variation This is the primary comparison tool of Tol Percent of part Tolerance based on 60 not 5 150 An alternate comparison tool Interpretation Most manufacturing c
388. ser and by Appraiser Part sccssscssssscssssssssssscsssesssssssssscscscscscscseseseseseeseseseseseseaesesesseeees 122 WhiSkers C hal Uomo ree E E Lob E TUUS D a RU eer eae eras Dus 122 A Y Ploto Averages Dy SIZE ERREUR NEA EER EEEE 122 Comparison XY PlOUS isa Eti eni a clean Edo a doe ICH QUE VES OCHO pA za oe 123 SCAG gi dio MEET RR T TENERE 123 Repeatability Range ContEoL Caltanissetta riae ebd rb a ue one ta e lea Nr E bro out dedero a A 123 Part Appraiser Average CON Ol Cabs onec cde o Eo det ob Fe RO ea oe ci det b EE A ERI c E UO EE 124 Residual PLO DY SIZE oen to rte t E PNE a Ra i TE 124 Average and Range Fortrtllads uuscecae odore ae ar voe aee ragione usted can uals oua d NEN E Ea eE oun eL x SVE Rd da NEN E NM E AD TTE TNT Q ER dU dE URUN Te FB d a URN TRES 125 ANOVA Formulas ood aa Qtr a d da duc da cine EU dad EN Dd md 126 Sample ANOVA SIG euo a er NI Toa QI inei euo Ol ERR EU Dee e HEN IC A aie toa meee ea eee iene ale 127 Linearity Blas and Ulcertallibi sa onse eh ett ert a crebra t e hv Eu Ce OY EVER DAE OSEE chad ves D eats tases Sentences 131 LINGARIGY Se Bias SUY E EE e 131 si xam 131 EDE ary E RE 132 TALS TAD p c RR 132 Eineariy Study interpretations eini a iic iia etri oh etri e eet ue Ma Ete eric e erence aoc een MI RCA 134 sI cs omee E 134 Uncertainty ME eT ET
389. significant decimals for the calibration standards for each gage according to each gage s most precise tolerance or resolution set Status of Gages This procedure updates the Gage Entry Status field for a records to which you haven t assigned a status It changes these empty Status fields to status 1 Active This utility won t change the status of any gages in your database that already have a status Note Use this utility only if you re upgrading from a 1 x version of GAGEtrak or if you imported data from another program or file format If you re upgrading from a 1 x version of GAGEtrak run this utility after the Data Transfer Utility see Appendix A Chapter 8 Customizing Reports This Customizing Reports chapter is an overview of how to work with the Custom Reports module For a comprehensive Report Editor User s Manual visit Atto Awww cybermetrics com CustomReport asp to download a complimentary guide GAGEtrak 6 now offers the ability to manipulate your reports You can create new reports or edit existing reports import reports from other compatible databases or export reports You can also delete reports from the Custom Report list that are no longer in use The Report Editor design environment describes how to add and modify controls in your report It includes detailed descriptions of Report Editor user interface elements including menus and toolbar items and preference settings In addition you will learn about some basic
390. sion 5 0 Version 4 0 Version 3 0 Data cscscssscsssssscsscssssssecsssscseceees 260 Sample Data Transfer from Version 3 Archive ndi cocer boe reside edo itinere de Rosse aes oa see uU esa ease etek 261 Update Add Reporte eiae ance dum scatet eut de Peut Pe OUO Le HD De oU acte c n Ec Oe QN Dot cuss EDO RUIT HIR DU D DR dod 261 Appendix B Table Definitions 4 4 e rere eene eee re eene eene rn erae en ern ene ee en eene ra ene sn eee ene ene seeaeses 20D Key ISLES cauce tht dat undo LA La me ad 265 Combinaton Key FIelds zc ei iiti rt tieu i e ER E Riv Dist eic e o EDU Dni m Ie ER ett nie its oneris Din A 265 Tabte Definitio suse ES Leu m m e M AM V M EM E 265 Appendix C Database Manage MeN nosse Dese d ebbe due oss iss ae pest saentesa eire N Or T Pe NELLE EIE 301 Create d New GAGEtrak Datab3sB oe creed tvi eet eve ttu voveo dv Posee uev b devo dou dovete deve ua deve a lUe deved a dude vendu do dick UMANE LIPPE SUME LM EE 301 Appendix D System Maintenance and Troubleshoot ing e eere ener eere orn ooeso es 303 Date Fotrhadls 5 etti testi toii iUi ta uidit du eid Mida dus uM MS eR UIN Me cid uU Ue IE UE 303 Maintaining Your Hand Drives a iot aceti tou i qua toc aan su Died aU UU aaa eau amine ae 303 Maximizing Your Pertortisbibe ioi a crecen Der oa bueno re EVI D eth en apt ED Les Choc des Ven dS AE 304 Installation T 3ll5 55 5 59 00000
391. ssed under Bias Tabon page 135 Linearity Study Interpretation The Goodness of Fit value R2 of the linear regression line determines whether the biases and reference values have a good linear relationship This value will be a number between 0 and 1 the closer it is to 1 the better the linear relationship You can also evaluate goodness of fit by looking at the chart If the fit is adequate then apply three criteria 1 The horizontal zero bias line on the chart should fit within the confidence limits 2 Theabsolute value of the t Statistic for Slope should not be larger than t Critical 3 The absolute value of the t Statistic for Intercept should not be larger than t Critical If the regression line does not fit well do not apply the above criteria Study the chart for evidence of non linearity Non linearity can be acceptable if bias per part is always near zero If a measurement system has significant linearity error look for these possible causes Gage not calibrated properly at lower and upper ends of the operating range Error in the minimum or maximum master Worn instrument BON Internal instrument design characteristics 5 M Mistakes in measurement or typos If there is significant linearity error that cannot be eliminated you may be able to use the gage by using the regression equation to correct future measurements In the automotive industry this requires customer permission Bias Tab This tab analyzes the bias for
392. ssssescscscscsesesesesesessesesesesesescsesesessseaesesescaeaeseseseseseeseseacacas 18 Cloning GAGS REC OMS oxic sr iO aee abe Ed cv rre h de es acr eU cda eere eU ode vane estecueatandetehedeede eg omrieeeeietaensaneudeuieseees 19 Other Gage EntFy ORONS n o dert o a oa Lad eise o ve ioo roo b D otn dor tea nunavetsusr eta vc re o dot UE 19 Chapter 5 Entering Calibration Records 4 4 4 e e eeen eene ere re enero era en ern en een ene ene eneneseeees 21 Gali Fa CON EMERY EET OEA EN 21 Calibration Measurements uoa oer einn beoe m ue ca cnt A ne LL D ease ual cata ll 23 Other Calibration Entry Options satinn nectit a tedi e n dein ee o o hie No lace er hoe DD Re Hbc odds 24 opine S J0 8J SIUIUJpV ula1s S Chapter 6 Issuing and Returning Gages 4 eere ener eere reor en ern en een ene enero ene sneneseeseses ZI Issue Gages and Return GAG S con ddnsadasion era dein Drvoc od Iu RII U ToU O2 UA Dec Un Do VD IE NU DR RUE UR CUIR suai Det uU ud quM dud CUT 25 Iesue Dagess unidades tora os Ue dco Eta rene n S besote ISI t usen cun o bte heise 26 cuam 26 vi Table of Contents Chapter 7 CONG UISION lt eccsseciccccescececsecsicccbecebtcchesebuscbeessivssocssccchcssbsecaestsuchesdedecseathessbeceaessheseausebecsbueeeeeetntee 2D USER S NANUAL easiest crate es deus mo dence ta uude M SUDDEN stu ran ei 2
393. sued Dept and a text message specific to the Email Event triggered Email Text Content included in email transmission Employee ID Select staff personnel from the dropdown list box that will be emailed when added to an Email Event GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 209 Setup Multiple Choice Entry Selecting this module allows a user to edit built in program lists For example In Gage Entry Calibration Schedule you will notice that for Calib Freq the user has the opportunity to select a predefined UOM from the dropdown list of choices this is one of 15 lists of choices that can be edited based on the users needs If the user would like Days to reflect No of Days this is the module that will allow you to make that revision Changing the text does not effect how the program uses this field It merely changes what the user sees on the screen and any changes made to the text fields will appear throughout the program Multiple Choice Entry Description Of Multiple Choice These are the choices for the calibration frequency unit of measure Text Days weeks Months DOM M Record I 4 4 gt gt t gt of 15 The table below describes the fields on this form Field Button Name Description Description of Multiple Explanation of where choices are used and what they are used for Choice Default Un editable values for available choices in built in list
394. sword Change Password Cancel The first time you login to GAGEtrak you will see this message First Time Logon x eo This is the first entry for user ID Default Enter a password Click OK your User ID will default to Default then enter a password in the New Password field and enter the same password in the Confirm Password field GAGEtrak will require you to enter this password the next time you login User ID Default New Password Confirm Password OK Cancel When you wish to change your password click on the checkbox labeled Change Password in the Logon window GAGEtrak will require you to enter your old password then enter and confirm your new password GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 33 Main Menu The main menu shows the name of the currently logged in user in the lower left corner and shows the full path to the current data file in the lower right corner O Your Company Name Division Name Main Records ons Gage Entry Supplier Entry Part Entry Issue Gages Procedure Entry Return Gages Service Request Entry Status Kit Entry P C GTWE GTS amp60 mdb User ID No User Name Organization of GAGEtrak s Menus GAGEtrak s new Microsoft Outlook style interface is easy to learn and use with clean clear graphics and an intuitive approach that makes extensive training sessions and manuals unnecessary Gage
395. t Its name will change to Stop When you re finished with the calibration click Stop and GAGEtrak will automatically calculate the time and enter it in the Hoursfield The time is expressed in decimal hours example 0 25 hours 0 25 x 60 minutes 15 minutes Account No Enter any tracking number associated with the calibration cost such as a job purchase order invoice customer or department number Certificate No You can enter a certificate number or push the button next to this field to generate a sequential certificate number automatically If you want to use automatic numbering you must first set up your numbering in Setup Settings Automatic Numbering You can specify a numbering format and view the last number used Calibration Measurements Use this screen to view the standards test parameters or checkpoints that you use to calibrate the gage GAGEtrak copies this list from the Standards table that you defined in Gage Entry g3 Calibration Entry x Calibration Measurements Uncertainty Procedures Labels Signature Attachments User Defined Calibration Scans Gage ID E 002 Standard ID Type Units Minimum Nominal Maximum P Ref Type Format Before Accuracy Limited Gage ID of Standard Std Due Date Uncertainty After Accuracy Use 1 Block 0 Inch T ilv z J finch 0 001 of 0 001 GAGE BLOCK S z moo a a enze omea concen NN f2 Block 1 Inch v lv T finch 0 23
396. t Appraiser Average Control Chart Using a standard average chart the averages of each appraiser s readings for each part are plotted including the overall average and control limits Appraiser groups the data with lines connecting each appraiser s points If half or more of the points are outside of the control limits then the measurement system should be able to detect part to part variation If less than half is outside the control limits it might be because the measurement system isn t able to thoroughly distinguish differences or because the part sample doesn t represent the expected process variation Example Part Appraiser Average Control Chart UCL 0 8796 Avg 0 8075 LCL 0 7354 Residual Plot by Size The averages of each appraiser s readings for each part are subtracted from each trial and the residuals are plotted versus the overall part average There should be no discernable patterns on this chart Any visible pattern would suggest that something Is wrong with the data or the measuring system GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 125 2 6092 2 1092 1 6092 1 1092 0 6092 Residual 0 1092 0 3908 0 8908 1 3908 Fitted Value Average and Range Formulas Range Short Form Method Values of dy for one trial pats 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 27931 1 23105 1 20621 1 19105 1 18083 1 17348 1 16794 1 16361 1 16014 1 27931 1
397. t Enter in this field an estimate of the calibration cost as to labor and other resources that were used Last Cal Date When you first enter the gage record enter the gage s last calibration date Later the program will automatically update this field whenever you add a new calibration record for the gage Next Due Date This field shows the next calibration due date It s automatically updated whenever you add a new calibration record for the gage Next Due Date Calibration Date Freq You can also manually enter any date into this field If the current date is past the next due date you ll see the message Past Due on the right of this date Tip To calculate this date immediately click the Next Calib button only if you ve entered a calibration frequency and last calibration date Using this button you can calculate the next due date even if you don t enter a calibration record for the gage Usage Left This field displays the amount of usage or cycles remaining before this gage is due for calibration This field is only used if the gage has a Usage or Cycles calibration frequency and is not editable Usage Used This field displays the amount of usage or cycles that have been used since the last calibration of this gage This field is only used if the gage has a Usage or Cycles calibration frequency and is not editable Projected Calibration To the right of the calibration schedule you ll see the next three anticipated Sched
398. t by clicking on their names in the list You can select more than one field at a time if you select a field by mistake you can unselect it by clicking on the field name again Select report fields Which fields do you want in your query Y ou can choose from any of the tables below Tables Caiibration H eader E Available Fields Selected Fields Gage_ID gt Calibration_D ate Calibration_Time cs EA Department lt lt Results Ex Cancel lt lt Back i Now click on the selection buttons between the Listing fields to move the fields you have highlighted to the SELECTED FIELDS list box to the right This places the fields in your report gt Add field to selected list gt gt Add all fields to selected list Remove fields from selected list a Remove all selected fields When you are satisfied with your selection click on the Next button Setting Sort Order To set the order or arrangement of data in your report you have to specify which table and what field will determine this order Set Sort Orders Which fields do you want to sort You can choose multiple fields from multiple tables listed below Tables Calibration Header M Available Fields Selected Fields Calibration_D ate i Calibration Header Gage ID Action Required Sort Order Ascending M Cancel lt lt Back Next gt gt 232 Chapter 8 Customizing Reports You can h
399. t editor are set to 1440 twips 1 inch all around If you prefer a wider or narrower margin click on the up or down arrow next to the field Top Margin Bottom Margin Left Margin or Right Margin you wish to adjust Clicking on the up arrow will add 360 twips or 1 4 to the width of the margin clicking on the down arrow will subtract a similar amount from GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 239 the width of the margin You may also enter a value manually if you want a 5 8 bottom margin for instance multiply 1440 twips inch by 625 Enter the resulting value 900 in the Bottom Margin field The gutter is an additional area you can add to your inside margin width increasing the nonprinting area of your document If you expect to print reports that will be bound in a ring binder you might want to add a gutter of Ys to V to allow for holes to be punched Click on the up or down arrows to increment this value by 360 twips 4 or enter a value manually as desired If you are printing on the front and the back of a page and your left and right margins are different or if you have added a gutter to your pages you will probably want to check the Mirror Margins checkbox Checking this box automatically sets your margins so that the inside margins of facing pages are the same and the outside margins as well just as if they were reflected in a mirror When you check this box the margin display chang
400. t file format options Export Format SpA n aera ar Save As 2 x Save in cx Twe e amp cx E e L BACKUP E History amp Desktop Export Options Filename D Em My Documents p E File name Save as type Rich Text Format RTF M Cancel ee My Network P Export Options allows you to select a save location Send The Send command from the File menu allows you to output reports to Microsoft Outlook or any MAPI compatible mail program The output includes subforms and subreports The file format and appearances are as shown below f E mail Report Select Report Format Rich Text Format RTF Portable Document Format PDF Excel Worksheet Format XLS GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 161 el ES Cancel Export E Mail Ready Print Setup Z Select Print Setup from the File menu if you want to change report print settings such as printer selections paper size and source or report orientation Portrait or Landscape For more information on how to set up page characteristics refer to Report Settingsin Chapter 7 Customizing Reports on page 238 of the System Administrator s Guide The type of printer driver installed controls some options but a typical setup window looks Like this Print Setup rd x m Printer Name HP LaserJet 4 X Properties Status Ready Type HP LaserJet 4
401. t five different reference values Ideally bias will appear to be slightly above or below zero at each of the five reference values If bias is found to vary significantly from zero the study will tell us whether it varies in a linear way easy to compensate for or a non linear way more difficult to compensate for Some gages are calibrated with custom made masters and there are only one or two reference standards If you don t have at least three reference standards you can do the study using calibrated parts e g have the parts measured by a more authoritative instrument such as a coordinate measuring machine Then each part will have a reference value If enough reference standards are available it is better not to use parts If a linearity study is to represent an entire family of gages you may want to use a different gage for each reference value Then the repeatability of calibration will actually be GRR of calibration because it will include appraiser variation Appraiser variation can refer to gages operators or laboratories You could even use two technicians by letting each do half of the trials Bias Only Study When you only want to check bias at a single reference value select on the Linearity tab Bias Only for study type You will still be able to do Uncertainty except for the Linearity contribution 132 Chapter 12 MSA Entry Linearity Linearity Bias and Uncertainty P Linearity Trials Bias Uncertainty S
402. t the schedules The primary intent of a calibration schedule is to detect accuracy deterioration porto intolerable levels of accuracy Accuracy deterioration usually results from gage usage less often it results from the passage of time The most common methods for determining calibration schedules are Elapsed calendar time the most popular method it establishes a fixed calendar time such as 90 days as a checking interval Actual amount of usage time and cycles based on counting the number of days or operating cycles for which the gage was used you can keep this count manually or automatically Actual operating time an excellent method for electrically driven gages a device used for measuring actual operating time is called a coulometer Calibration Practice To ensure consistency in your calibration techniques develop procedure manuals of calibration practices At minimum include tolerances for accuracy standards temperature and humidity controls if needed time cycles human technique and other important factors After calibration make the equipment tamper proof if possible with sealed adjusting screws lead sealed lock wires stamps and other devices Record the results of your calibration checks and any required adjustments or repairs At minimum record the following information Date on which calibration was checked Person that checked calibration Any deficiencies seen in the equipment
403. ta Tools GAGEtrak 6 0 x AN No Audit Trail Enabled Ifyou would like to enable an Audit Trail select this option from Settings Security When OK is selected the Advances Audit Trail form will be displayed for your reference but the system will NOT be tracking any records until an audit trail has been selected Data Tools Backup Restore You should periodically back up your GTDATA60 MDB database file we suggest that you do so every day We recommend that you use GAGEtrak s built in Backup Restore function for this task However if you have a specialized backup product such as Colorado Backup Zip Drive or another network backup utility you can use that product instead GAGEtrak s Backup Restore utility works only with MS Access databases If you are using MS SQL you must use backup and restore utilities designed for SQL See your System Administrator as these are not included with GAGEtrak Backing Up Data First insert a formatted blank diskette in your floppy drive You may need to have more than one available depending upon how many records are in your database Next click on the Data Tools icon in the main menu then click on the Backup Restore button The Data Backup window will appear as shown below C Manus Automatic Select Manual Backup to select the name of the backup file or to backup a database other than the current database Select Manual Restore if the backup was created with Manual Backup or to
404. ta Type Length StateCode Text key 50 State Text 50 Table Name Status Description Gage status lookup Associated From Status Form Edit Status Field List Data Type Length Status ID Long Integer key 4 Status Text 20 Table Name Supplier Master Description Supplier information Associated From Supplier Master Edit Supplier Records Field List Data Type Length Supplier Code Text key 50 Supplier_Master_Name Text 50 Salutation Text 50 Contact Text 50 Phone Text 50 Fax Text 50 EMail Text 50 Address Text 50 City Text 50 State Text 50 Zip Text 50 Country Text 50 Last_Review Date Time 8 Last_Rating Date Time 8 Last_Received Date Time 8 Last_Reject Date Time 8 Enabled Long Integer 4 User1 Text 50 User2 Text 50 SupType Text 50 Table Name Tab Captions Description Form tab custom caption names Associated From Form Tabs GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 295 Field List Data Type Length Form_Name Text key 50 Tab Name Text key 50 Tab Caption Text 50 Table Name tblCriteria Description Internal use Associated From None Field List Data Type Length cr ID Long Integer key 4 cr HeaderlD Long Integer key 4 cr Field Text 100 cr Operator Text 50 cr Value Text 50 cr SortBy Text 50 Table Name tblDTUCount Description Internal use Associated From None Field List Data Type Length FromTableName Text key 255 FromCount Long Integer 4 ToTableName Text key 25
405. table field based on the Interval Adjustment selection made for this Method record in Gage Entry Calibration Schedule Findings Use this memo field to describe any other pertinent information such as visual inspection notes Note What you enter here appears on the calibration certificate 2 Uncertainty This field displays the total calculated uncertainty value using the root sum of squares method You can t edit it Environmental Enter the 7emperature Humidity Pressure and Otherfactors that may affect the calibration GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software Quick Start Guide 23 Field Button Name Description Status If you wish you may change the gage s status at the time of calibration To change the gage s status select gage status from the dropdown list as to 1 Active 2 In Active 3 Out for Repair 4 In Calibration 5 Lost Note The calibration Status field will disappear and cannot be edited once the calibration record has been passed Accounting Section Field Button Name Description Cost Enter any costs related to the calibration such as those for internal or external service or supplies Hours In this field enter the actual time in hours that the calibration required In the gray box next to this field GAGEtrak shows the estimated default time from Gage Entry Use the Starttimer button next to the Hoursfield to time your calibration it works like a stopwatch When you re ready to calibrate click Star
406. table it means the bias did not change and GAGEtrak can calculate the bias as long as you are able to enter a reference value for the reference standard or retained sample that was used If the chart shows a shift or drift in bias the amount of change estimated visually is the Stability contribution to uncertainty Note if bias was not stable the estimate of bias in this study should not be used The R s and MR charts detect changes in repeatability of calibration If the chart shows a shift or drift in repeatability the amount of change estimated visually is the Consistency contribution to uncertainty Information Tab gJ Stability x gt information Data Study Date 9 30 2003 Co Part No Gage ID MSA3 84 X Part No Gage Desc Validation Data Part Desc Study Type Stability Characteristic Appraiser Number Format f 000000 M Approved Percentage Format eo X mes Resolution 0 1 Use Historic Reference Value 48 5 Historic x Bar 0 Use Range Method v Historic Sigma o 95 Confidence Bounds Lower Upper Bias If Stable 0 019444 0 115306 0 154195 a pa Standard Error 0 065717 Acceptable Standard Dev 0 394301 Calc Charts Print Record I 4 1 gt E rx of 1 Each of the fields in the Information tab screen is explained in the table below Field Button Name Description Study Date Enter the date of the study this field defaults to the current
407. tact Enter a person s name and phone number to contact in case of emergency Nameand Phone Craft Use this field to categorize your workers by profession You can use a description such as welder or electrical engineer a code like M G 3 or a union number combined with a classification such as 786 Journeyman or 786 Apprentice Rate Enter the employee s hourly rate Seniority Enter the seniority or other work status of the employee You could use this field to store the date that determines seniority Skill Level Using either an internal or external classification system assign a skill level to each employee You could also use this field to indicate multiple skills for your employees assigning letters or numbers for different skills SS No Enter the employee s social security number Job Title Enter the employee s official job title DOB Employee s date of birth Date Hired and Enter the date s in which you hired the employee and when the employee started his Date in Job or her current position Department Enter the primary department the employee belongs to Supervisor Enter the name of the employee s direct supervisor Shift Indicate the shift s for which this employee is available Crew Use this field to track the name of the crew s to which this employee either belongs or is qualified to belong Staff User 1and Use these two fields to store any additional employee related information Staff User 2 Staff Entry Tr
408. tatement is included in the Calibration Failure Notice document This field Statement scrolls up and down to allow for longer statements Cancel Click the Cancel button to discard any changes and exit this window Close To save your changes and return to the main menu click the Close button GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 195 Settings Calendar B3 Settings lel EY User Info General Cal Options Calendar Security Automatic Numbering Interface Skip Date Entry Calendar Color Coding Intervals Skip Dates Skip Sun From To eee el 11 2772003 Skip Tue 11 28 2003 l 12 25 2003 Skip Wed b 12 26 2003 Skip Thu Skip Fri Calendar Range Skip Sat 6 Number of Months to Look Ahead 2 Number of Months to Look Skip Date Direction Behind gums Calendar Refresh Rate C Skip Backward 10 Minutes Select Start of Week Cancel Close Sunday 1 The table below describes the fields on this form Field Button Name Description Skip Date Entry Skip GAGEtrak lets you define dates that you want skipped when it calculates calibration Date Direction due dates These days called skip dates or skip days might include holidays vacation periods or plant shutdown periods Enter as many skip dates as necessary To delete a skip date click on the record selector box on the left of each date and press DELETE To skip days of the week like weekends check the box
409. ter for a group of records that match the criteria you enter You can also open previously saved criteria for use and create and save new criteria Add to Queue Button Add filter file to printing queue You can view and print the file from the Report Queue Fill From Queue Button Copy filter information from a saved file in the Report Queue Viewing and Printing Labels When you have finished entering your filter parameters click on the View button to see a preview of your label Make sure that the height of the tape cartridge in your label printer matches the height of the label you have selected under Calibration History Reports then click on the Print button to print your labels Appendix B Gage Calibration and Control This section discusses the basics of gage calibration and control it s intended for users with limited experience but it also serves as a review for more experienced users A list of references is at the end of this section Purpose of Calibration Gages test equipment and measurement standards are all susceptible to deterioration in accuracy during use and storage To maintain accuracy in your measurements you need an ongoing calibration system Calibration Terminology Calibration Unfortunately the terminology associated with calibration control is not universally standardized Typically the term calibration means placing a gage measurement standard or test instrument into a state of accuracy Calibra
410. the File menu and select Print the latter method lets you print multiple charts per page Gage Entry Calibration Button This button will take you directly to the Calibration Entry screen for the current gage ID When you go to Calibration Entry from Gage Entry you can see only the historical calibration records for the gage that you selected in Gage Entry GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 71 To create a new calibration record for the particular gage ID select the new record icon button and or the new record button in the record navigator toward the bottom of the form To return to Gage Entry from Calibration Entry click Gage Entry or the close button in the window s title bar For complete instructions for Calibration Entry please see Chapter 11 Entering Calibration Records beginning on page 97 When you go to Calibration Entry from the main menu you can choose from calibration records for all of your gages Gage Entry Attach Standards Button Attach Standard Group To Multiple Gages Gage Type DIAL M Standard Group Attach Close The Attach Standards button allows the user to attach a standard to a gage type for every gage ID with the same identification for example Gage ID C 002 If there is an existing type already assigned to the gage and you try to attach a new standard group to this gage record it will replace any previously attached standards that have the same standard ID as the new
411. the gage The button to the right of this field brings up the Calibration Formula Listing for more information see Calibration Formula Listing on page 101 Accuracy Before This field shows the accuracy value based on the before measurement Before minus Nominal Accuracy After In this field you ll see the accuracy value based on the after measurement After minus Nominal Limited Use Based on the gage s accuracy compared to its calibration standard use this box to restrict the gage to limited use meaning that it shouldn t be used for measurement of this particular range Gage ID of Standard This field stores the Gage ID of the reference standard which is important for traceability back to a specific standard You can manually enter the standard s gage ID or select from a list of available standards shown below by clicking the small button on the right of this field The list shows only those gage records that have X s in their Gage Entry Ref Standardcheckboxes 53 Select Gage ID of Ref Standard x 1D Descipion Next Due Date Past Uncet MSGB1 GAGE BLOCK SET 81PC__ MEI S N 1234 E INCH GAGE BLOCK jo 01 2003 ES 0 0005 FRI S N 1234 2 E INCH GAGE BLOCK jo 10 2003 ES 0 0005 S N 2345 21NCH GAGE BLOCK 04 08 2005 0 0005 WT2 WEIGHT STD 100 GRAMs CLA 01 03 2003 EMI L WT30 WEIGHT STD 5000 GRAM chej 03 03 2003 X jo Note A gage cannot be selected if a Reference Standard is past
412. the gage ID record View Print Button If there is a single procedure attachment associated with the current procedure and the View Print button is clicked the procedure attachment will open when clicked If there are multiple procedure attachments select the Procedure Attachments tab and select each attachment separately for viewing B3 Calibration Entry gt Calibration Measurements Procedures Labels Signature Attachments User Defined Calibration Scans Gage ID c 002 gt Procedure Text Procedure Attachments File File Description W C 002 Procedure doc Microsoft Word Document W NC 002 Instructions doc Microsoft Word Document Record Iq 4 View Print Record I 4 1 gt rl gt gt of 62 GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 103 The table below describes the fields in this area Field Button Name Description Gage ID The ID of the selected gage will appear in this field File Path of file attachment Note Verify that all users of this application have the ability to view the contents of this file This includes both access to the directory where this file is stored and having sufficient network security rights to open this file File Description Description of attached file type For example if the attached file is a Microsoft Word document the Description field will contain Microsoft Word Document View Print Button Select this button to open the se
413. the table tbMaster another field is added The part of the statement ms_code as BCode contains the symbol also known as the concatenator symbol adds the symbol at the beginning and end of the code and then applies the alias BCode This new field name is now included in the Fields window x Cade To add a bar code to the report first click on the Bar Code button and drag a rectangle area in the report field where you wish to put your bar code Now click on the title bar of the part of your canvas where you placed your bar code In this case select the Detail bar 2 MM Seen S noc dio er PageFooter Currently there is only one way of linking the bar code item to the bar code field Bcode you created Click on the View Script button al to open the script window 248 Chapter 8 Customizing Reports m Object Detail Events OnFormat Sub OnFormat 7 If you want to use a numeric field for your bar code use the End Sub amp instead of the sign rpt Sections 2 Controls FieldiO Caption rpt Sections amp ms id amp The amp converts the value of the numeric field into string so it can concatenate properly with the two Follow the syntax below to set up your script for linking the bar code to the bar code field Sub OnFormat rpt Sections 2 Controls Field10 Caption rpt Sections 2 Controls DataControll1 Re
414. this field The total is displayed as Cumulative Times Usedat the top of the Issue Tracking Entry screen Calibrator This field is a list box field from which you can enter or select the code for the supplier that normally calibrates the gage the calibration service supplier You can also set this field to In House or a department or technician s name if calibrated within your own facility simply type the information into this field Later you can use this information to select a group of gages due for calibration by that calibrator Note If you have the GAGEtrak PDA you must enter a calibrator since the PDA downloads calibrations by this field For further information see the GAGEtrak PDA Software User s Manual Last Calibrated By The name of the user who last calibrated the gage appears in this field 62 Chapter 3 Entering Gage Records Field Button Name Calib Freg and Calib Freg Units Gage Frequency Adjusting Interval Description Enter how often the gage should be calibrated such as 45 DAYS When GAGEtrak calculates the next calibration due date it uses this value The field located just to the right of the Calibration Frequencyfield is the Frequency Units field it s not labeled Use the list box button to choose the calibration schedule type You can choose from these types Days the most common units schedule is based on elapsed calendar days Weeks each week equals seven days schedule
415. this button pex s To view the current page at a specific size use this drop down list to select a specific percentage value for magnification or to fit the page into the window end Send To e mail the current report click this button see page 160 To view different pages in Print Preview use I Pato gt or Press To PAGE DOWN Move to the next page END Move to the last page PAGE UP Go to the previous page HOME Move to the first page Output To The Output To export formats for reports from the File menu allows you to transmit reports to Rich Text Format RTF Portable Document Format PDF HTML HTM HTML Microsoft Excel xXLs Tagged Image Format TIF and MS DOS Text TXT If you save a file in RTF format and then open that file in a word processing application such as Microsoft Word your data will have the appearance and formatting of the GAGEtrak report that you exported If you output to a text file all of the data will be present but the formatting will be lost Output to an Excel spreadsheet is the best option to select when you wish to export a report Choose Portable Document Format to create a report that appears identical to the report you see in GAGEtrak others will be able to print but not edit this report even if they do not have GAGEtrak as long as they have the free Adobe Acrobat Reader The following is an example of the Export Format and Export Options selections for reports Select the expor
416. this might also be a department within your own company Status This field lets you close the service request whether the status of the individual gages listed below is Openor Closed 79 80 Chapter 6 Entering Service Requests Field Button Name Description Completion Date After service on all gages listed below has been completed use this field to set the completion date for the entire service request Enter the date or click the small button on the right of this field to automatically enter today s date Comments In this field enter any notes about this request Gage ID Choose the ID of the first gage for which you need service Next Due Date The gage s next due date is displayed here Completion Date Each gage has a completion date for the service request Insurance Amt Accept the original cost from Gage Entry or enter a new amount for which you want to insure the device use for return freight insurance if you re sending the device out for repair or calibration Status Mark the service status for each gage as Openor Closed View To view the letter currently linked to this record click View To view all available letters formatted for Service Request access Setup Setup CA Service Requests Print Click Printto print the letter associated with this record Chapter 7 Kit Entry A kit is a collection of gages or accessories used to measure a specific part Gages or accessories comprising a kit may be issued individ
417. tion Enter the actual amount of time the calibration required or click the Sar button to use the built in calibration timer see below Account No Enter an account number or other tracking number associated with the cost examples include a job purchase order invoice or customer number Certificate No Record the certificate number issued by the outside calibration provider or your company You can use this field in one of two ways You can type in any alpha numeric information you wish or you may use automatic numbering If you want to use automatic numbering you must first set up your numbering in Setup Settings Automatic Numbering You can specify a numbering format and view the last number used 100 Chapter 11 Entering Calibration Records Field Button Name Description MSA Button To enter a study for the current gage click the MSA button MSA studies are explained in Chapter 12 MSA Studies beginning on page 113 Graph Button To view an accuracy chart click the Grap button Please see page 70 for more information Certificate Button If a calibration has been passed select this button to view a summary or a detailed Certificate of Calibration report If the calibration record has not been passed in essence the calibration has failed you will be notified as such and will be given the opportunity to print a Calibration Failure Notice report See page 163 for more information on this report Gage Entry Button Use this butt
418. tion Entry window to return to the Main Menu Click on the Setup icon on the left hand side of the Main Menu and then click on the Settings button The Settings window will appear Click on the tab labeled Security and check the Enable Security checkbox then select Application Logon from the Logon Method drop down list B3 Settings lel ES User Info General Cal Options Calendar Security Automatic Numbering Interface Security Audit Trail v Enable Security advanced Audit Log Vi Enable Audit Trail v Enable Security Messages Remove Audit Trail records after Applic ation Logon m Logon Method this many days Leave blank to not remove records Require Password Changes 14 Number of Days Before Password Change 4 Minimum password length v Electronic Signature Login 30 User Login Timeout Period mins Do Not Archive Unsigned Calibration Do Not Archive Unapproved Calibration Electronic Signature Email the fF recipients email addresses separated by semicolons after 3 unsuccessfull login attempts v Restrict Issue To Authorized Users Cancel Close For more information on GAGEtrak s security settings see Securityon page 204 of the GAGEtrak System Administrator s Guide Click on the checkbox labeled Electronic Signature Login to require users to login with their User ID and password whenever they click on the Sign or Unsign button This feature helps preve
419. tion Records will have populated the field which in turn helps in computing the accuracy values This field is an editable field If the Add New button is selected the Formula Entry module will open for your use Refer to Calibration Formula Entryon page 110 for more information Calibration Entry Procedures In this screen you can see any calibration procedures that are attached to the gage B8 Calibration Entry x Calibration Measurements Procedures Labels Signature Attachments User Defined Calibration Scans Gage ID c 002 M Procedure Text Procedure Attachments Procedure Name CP22E Revision 12 01 99 DIAL DIGITAL AND VERNIER CALIPERS awww iso org gt Calibration Frequency 12 months can be modified according to stabilty purpose and usage b gt Record 4 4 View Print Record I 4 1 gt bl rx of 62 The first procedure appears automatically to view additional procedures for this gage click the record navigation button at the bottom left corner of the inner window Tip You can t edit procedures here you can only view them To edit procedures go to Procedure Entry The table below describes the fields in this area Field Button Name Description Gage ID The ID of the selected gage will appear in this field Procedure Text Tab Information under this tab includes the Procedure Name Procedure Contentand an OLE Object Linking and Embedding affiliated with
420. tion accordingly The name of the user who last calibrated the gage appears in this field GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software Quick Start Guide 17 Field Button Name Description Calib Freq and Enter the frequency of calibration using the unlabeled list box field on the right for Calib Freq Units the frequency units for example 45 DAYS When the software calculates the next calibration due date it uses this value Your choices for the Units field are explained below Days schedule is based on elapsed calendar days Weeks each week equals seven days schedule is based on elapsed calendar weeks Months schedule is based on elapsed calendar months DOM sets a calibration on a fixed day of the month for example 5 DOM sets the gage calibration to the 5 of every month EOM rounds the next due date to the end of the month in which it occurs For example 6 EOM means every 6 months but the program extends the due date to the end of the sixth month or the last working day of the month if you re using skip days see the System Administrator s Guidefor more information Years each year equals 365 days schedule is based on elapsed calendar years Each Use select this option if you calibrate the gage before or after each use you must manually enter your due dates Usage when using this schedule the program won t create a next due date for calibration It will however create an estimated due date based o
421. tion click on the Find button to filter records in the database Advanced Filter Command Use the Advanced Filter command when you need to find a particular record or group of records This command allows you to set up customized search filters for your records searching by any or all fields in the form You can even save search criteria so that you don t have to set up the same searches repeatedly An unlimited number of frequently used searches can be saved and retrieved Advanced Filter is accessible from the right click shortcut menu the Records menu and the program toolbar Y Find records that match these criteria New Search Open Search Save Search Define more criteria f 6 C And C Or Add to List Field Condition Value Find Close To set up criteria select values for the Field Condition and Value fields and select the Add to List button Make sure you select the radio button for the first criteria or the program will prompt you to do so when you click the Find button You can add unlimited numbers of criteria by selecting the appropriate join condition of And and Or You can edit directly in the criteria field provided you know the right syntax Select the Find button to activate your filter Accessing All Records After using either the quick or advanced filters click the Show All Records button to undo the filter so you can view all of your records Accessing C
422. tion is also called re calibration or reconditioning Purchased Precision Standards Companies buy these high accuracy measurement standards such as gage blocks or standard load cells from outside sources These standards represent the highest degree of accuracy in a company Usually your only form of calibration control on one of these standards is your supplier s certification that the standard is traceable to the U S Department of Commerce s National Institute of Standards and Technology NIST formerly the National Bureau of Standards Your supplier an independent laboratory or the NIST must perform any subsequent calibrations on these standards Purchased Working Standards These standards aren t as accurate as the precision standards they usually don t cost as much either You use them to check calibration internally before using gages or test equipment You might calibrate these standards in house but more often you send them to an outside source for calibration Test Equipment The term test equipment covers a variety of measuring equipment sometimes including working standards You use this equipment to check your products and manufacturing processes Check test equipment for calibration before you use it even if it s brand new 169 170 Appendix B Gage Calibration and Control Test Materials This term refers to all consumable standards such as films or liquids used in calibrating test equipment Since va
423. tiveness per part The percent of parts that consistently matched the variable gage False Alarm Rate The percent of parts that were accepted by the variable gage and had at least one rejection by the appraisers Miss Rate per Part The percent of parts that were rejected by the variable gage and had at least one acceptance by the appraiser s Total The percentages add up to 100 Signal Detection Tab If reference values are available from a variable gage this tab estimates Gage Repeatability GRR for the attribute gage Gage RR Attribute Risk Analysis P Information Input Crosstabs Effectiveness Miss Rate Analysis Signal Detection Study Date 11012002 Co Pat No Msa SS Gage ID zoa Calper 5 PaitNo fizz 6s ZTol GRR for Attribute Gage GRR for Variable Gage Reference Appraiser Reference Appraiser Signal detection has the following fields and buttons Field Button Description GRR for Attribute Gage GRR is estimated as the range from consistently out to consistently in If the study includes Upper and Lower Specification Limits GRR will be an average range and GRR of Tol will also be calculated Assuming the attribute gage is for sorting or validation and is not used for process control the criteria is GRR 96 of Tol of 10 or less is acceptable GRR of Tol over 30 is unacceptable GRR for Variable Gage The GRR that was entered on the information tab 1 50 The Reference Values f
424. to determine t critical t Stat Each coefficient is converted to a t Statistic so it can be compared tot Critical t Critical A 95 two sided confidence limit for the t distribution When the absolute value of either t Statistic is larger than t Critical the Linearity error is not acceptable Printing the Linearity Study Print Gage R amp R Study OL x Select Print Option PRINT This Study Data Sheet vw This Study Data Sheet To print the study report click the This Study button that s in the Print section To preview the study report on screen click the This Study button that s in the View section Use the Data Sheet buttons to print or preview a blank data collection sheet you can use to record measurements during the study Viewing Printing and Sending Charts Click on the Chart button and choose Linearity Chart or Histogram Each chart has a button for Print and a button for Send as an email attachment We ll discuss each type of chart next Linearity Chart To generate a Linearity chart click on the Chart button You ll see a plot of individual and average Bias versus Reference Value as well as a best fit linear regression line and bow tie shaped confidence limits To be acceptable the zero Bias line must fit within the confidence limits 134 Chapter 12 MSA Entry Example Linearity Chart 2 000000 4 000000 6 000000 8 000000 10 000000 Reference Value Histogram The Histogram is discu
425. to locate them and select Skip or if you have modified certain reports and would like to replace them with the updated report then select Overwrite on the Action drop down to the right Additionally if you would like to save the updated report with a new report name you can do this by selecting Save As from the Action drop down and providing a New Report Name in the field to the right of the report being renamed If all of the versions match from left to right then you need not run the DTU The DTU will not overwrite new reports that have been created by the user If you are unsure about whether this utility should be run please contact Technical Support for assistance on running the report DTU Appendix B Table Definitions Key Fields A key field is a single field or combination of fields that the program uses to uniquely identify each record in a table In the tables that follow if the Data Type column contains the word Key it means that this field or combination of fields is a key field Combination Key Fields This table shows combination key fields two key fields are identified Field Name Data Type Field Size Gage ID Text Key 50 Standard ID Text Key 50 The following data table is acceptable at least one of the key fields is unique Gage ID Standard ID 100 10 1 Inch Block 100 10 2 Inch Block Whereas this data table is notacceptable none of the key fields is unique Gage ID Standard ID 100 10 1 Inch Block 10
426. to purchase the product in order to remove the expiration date and activate the software Expiration Date 01 17 2004 As the system continues to count down the days to expiration you will be presented with a second message seven days before your evaluation period expires For your convenience this period will not expire on a Saturday or a Sunday If the demo system serial number is registered and has been entered in the Web License and Demo Settings website database and you have an active Internet connection select the Online Update button on the Modify License form A Trigger Code will be generated that removes the demo restriction When you select OK you will be prompted with the following message Modification Successful x i The demonstration expiration date has been removed If the demo system serial number is not registered and you do not have an active Internet connection and you ve selected the Online Update button you will be presented with the following message Update Unsucesstfull xi AN The application was unable to update through the online interface Please contact Technical Supporto update this workstation To continue your license call CyberMetrics Technical Support at 480 922 7300 for update instructions Chapter 7 Utilities Features included under this section of the application could potentially cause undesirable effects to the data within the application if used without a full understanding of the
427. tor s Guide contains detailed information about different ways to install GAGEtrak and set it up on a network including how to set it up in a client server environment However if you ll just be using the program on one PC and installing it from the CD ROM follow these instructions 1 Click the Windows Start button and select the Run command 2 Place the GAGEtrak Version 6 CD into your CD ROM drive D the drive may vary depending on your system setup and enter D SETUP EXE in the Open field in the Run box 3 Follow the installation instructions on your screen 10 Chapter 3 Installing and Running GAGEtrak Running GAGEtrak To run your program for the first time double click the GAGEtrak 6 shortcut on the desktop Another way to run GAGEtrak Is to click the Start button select Programs and then select the GAGEtrak 6 program group Choose GAGEtrak 6 from this program group to start using GAGEtrak Logon GAGEtrak requires users to login if you have installed the Standard application and activated security through Settings Security or if you have chosen to install the 21 CFR Compliant Application in which case security is automatically activated The Logon window shown below will appear Enter your User ID and password in the appropriate fields then click OK to login Note The 21 CFR Part 11 Compliant version of GAGEtrak automatically activates security Therefore when GAGEtrak is launched for the first time you must lo
428. trol Menu ICON eee e eren erre nns 41 Copy Procedu eS wet t ita d uL E eee 78 309 310 Index Correction Factor ANOVA eere 131 Corrective ACO ad i ERRARE 81 82 166 Current EO Cation sese oco cor RU esos 55 70 71 92 Sel e E M HM 63 172 D Data Lransrer JH Iosue iecit o tU cordon cons 260 Database Creating a New Database sss 305 Open Database co tat bh t ai 182 192 Datasheet View 38 41 43 45 48 49 50 Date Next Calibration Due Date esee 64 Next R amp R Due Date ccecscccssscccesscccssrcccsetcceeeees 65 Purchase Dale ttt e vtta ia e vba etse eges aea 55 Rellrement Dale p pH 55 SSFVIEeT SEe eee eese Pee o ds 55 Bisnis WEISEN 307 Deleting Records out ues eddie md UR UL 49 BI e lmiggl a EE E OTT 92 101 DESCHI HON EN T Pm 165 GAS NU TET 55 Display GILLIS ss EN E NER RUE 44 Hidden Colmo sina i 43 Drawing INUTbel aant Debe 56 60 75 E Edit AIL Tables 4t Let LS x MEC 229 Edit MEIU anaa A 51 Employee ID Creating EET 215 Environmental Conditions eese 101 EB seer usec gaseous se A NA 63 Equipment Variation EV sss 117 EFFOL ENAT Du atas Sii UE ves to Sdeet al 122 Error Message Duplicate Value in Index 308 309 Export Import See Exporting Data and Importing Data Exporting arc 225 F
429. ts NIST number here Calibration Standards Entry Select the Standards tab to define the set of standards that you ll measure when you calibrate the gage Later GAGEtrak automatically copies these standards to the calibration record Enter as many calibration standards as you need Calibration standards can be entered in three different ways 1 Selection of Standard Group 2 Prefill 3 Manual Entry GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software Quick Start Guide 15 If you have already set up standard groups simply select the name of the Standard Group and all of the calibration standards from that group will be assigned to the gage If you have two or more incremental standards use the Standards PreFill feature to save data entry time and avoid mistakes Click the Fill button in the Standards screen and this screen appears Gage D BRIT Number of Standards D 1111 Start Value D Increment Value nho Standard Names 1 Type fv Ref Type gf Gage ID of Standard d Units D 5 Format 8 000 End Value Fill Close Enter the information for the set of standards and then click Fill GAGEtrak automatically enters the information into the Standards screen BS Gage Entry Bee gt Information Specifications History Standards Parts Procedures Calibration Schedule R amp R Schedule User Defined Auth Persons Attachments Events Gage ID C 002 Description CALIPER DIAL 12 INCH Stand
430. tting Up GAGEtrak Field Button Name Close Description If you want to save your changes click Close to return to the main menu The Main Menu functionality is similar to Form Tabs but pertains to the main menu items instead The Menu Name is the default menu description used in GAGEtrak and can be renamed in the Custom Menu Name field Settings Menu Bar The tabs within the main menu features can be revised to be more client expressive for example the Measurements tab can be revised to read Capacity in Calibration Entry User Info General Cal Options Calendar Security Automatic Numbering Interface Custom Labels Gage Custom Calibration Custom Form Captions Form Tabs Main Menu Menu Bar Messages Menu Bar Name Std Default MenuB ar Menu Bar Default Name gt srie Menu Bar Custom Name amp File Record I 4 1 P gt i Dr of 2 Filtered Cancel Close The table below describes the fields on this form Field Button Name Menu Bar Name Menu Bar Default Name Menu Bar Custom Name Sub Menu Default Name Sub Menu Custom Name Cancel Close Description Is the name of the menu group for example e Std Default MenuBar the visible menu when any module is selected from the Main Menu e Std Form MenuBar the visible menu when entry forms are activated e Std Form MenuBar Filter add to Bookmarks filter The default name assigned to the field withi
431. tudies GAGEtrak can accommodate subgroup sizes of 1 to 10 Information Data Study Date 3 30 2003 Co Part No Gage ID M5A3 84 X Part No M Gage Desc Validation Data Part Desc Sub Group 1 29 2004 2 28 2004 3 28 2004 4 29 2004 5 29 2004 6 29 2004 7 29 2004 8 29 2004 9 29 2004 10 29 2004 11 29 2004 12 28 2004 1 18 2005 Record I 4 1 b ot rx of 12 Calc Charts Record I 4 1 gt 1 rs or 1 The subgroup record fields are explained below use the table s horizontal scroll bar to view the fields on the rightmost side of the table GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 145 Field Name Description Sub Use this number to identify the subgroup usually you will start with 1 then go to 2 then 3 and keep using consecutive numbering However you can also use letters such as M 01 M 02 then M 03 Date In this field enter the date on which you measured the repeated readings 1 through 10 Enter the actual measurements taken on the master or master part For example if you re taking a sample size of three repeated readings enter the first reading in field 1 the second in field 2 the third in field 3 In this example the subgroup size is five so fields 6 through 10 remain blank R In this field you ll see the range for the sub group the largest reading minus the smallest reading This value is calculated you cannot change it s
432. tudy Date 20520005 Co Part No Gage ID COMPARATOR L Pat No fio 221 3 SC Gage Desc 14 Kodak Optical Comparator Part Desc Bracket Front NIST No 1 Study Type linearity amp Bias Characteristic NENNEN Appraiser L _ Use Range Method for ho Approved Comments Number Format 4 0000 M Percentage Format 4 000000 M 1 2 3 4 5 Patel Vabes aff ef fl Ava Bias per Part MS A260 acess ez EET Predicted Bias 04733 o2zt0n 0 0533 ater 05800 Coefficient DF t Stat t Critical Goodness of Fit 07443 Intercept 07367 56 0000 207 x stdEna O28 sope 487 Seana 12095 200 x Prefill Calc Charts Print Record I 4 ll 1 gt E rs of 2 Enter the five reference values in the yellow part reference area The smallest reference values should be entered as 1 and the largest reference values entered as 5 Click the Trials tab to begin entering the measurements for each size Start with Column 1 Click the TAB or ENTER key to advance to the next measurement for Column 1 until all 12 measurements have been entered Follow the same procedure for the rest of the columns Trials Tab Linearity Bias and Uncertainty P Linearity Trials Bias Uncertainty Study Date fi 2 05 2003 Co Part No Gage ID COMPARATOR Part No 0 221 3 X Gage Desc fi 4 Kodak Optical Comparator Part Desc Bracket Front 1 2 3 4 5 if27 a1 ss ve a1 af 25 3s 37 77 93 ap 24
433. tup Gage Events Select this utility to establish events that can be associated with a particular gage when Calibration Entry Events is selected P Event Gage Issued Email ss lt sS Description Triggers when this particular gage is issued Trigger fissued f Action endEmal ss Record I 4 1 gt rx of 9 When an event is triggered an action can be performed such as running an external application like opening up a Microsoft Word document or initiating a transmission of an email Note As a user you can add additional Gage Events that will be triggered by one of the available selections listed under Trigger The Trigger list is predefined and is non editable as are Actions The table below describes the fields on this form Field Button Name Description Event Name of the event that will be visible in the Events dropdown list box in Gage Entry Events Description Describe the action triggered when the event is selected Triggered What causes the event to initiate Action What will happen once the event has been triggered Chapter 5 Entering Personnel Select the Personnel menu to enter user records Staff Entry In Staff Entry you can enter and view detailed employee records for your staff including information like training ID photo what gages their authorized to use and whether a gage has been issued to them Staff Entry Information B3 Staff Entry f
434. ually but a kit can only be issued If gages or accessories are complete To assist you in tracking all your gages and measurements for every specific part GAGEtrak provides a Kitting feature With this valuable feature you can create a kit assign gages to a specific kit and even track the issuance and return of kits Also GAGEtrak allows you to automatically identify gages that can be used to measure a specific part Kit Entry Information You can create a kit manually by entering all of the gages and other information required into the Kitting window You can also create kits by cloning existing kits and editing the information to make it unique Bid Kit Entry MEE P Information Required Gage Types Required Gages History KitID Kit DOT1 Kit Description DOOR PANEL KIT Storage Location BIN 1 2 m v Available for Issue Current Location BIN 1 2 ws Procedure 80123 Issue Clone Record wK 9 b gt i gt gt of 1 Field Button Name Description Kit ID Enter a unique identifier for a Kit Kit Description Enter a detailed description of the makeup of the kit Storage Location Permanent location of a kit Current Location Location of kit right now Available for Issue When checked that means that all Required Gage Typesand Required Gageshave been returned allowing the Kit to be re issued Procedure Identify the procedure that describes how to use the gages in the current kit with the parts they are
435. uble 8 b13 Double 8 b14 Double 8 b15 Double 8 b16 Double 8 b17 Double 8 b18 Double 8 b19 Double 8 b110 Double 8 b21 Double 8 b22 Double 8 b23 Double 8 b24 Double 8 b25 Double 8 b26 Double 8 b27 Double 8 b28 Double 8 b29 Double 8 b210 Double 8 b31 Double 8 b32 Double 8 b33 Double 8 b34 Double 8 b35 Double 8 b36 Double 8 b37 Double 8 b38 Double 8 b39 Double 8 b310 Double 8 c11 Double 8 c12 Double 8 c13 Double 8 c14 Double 8 c15 Double 8 c16 Double 8 c17 Double 8 GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 281 Field List Data Type Length c18 Double 8 c19 Double 8 c110 Double 8 c21 Double 8 c22 Double 8 C23 Double 8 C24 Double 8 C25 Double 8 c26 Double 8 C27 Double 8 c28 Double 8 c29 Double 8 c210 Double 8 c31 Double 8 c32 Double 8 c33 Double 8 c34 Double 8 c35 Double 8 c36 Double 8 c37 Double 8 c38 Double 8 c39 Double 8 C310 Double 8 name a Text 50 name b Text 50 name c Text 50 SixSigmaVar Double 8 Ref1 Double 8 Ref2 Double 8 Ref3 Double 8 Ref4 Double 8 Ref5 Double 8 Ref6 Double 8 Ref7 Double 8 Ref8 Double 8 Ref9 Double 8 Ref10 Text 50 LinBias Double 8 LinSlope Double 8 LinFit Text 100 LIN Text 50 LINTOL_PCT Text 50 LINPV_PCT Text 50 ChartNo Double 8 SubGroupNo Text 50 NumbFormat Text 50 PercFormat Text 50 StdError Text 100 Confidence Text 100 InterceptCOE Text 100 InterceptDF Text 100 InterceptTSTAT Text 100 282 Appendix B Table Definitions Field List
436. ulate the next R amp R due date but don t want to enter a calibration record for the gage GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software Quick Start Guide 19 Field Button Name Description Projected R amp R To the right of the R amp R scheduling you can see the next three anticipated R amp R dates Schedule To calculate these three dates click Next R amp R GAGEtrak automatically updates them based on the current R amp R frequency whenever you add a new R amp R record for the gage Cloning Gage Records If you want to copy a gage record including its set of calibration standards procedures and parts click the Clone Gage button in the Gage Entry Information screen This window will appear S Clone Gage When you clone a gage fields that are specific to the orginal gage will not be brought over to the cloned gage Some of these fields are Last Calibration Date Next Due Date Gage Frequency Adjusting Interval Minimum Frequency and Maximum Frequency Gage S N and other fields Source Gage ID c 002 Gage Numbering Scheme E New Gage ID on00000001 Clone Close Either enter a new gage ID directly into the New Gage ID field or select a gage numbering scheme from the list box If you select a gage numbering scheme GAGEtrak will automatically input the next subsequent gage ID for the new Gage ID based on the automatic numbering scheme developed in Setup Settings Automatic Numbering then click Clone This feature
437. uld enter Gage 1 For more information about wildcards please see the Program Conventions section of the User s Manual Status Use the list box to pick from your available choices for example 1 Active This field is required To add more choices to the Statusfield go to the Setup menu and select Status ID Entry see the System Administrator s Guidefor more information Tip If the Status field is notset to Active the Calibration Due and Calibration Schedule reports will skip over the gage Ref Standard Check this box to indicate that the record is for a calibration reference standard such as a gage block or reference weight not a gage NIST No For reference standards only enter the number that NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology provides for traceability purposes If it s not marked on the reference standard ask your supplier for the number Gage S N Enter the actual gage manufacturer s serial number found on most gages Asset No In this field enter the gage s asset number usually issued by your accounting department Model No Use this field to store the model number of this gage Type This field is a list box field from which you can choose or enter a classification of the type of gage such as Variable Attribute Dial Vernier Hard Digital or SPC Unit of Meas Enter the actual units that the gage measures in such as In mm N LBf LBm
438. ule Calibrator In House st 033172005 Last Calibrated By DefautUser z 06 29 2005 CaibFeg 30 D s zf 092772005 Gage Frequency Adjusting Interval None Minimum Frequency Maximum Frequency Skip Direction Skip Forward X Calibration Hours 2 Est Calibration Cost Next Calib Last Cal Date 10 02 2004 Nest Due Date 1273172004 Record 14 4 1 gt L4 rx of 1 Filtered If Usage or Cycles is selected for Calib Freq the Calibration Schedule changes slightly as shown below Bs Gage Entry Bl x gt Information Specifications History Standards Parts Procedures Calibration Schedule R amp R Schedule User Defined Auth Persons Attachments Events Gage ID fc 002 Description CALIPER DIAL12INCH f CALIPER DIAL12INCH z DIAL 12 INCH Initial Times Used 0 n Calibration Schedule Calibrator In House Last Calibrated By Defaut User Calib Freq 90 Usage Gage Frequency Adjusting Interval N one Average Cycles Usage Per Day Minimum Frequency Maximum Frequency Skip Direction Skip Fowad z Calibration Hours g Est Calibration Cost l iY Last Cal Date i 10 02 2004 Nest Cab Next Due Date DEED Estimated Due Date 0470172005 Use Left Eu Use Used ooo Record I4 4 Il 1 gt gt i rx of 46 Field Button Name Description Initial Times Used GAGEtrak counts how many Issue Tracking records the gage has and adds it to
439. ule calibration dates which GAGEtrak calculates when you click Next Cal b When you add a new calibration record for the gage GAGEtrak automatically updates these dates based on the current frequency Note If you re using the Auto Adjustment of Calibration Frequency feature be aware that these dates do not take into account future adjustments of the calibration frequency since GAGEtrak can t predict if future calibrations will pass or fail 64 Chapter 3 Entering Gage Records Gage Entry R amp R Schedule Hi Gage Entry MEIE Information Specifications History Standards Parts Procedures Calibration Schedule A amp A Schedule User Defined Auth Persons_4 gt Gage ID c 002 Description CALIPER DIAL 12 INCH Projected R amp R Schedule R amp R Freq 45 Days M R amp R Skip Direction z 02 07 2005 Last R amp R Date 11 07 2004 03 24 2005 Last R amp R Result eee 05 09 2005 Next R amp R Due Date 1272272004 Record IM 4 1 P gt i gt gt of 2 Filtered The table below describes the fields in this area Field Button Name Description R amp R Freq and R amp R Enter the frequency of gage R amp R studies such as 6 MONTHS When the software Freq Units calculates the next gage R amp R study date it uses this value Use the field located on the right of the R amp A Frequencyfield to select the Frequency Units schedule type Choose from these options Days the m
440. ur calibration costs for each gage department Report location account number calibrator or other criteria Calibration Labels Batch You must have the optional Calibration Label Kit to print labels You can print a batch of calibration labels based upon the calibration date gage ID location or description for any existing calibration records Tip Use this report to print your calibration labels at the end of the day in one batch This method eliminates the blank waste tape that prints for each label you print from Calibration Entry You ll still get an initial piece of waste tape but after that the printer adjacently ejects and cuts your labels To preview a label check the Previewbox and click the label button To print a label clear the Previewbox then click the label button Be sure to install the appropriate label tape in your printer Calibration History To see a list of calibration history select this report Enter the dates for the time frame in question along with any other filters Check the Calibration Meas box to include the table of calibration measurements used for each calibration Standards Traceability Use this report to provide traceability for your calibration and reference Report standards PART REPORTS Report Description Gage Requirements by Part This report prints gage requirement sheets Part Bar Code Labels Use these reports to print part bar code labels Part Listing These reports list parts inc
441. ur due dates Usage when using this schedule the program won t create a next due date for calibration It will however create an estimated due date based on the gage usage even if you enter a calibration record for the gage When you issue the gage GAGEtrak calculates a predicted estimated due date based on the remaining number of usages days You must use the Issue Tracking records for this to work Cycles similar in principle to the usage days method but schedules calibration only when the total number of cycles equals or exceeds the Frequencyvalue cycles means either the number of parts measured or number of cycles operated You must use Issue Tracking records in order for this schedule type to work Note When calibration frequency is set to either Usage or Cycles the Calibration Schedule form changes appearance in order to accommodate Average Cycles Usages Per Day and an Estimated Due Date fields Bef Use select this option when you must calibrate the gage before every use GAGEtrak will notautomatically calculate calibration due dates for this frequency you must manually enter your due dates Aft Use select this option when you must calibrate the gage a fereach use GAGEtrak w notautomatically calculate calibration due dates for this frequency you must manually enter the due dates If you want GAGEtrak to change this gage s calibration frequency according to its as found condition before calibration make a s
442. ur suppliers Check Enabled to see only active suppliers To see both active and inactive suppliers uncheck Enabled KITTING REPORTS Report Description Kit Listing Lists all or one specified kit and its associated Required Gage Types and Required Gage information For information on editing these reports and creating new reports see Chapter 7 Customizing Reportsin the System Administrator s Guide on page 227 Appendix A Calibration Label Kit The following instructions will help you install and set up the optional GAGEtrak Calibration Label Kit see page 103 You can use the kit to print durable oil resistant adhesive backed calibration labels for your gages test equipment and calibration standards The kit includes a dedicated Brother P Touch PC label printer cables black on white tape cartridge and software drivers for Windows and Macintosh If you ordered extra tape cartridges they are enclosed with your kit Installing the Label Printer and Windows Software First attach the Brother P Touch PC printer s serial port and cables and then put the tape cartridge into the printer Next install the P 7ouch PC Editor for Microsoft Windows software See the enclosed Brother booklets for more detailed instructions Printing Calibration Labels GAGEtrak can print standard calibration labels in widths of 12 1 and 4 Lengths are 1 1 2 2 and 3 A sample label is shown below 1 inch W x t inch L Note
443. ure name for the same gage Two calibration standard ID names on the same calibration record wo supplier records with the same supplier code wo procedures with the same procedure name wo parts with the same part number If an error message appears click OK then click the Undo button or choose Undo from the Edit menu For more information about key fields please see page 265 GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software System Administrator s Guide 305 Previewing or Printing Reports Error Message An error message stating The sum of the margins and the height of the page footer is greater than the length of the page you are printing on appears if you install the P Touch label printer and assign it as the default Windows printer To eliminate this error select your report printer as the default Windows printer GAGEtrak is designed so that calibration labels are printed to the P Touch printer as a specific printer For more information about the label printer please see Appendix A of the User s Manual P Touch Printer Does Not Print Labels If you can preview calibration labels but cannot print them you probably do not have a compatible version of the P Touch printer driver editor or spooler files If you can print labels from the P Touch Editor program but you get a message that your P Touch printer is not installed or recognized you may also have this problem Please visit our web site www cybermetrics com to download t
444. ution is usually Normal 2 Look for the Coverage Factor k and DF Use k as the Divisor If DF is furnished enter it and consider choosing Type A There are multiple kinds of uncertainty that result from materials and gages not being exactly at 20 C 68 F Estimate the Plus or Minus values based on experience and calculate a Sensitivity Coefficient using the length and coefficient of thermal expansion The probability Distribution is usually Rectangular This variable occurs when a pointer or indicator mark is not in the same plane as the dial face or scale and the dial face or scale is not perpendicular to the appraisers line of site Recall trying to read a speedometer from the passenger seat The Probability Distribution is usually Rectangular More Information on Uncertainty For detailed and authoritative information about uncertainty we recommend consulting MST Technical Note 1N1297 It meets all applicable ISO and ANSI Standards and is more specific than the standards Lots of examples are good too and for that we recommend European Accreditation publication EA 4 02 Information on how to calculate Plus or Minus values for specific Uncertainty Contributors comes from the V S7 SEMATECH e Handbook of Statistical Methods See Other Techniques References at the end of the MSA chapter for details on how to download or view these free publications Linearity Formulas x reference value y observation x b intercept a sl
445. work security rights to open this file File Description When a file is added manually to the Procedure the user has the opportunity to include a name in the File Description textbox If the file was automatically inserted with the aid of the Locate File To Attach feature the file format of the selected file attachment will be displayed in the File Description textbox for example a manual created with Microsoft Word will have a File Description of Microsoft Word Document View Button Select this button to activate the registered application associated to the file extension for example Microsoft Word 78 Chapter 5 Entering Procedure Records Procedure Entry Gage List In the Procedure Gage List screen lists all gages affiliated with the particular procedure At a glance users can see what gages will be effected when a particular procedure is altered The subform is Read Only for all users 83 Procedure Entry Procedure Text Procedure Image Attachments Gage List Procedure Name CP22E Revision 12 01 99 Gage ID Gage SN Asset No Model No ialx Record I 4 1 gt rt gt gt of 5 Chapter 6 Entering Service Requests You can use Service Request Entry to track and print service requests for both in house and outside service providers More importantly you can use it to document track and report on corrective actions that you ve issued for failed or malfunctioning gages Select Service Requ
446. xt 255 Table Name ezy AuditLog Description Audit log records Associated From Audit Log Field List Data Type Length FS DateTime Date Time 8 FS User Text 30 Object Text 100 Action Text 100 DataKey Text 100 ItemNumber Long Integer key 4 Table Name ezy_AuditLogData Description Specific pre and post edit audit data Associated From AuditLog Advanced AuditLog Basic frmAuditLog Detail Field List Data Type Length Item Number Long Integer key 4 Field Name Text key 100 Old Value Text 255 New Value Text 255 Memo Value Memo 0 Table Name ezy GroupCustomer Description Specific pre and post edit audit data Associated From Audit Log Field List Data Type Length GroupName Text key 50 Cust_ID Text key 150 OperatorStamp Text 50 DateTimeStamp Date Time 8 274 Appendix B Table Definitions Table Name ezy_GroupGroup Description User Groups Associated From Security and Users Field List GroupName Group ID OperatorStamp DateTimeStamp Table Name ezy GroupPermissions Data Type Length Text key 50 Text key 150 Text 50 Date Time 8 Description Group security rights and restrictions Associated From Security Field List Data Type Length GroupName Text key 50 ObjectType Long Integer 4 ObjectName Text key 255 ControlTypeName Text 50 ControlName Text key 255 Description Text 255 ControlDescription Text 100 Permission Text 50 OperatorStamp Text 50 DateTimeStamp Date Time 8 T
447. y F Value MS MS 0 0059 0 0013 4 5385 Fy 25 from F Table 1 310 ANOVA Table Source ssf ms of es Appraiser 0 048 0 024 2 112028 A E App x Parts 18 0406 00059 45385 cageError 3 ox owg Total 59 2 249 Components of Variance Most of these values are calculated using values from an F distribution table You can find F tables in most statistics manuals Sum Squares AV MSapp MSp nr EV MS r V MS MS k R amp R AV lss EV MS MSy r TV RR PVs Taie S Eee 0 03716 0 00223 EV oog RR 0 00444 Study Variation TV JTV 0 0416 0 204 Repeatability EV JEV 40 00129 0 0359 TV Rep Std Dev Study Variation x 100 0 0359 0 204 x 100 17 6 Reproducibility AV JAV 40 00091 0 0302 TV Std Dev TV 0 0302 0 204 14 8 GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 131 Part x Appraiser INT yf 0 00223 0 0473 TV Std Dev TV 0 0473 0 204 23 2 GRR GRR 4RR SS 0 00444 0 0666 TV Std Dev TV 0 0666 0 204 32 7 Part to Part PV PV SS 0 03716 0 1928 TV Std Dev TV 0 1928 0 204 94 595 Linearity Bias and Uncertainty Linearity amp Bias Study Linearity studies measure multiple reference standards through out the operating range of the gage Typically bias is determined a
448. y you ll upload the information he recorded and update the calibration records in your GAGEtrak database 6 Chapter 2 How Does GAGEtrak Work Later in the morning you finally receive the new gages that you ordered last week Since you already have a gage of the same type as one of these new gages you use the Clone Gage feature to copy the common information about this gage into a new gage record When you clone the gage GAGEtrak copies all of the calibration standards parts and procedures to the clone All you have to do is enter the gage s unique information like its serial number purchase date and next calibration date When you clone a gage fields that are specific to the orginal gage will not be brought over to the cloned gage Some of these fields are Last Calibration Date Next Due Date Gage Frequency Adjusting Interval Minimum Frequency and Maximum Frequency Gage S N and other fields Source Gage ID c 002 Gage Numbering Scheme E New Gage ID 0000000001 Clone Close After you clone the first gage it s time to enter a record for a completely different type of gage You enter all of the specifications for the gage and you re ready to enter its calibration standards Because you will electronically check this gage at incremental intervals during calibration you use GAGEtrak s Calibration Standards Prefill feature to automatically create the eight calibration checkpoints required You ll need a new proc
449. y those records that match your specific conditions Select Records Edit Filter Sort and enter criteria expressions into the Criteria cell row and optionally into the Or cell row If you re using field names in the criteria expression choose only those fields displayed in the field list you must spell the field names exactly as shown Criteria Expression Examples Field If You Enter GAGEtrak Will Find Description Caliper Gages with the description Caliper Description Caliper Or Micrometer Calipers or micrometers NextDue 3 2 2000 Gages due on March 2 2000 48 Chapter 2 Program Conventions Field If You Enter GAGEtrak Will Find NextDue Between 3 1 2000 And Gages due between the 1 and 31 of March 2000 3 31 2000 Current_Location In QC Lab Receiving Gages located in the QC Lab or in Receiving Current_Location Not QC Lab Gages that aren t located in the QC Lab NextDue lt Datel 30 Gages overdue by more than 30 days Datel represents the current date NextDue Year Order Date 2000 Gages due in 2000 NextDue DatePart q Next Due Gages due in the fourth calendar quarter Date 4 Description Like C Gages with descriptions that start with the letter C Description Like A D Gages with descriptions that are between A and D Gage ID Right Gage ID 2 99 Gage IDs that have 99 in the last two field positions Description Is Null Gages with null blank descriptions Description
450. y typing them Whenever you re entering information in a filter or data entry screen double click on any date field to view the calendar this works only in date fields When the calendar first appears if the date field is blank then the date on the calendar will be the current date If there is a date in the field the calendar will show that date To select another date click the up or down arrow buttons to scroll to the desired month and year then click the day of the month Click the OK button to accept the date click the Cancel button to close the calendar without selecting a date 1 ok Today Cancel GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 39 Form Views of Records After you click Find in a filter window GAGEtrak looks through your database and opens the first record in the set displaying it in Form view Form views of records show you only one record at a time while Table or Datasheet views display many records at a time each row represents a record and many rows records are displayed at once Form view is the default presentation of your data use the toolbar or the View menu to switch between Form and Datasheet views Sample Form View of a Gage Record ES Gage Entry i o x P Information Specifications History Standards Parts Procedures Calibration Schedule R amp R Schedule User Defined Auth Persons Attachments Events Gage ID C002 Description CALIPERD
451. ype Select the type of study ANOVA Long AIAG or Short AlAG Approved Select when study is approved Comments Enter any comments you wish to note Number Format Select the format you want for calculations Co Part No You can enter your internal company part or job number in this field Part No Select a related part number such as the customer or supplier part number Part Desc The description or name of the part appears in this field Characteristic Enter the characteristic that you re evaluating in the study Specification Limits Be sure to enter the minimum and maximum Specification Limit values otherwise the software can t calculate the Votolerance values for your study Sigma Proc Var If you know the 6 Sigma Process Variation of the characteristic that you re measuring enter it here This causes the program to use this value instead of estimating part variation from your sample of study parts If you know the standard deviation of the characteristic from SPC or Capability studies multiply it by six and enter the result here See your Process Engineer or Quality Engineer for help Study Variation After calculation this field will show Total Variation as calculated from the parts It will only match the Total Variation shown below if there was no entry in 6 S gma Proc Var GAGEtrak Calibration Management Software User s Manual 119 The program calculates these fields when you click the Cale button Blank rows result if you u

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

(M)SDS - 純正化学株式会社 製品検索・MSDS検索  optional modules - Topp Pro Professional Audio Gear  Ministry of Housing, Land and Marine Affairs  Dissolvant à gomme  Manuel de cette série  Polk Audio 6600 Speaker User Manual  Manual - FAST.Eu  Samsung 171B Инструкция по использованию  Articulo 2: RESPUESTA DEL TABACO NEGRO  User Guide ITA - ENG  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file